Discovery XR656 Installation Manual IM 5343950-1EN 13

GE Healthcare
gehealthcare.com
Technical
Publication
Direction 5343950-1EN
Revision 13
GE Healthcare
Discovery ™ XR656 Installation Manual
Copyright © 2011-2022 by General Electric Company, Inc. All

Rights Reserved
GE HEALTHCARE
DIRECTION 5343950-1EN, REVISION 13 DISCOVERY XR656 INSTALLATION MANUAL
Published by the GE Company, Inc.

Engineering/Technical:
Page 2
GE HEALTHCARE
LEGAL NOTES
TRADEMARKS
All other products and their name brands are the trademarks of their respective holders.
COPYRIGHTS
All Material, Copyright © 2011-2022 by General Electric Company, Inc. All rights reserved. The
material presented and contained herein may not be reproduced in any form or manner, without the
written permission of General Electric Company, Inc.
Legal Notes Page 3

GE HEALTHCARE
This page is intentionally left blank.
Page 4 Legal Notes

GE HEALTHCARE
IMPORTANT PRECAUTIONS
LANGUAGE
ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ • ТО В А УП Ъ ТВ А Н Е ЗА РА Б О ТА Е Н А Л И Ч Н О С А М О Н А А Н ГЛ И Й С КИ ЕЗИ К.
(BG) • А КО Д О С ТА В Ч И КЪ Т Н А УС Л УГА ТА Н А КЛ И ЕН ТА И ЗИ С КА ЕЗИ К,
РА З Л И Ч ЕН О Т А Н ГЛ И Й С КИ , ЗА Д Ъ Л Ж ЕН И Е Н А КЛ И ЕН ТА Е Д А О С И ГУРИ
П РЕ В О Д .
• Н Е И ЗП О Л ЗВ А Й ТЕ О Б О РУД В А Н ЕТО П РЕД И Д А С ТЕ С Е КО Н С УЛ ТИ РА Л И
И Р А ЗБ РА ЛИ УП Ъ ТВ А Н ЕТО З А РА Б О ТА .
• Н ЕС П А ЗВ А Н ЕТО Н А ТО В А П Р ЕД УП РЕЖ Д Е Н И Е М О Ж Е Д А Д О В ЕД Е Д О
Н А РА Н Я В А Н Е Н А Д О С ТА В Ч И КА Н А УС ЛУГА ТА , О П ЕРА ТО РА И Л И
П А Ц И ЕН Т В РЕЗ УЛ ТА Т Н А ТО КО В УД А Р И Л И М ЕХА Н И Ч Н А И Л И Д РУГА
О П А С Н О С Т.
警告 • 本维修手册仅提供英文版本。
(ZH-CN) • 如果维修服务提供商需要非英文版本，客户需自行提供翻译服务。
• 未详细阅读和完全理解本维修手册之前，不得进行维修。
• 忽略本警告可能对维修人员，操作员或患者造成触电、机械伤害或其他形式的伤害。
VÝSTRAHA • TENTO PROVOZNÍ NÁVOD EXISTUJE POUZE V ANGLICKÉM JAZYCE.

(CS) • V PŘÍPADĚ, ŽE EXTERNÍ SLUŽBA ZÁKAZNÍKŮM POTŘEBUJE NÁVOD V
JINÉM JAZYCE, JE ZAJIŠTĚNÍ PŘEKLADU DO ODPOVÍDAJÍCÍHO JAZYKA
ÚKOLEM ZÁKAZNÍKA.
• NESNAŽTE SE O ÚDRŽBU TOHOTO ZAŘÍZENÍ, ANIŽ BYSTE SI PŘEČETLI
TENTO PROVOZNÍ NÁVOD A POCHOPILI JEHO OBSAH.
• V PŘÍPADĚ NEDODRŽOVÁNÍ TÉTO VÝSTRAHY MŮŽE DOJÍT K PORANĚNÍ
PRACOVNÍKA PRODEJNÍHO SERVISU, OBSLUŽNÉHO PERSONÁLU NEBO
PACIENTŮ VLIVEM ELEKTRICKÉHOP PROUDU, RESPEKTIVE VLIVEM
MECHANICKÝCH ČI JINÝCH RIZIK.
ADVARSEL • DENNE SERVICEMANUAL FINDES KUN PÅ ENGELSK.

(DA) • HVIS EN KUNDES TEKNIKER HAR BRUG FOR ET ANDET SPROG END
ENGELSK, ER DET KUNDENS ANSVAR AT SØRGE FOR OVERSÆTTELSE.
• FORSØG IKKE AT SERVICERE UDSTYRET MEDMINDRE
DENNE SERVICEMANUAL HAR VÆRET KONSULTERET OG ER FORSTÅET.
• MANGLENDE OVERHOLDELSE AF DENNE ADVARSEL KAN MEDFØRE
SKADE PÅ GRUND AF ELEKTRISK, MEKANISK ELLER ANDEN FARE FOR
TEKNIKEREN, OPERATØREN ELLER PATIENTEN.
Important Precautions Page 5

GE HEALTHCARE
WAARSCHUWING • DEZE ONDERHOUDSHANDLEIDING IS ENKEL IN HET ENGELS

VERKRIJGBAAR.
(NL)
• ALS HET ONDERHOUDSPERSONEEL EEN ANDERE TAAL VEREIST, DAN IS
DE KLANT VERANTWOORDELIJK VOOR DE VERTALING ERVAN.
• PROBEER DE APPARATUUR NIET TE ONDERHOUDEN VOORDAT DEZE
ONDERHOUDSHANDLEIDING WERD GERAADPLEEGD EN BEGREPEN IS.
• INDIEN DEZE WAARSCHUWING NIET WORDT OPGEVOLGD, ZOU HET
ONDERHOUDSPERSONEEL, DE OPERATOR OF EEN PATIËNT GEWOND
KUNNEN RAKEN ALS GEVOLG VAN EEN ELEKTRISCHE SCHOK,
MECHANISCHE OF ANDERE GEVAREN.
• THIS SERVICE MANUAL IS AVAILABLE IN ENGLISH ONLY.

WARNING
• IF A CUSTOMER’S SERVICE PROVIDER REQUIRES A LANGUAGE
(EN) OTHER THAN ENGLISH, IT IS THE CUSTOMER’S RESPONSIBILITY TO
PROVIDE TRANSLATION SERVICES.
• DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SERVICE THE EQUIPMENT UNLESS THIS
SERVICE MANUAL HAS BEEN CONSULTED AND IS UNDERSTOOD.
• FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO THE
SERVICE PROVIDER, OPERATOR OR PATIENT FROM ELECTRIC
SHOCK, MECHANICAL OR OTHER HAZARDS.
HOIATUS • KÄESOLEV TEENINDUSJUHEND ON SAADAVAL AINULT INGLISE KEELES.

(ET) • KUI KLIENDITEENINDUSE OSUTAJA NÕUAB JUHENDIT INGLISE KEELEST
ERINEVAS KEELES, VASTUTAB KLIENT TÕLKETEENUSE OSUTAMISE EEST.
• ÄRGE ÜRITAGE SEADMEID TEENINDADA ENNE EELNEVALT
KÄESOLEVA TEENINDUSJUHENDIGA TUTVUMIST JA SELLEST ARU
SAAMIST.
• KÄESOLEVA HOIATUSE EIRAMINE VÕIB PÕHJUSTADA TEENUSEOSUTAJA,
OPERAATORI VÕI PATSIENDI VIGASTAMIST ELEKTRILÖÖGI, MEHAANILISE
VÕI MUU OHU TAGAJÄRJEL.
VAROITUS • TÄMÄ HUOLTO-OHJE ON SAATAVILLA VAIN ENGLANNIKSI.

(FI) • JOS ASIAKKAAN HUOLTOHENKILÖSTÖ VAATII MUUTA KUIN
ENGLANNINKIELISTÄ MATERIAALIA, TARVITTAVAN KÄÄNNÖKSEN
HANKKIMINEN ON ASIAKKAAN VASTUULLA.
• ÄLÄ YRITÄ KORJATA LAITTEISTOA ENNEN KUIN OLET VARMASTI LUKENUT
JA YMMÄRTÄNYT TÄMÄN HUOLTO-OHJEEN.
• MIKÄLI TÄTÄ VAROITUSTA EI NOUDATETA, SEURAUKSENA VOI OLLA
HUOLTOHENKILÖSTÖN, LAITTEISTON KÄYTTÄJÄN TAI POTILAAN
VAHINGOITTUMINEN SÄHKÖISKUN, MEKAANISEN VIAN TAI MUUN
VAARATILANTEEN VUOKSI.
Page 6 Important Precautions

GE HEALTHCARE
• CE MANUEL DE MAINTENANCE N’EST DISPONIBLE QU’EN ANGLAIS.

ATTENTION
• SI LE TECHNICIEN DU CLIENT A BESOIN DE CE MANUEL DANS UNE
(FR)
AUTRE LANGUE QUE L’ANGLAIS, C’EST AU CLIENT QU’IL INCOMBE
DE LE FAIRE TRADUIRE.
• NE PAS TENTER D’INTERVENTION SUR LES ÉQUIPEMENTS TANT
QUE LE MANUEL SERVICE N’A PAS ÉTÉ CONSULTÉ ET COMPRIS.
• LE NON-RESPECT DE CET AVERTISSEMENT PEUT ENTRAÎNER CHEZ
LE TECHNICIEN, L’OPÉRATEUR OU LE PATIENT DES BLESSURES
DUES À DES DANGERS ÉLECTRIQUES, MÉCANIQUES OU AUTRES.
WARNUNG • DIESE SERVICEANLEITUNG EXISTIERT NUR IN ENGLISCHER SPRACHE.

(DE) • FALLS EIN FREMDER KUNDENDIENST EINE ANDERE SPRACHE BENÖTIGT,
IST ES AUFGABE DES KUNDEN FÜR EINE ENTSPRECHENDE
ÜBERSETZUNG ZU SORGEN.
• VERSUCHEN SIE NICHT DIESE ANLAGE ZU WARTEN,
OHNE DIESE SERVICEANLEITUNG GELESEN UND VERSTANDEN ZU HABEN.
• WIRD DIESE WARNUNG NICHT BEACHTET, SO KANN ES ZU
VERLETZUNGEN DES KUNDENDIENSTTECHNIKERS, DES BEDIENERS ODER
DES PATIENTEN DURCH STROMSCHLÄGE, MECHANISCHE ODER SONSTIGE
GEFAHREN KOMMEN.
ΠΡΟΕΙΔΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ • ΤΟ ΠΑΡΟΝ ΕΓΧΕΙΡΙΔΙΟ ΣΕΡΒΙΣ ΔΙΑΤΙΘΕΤΑΙ ΣΤΑ ΑΓΓΛΙΚΑ ΜΟΝΟ.
(EL) • ΕΑΝ ΤΟ ΑΤΟΜΟ ΠΑΡΟΧΗΣ ΣΕΡΒΙΣ ΕΝΟΣ ΠΕΛΑΤΗ ΑΠΑΙΤΕΙ ΤΟ ΠΑΡΟΝ

ΕΓΧΕΙΡΙΔΙΟ ΣΕ ΓΛΩΣΣΑ ΕΚΤΟΣ ΤΩΝ ΑΓΓΛΙΚΩΝ, ΑΠΟΤΕΛΕΙ ΕΥΘΥΝΗ ΤΟΥ
ΠΕΛΑΤΗ ΝΑ ΠΑΡΕΧΕΙ ΥΠΗΡΕΣΙΕΣ ΜΕΤΑΦΡΑΣΗΣ.
• ΜΗΝ ΕΠΙΧΕΙΡΗΣΕΤΕ ΤΗΝ ΕΚΤΕΛΕΣΗ ΕΡΓΑΣΙΩΝ ΣΕΡΒΙΣ ΣΤΟΝ ΕΞΟΠΛΙΣΜΟ
ΕΚΤΟΣ ΕΑΝ ΕΧΕΤΕ ΣΥΜΒΟΥΛΕΥΤΕΙ ΚΑΙ ΕΧΕΤΕ ΚΑΤΑΝΟΗΣΕΙ ΤΟ ΠΑΡΟΝ
ΕΓΧΕΙΡΙΔΙΟ ΣΕΡΒΙΣ.
• ΕΑΝ ΔΕ ΛΑΒΕΤΕ ΥΠΟΨΗ ΤΗΝ ΠΡΟΕΙΔΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ ΑΥΤΗ, ΕΝΔΕΧΕΤΑΙ ΝΑ
ΠΡΟΚΛΗΘΕΙ ΤΡΑΥΜΑΤΙΣΜΟΣ ΣΤΟ ΑΤΟΜΟ ΠΑΡΟΧΗΣ ΣΕΡΒΙΣ, ΣΤΟ ΧΕΙΡΙΣΤΗ
Ή ΣΤΟΝ ΑΣΘΕΝΗ ΑΠΟ ΗΛΕΚΤΡΟΠΛΗΞΙΑ, ΜΗΧΑΝΙΚΟΥΣ Ή ΑΛΛΟΥΣ
ΚΙΝΔΥΝΟΥΣ.
FIGYELMEZTETÉS • EZEN KARBANTARTÁSI KÉZIKÖNYV KIZÁRÓLAG ANGOL NYELVEN ÉRHETŐ

EL.
(HU)
• HA A VEVŐ SZOLGÁLTATÓJA ANGOLTÓL ELTÉRŐ NYELVRE TART IGÉNYT,
AKKOR A VEVŐ FELELŐSSÉGE A FORDÍTÁS ELKÉSZÍTTETÉSE.
• NE PRÓBÁLJA ELKEZDENI HASZNÁLNI A BERENDEZÉST, AMÍG A
KARBANTARTÁSI KÉZIKÖNYVBEN LEÍRTAKAT NEM ÉRTELMEZTÉK.
• EZEN FIGYELMEZTETÉS FIGYELMEN KÍVÜL HAGYÁSA A SZOLGÁLTATÓ,
MŰKÖDTETŐ VAGY A BETEG ÁRAMÜTÉS, MECHANIKAI VAGY EGYÉB
VESZÉLYHELYZET MIATTI SÉRÜLÉSÉT EREDMÉNYEZHETI.

GE HEALTHCARE
AÐVÖRUN • ÞESSI ÞJÓNUSTUHANDBÓK ER EINGÖNGU FÁANLEG Á ENSKU.

(IS) • EF AÐ ÞJÓNUSTUVEITANDI VIÐSKIPTAMANNS ÞARFNAST ANNAS
TUNGUMÁLS EN ENSKU, ER ÞAÐ SKYLDA VIÐSKIPTAMANNS AÐ SKAFFA
TUNGUMÁLAÞJÓNUSTU.
• REYNIÐ EKKI AÐ AFGREIÐA TÆKIÐ NEMA AÐ ÞESSI ÞJÓNUSTUHANDBÓK
HEFUR VERIÐ SKOÐUÐ OG SKILIN.
• BROT Á SINNA ÞESSARI AÐVÖRUN GETUR LEITT TIL MEIÐSLA Á
ÞJÓNUSTUVEITANDA, STJÓRNANDA EÐA SJÚKLINGS FRÁ RAFLOSTI,
VÉLRÆNU EÐA ÖÐRUM ÁHÆTTUM.
• IL PRESENTE MANUALE DI MANUTENZIONE È DISPONIBILE

AVVERTENZA SOLTANTO IN INGLESE.
(IT)
• SE UN ADDETTO ALLA MANUTENZIONE ESTERNO ALLA GEMS
RICHIEDE IL MANUALE IN UNA LINGUA DIVERSA, IL CLIENTE È
TENUTO A PROVVEDERE DIRETTAMENTE ALLA TRADUZIONE.
• SI PROCEDA ALLA MANUTENZIONE DELL’APPARECCHIATURA
SOLO DOPO AVER CONSULTATO IL PRESENTE MANUALE ED
AVERNE COMPRESO IL CONTENUTO.
• IL NON RISPETTO DELLA PRESENTE AVVERTENZA POTREBBE FAR
COMPIERE OPERAZIONI DA CUI DERIVINO LESIONI ALL’ADDETTO
ALLA MANUTENZIONE, ALL’UTILIZZATORE ED AL PAZIENTE PER
FOLGORAZIONE ELETTRICA, PER URTI MECCANICI OD ALTRI
RISCHI.
• このサービスマニュアルには英語版しかありません。
(JA) • サービスを担当される業者が英語以外の言語を要求される場合、翻訳作業はその業
者の責任で行うものとさせていただきます。
• このサービスマニュアルを熟読し理解せずに、装置のサービスを行わないでくださ
い。
• この警告に従わない場合、サービスを担当される方、操作員あるいは患者さんが、
感電や機械的又はその他の危険により負傷する可能性があります。

GE HEALTHCARE
경고 • 본 서비스 지침서는 영어로만 이용하실 수 있습니다.
(KO) • 고객의 서비스 제공자가 영어 이외의 언어를 요구할 경우, 번역 서비스를 제공하는 것
은 고객의 책임입니다.
• 본 서비스 지침서를 참고했고 이해하지 않는 한은 해당 장비를 수리하려고 시도하지

마십시오.
• 이 경고에 유의하지 않으면 전기 쇼크, 기계상의 혹은 다른 위험으로부터 서비스 제공

자, 운영자 혹은 환자에게 위해를 가할 수 있습니다.
BRĪDINĀJUMS • ŠĪ APKALPES ROKASGRĀMATA IR PIEEJAMA TIKAI ANGĻU VALODĀ.

(LV) • JA KLIENTA APKALPES SNIEDZĒJAM NEPIECIEŠAMA INFORMĀCIJA CITĀ
VALODĀ, NEVIS ANGĻU, KLIENTA PIENĀKUMS IR NODROŠINĀT
TULKOŠANU.
• NEVEICIET APRĪKOJUMA APKALPI BEZ APKALPES ROKASGRĀMATAS
IZLASĪŠANAS UN SAPRAŠANAS.
• ŠĪ BRĪDINĀJUMA NEIEVĒROŠANA VAR RADĪT ELEKTRISKĀS STRĀVAS
TRIECIENA, MEHĀNISKU VAI CITU RISKU IZRAISĪTU TRAUMU APKALPES
SNIEDZĒJAM, OPERATORAM VAI PACIENTAM.
ĮSPĖJIMAS • ŠIS EKSPLOATAVIMO VADOVAS YRA PRIEINAMAS TIK ANGLŲ KALBA.

(LT) • JEI KLIENTO PASLAUGŲ TIEKĖJAS REIKALAUJA VADOVO KITA KALBA – NE
ANGLŲ, NUMATYTI VERTIMO PASLAUGAS YRA KLIENTO ATSAKOMYBĖ.
• NEMĖGINKITE ATLIKTI ĮRANGOS TECHNINĖS PRIEŽIŪROS, NEBENT
ATSIŽVELGĖTE Į ŠĮ EKSPLOATAVIMO VADOVĄ IR JĮ SUPRATOTE.
• JEI NEATKREIPSITE DĖMESIO Į ŠĮ PERSPĖJIMĄ, GALIMI SUŽALOJIMAI DĖL
ELEKTROS ŠOKO.
• MECHANINIŲ AR KITŲ PAVOJŲ PASLAUGŲ TIEKĖJUI, OPERATORIUI AR
PACIENTUI.
ADVARSEL • DENNE SERVICEHÅNDBOKEN FINNES BARE PÅ ENGELSK.

(NO) • HVIS KUNDENS SERVICELEVERANDØR TRENGER ET ANNET SPRÅK, ER
DET KUNDENS ANSVAR Å SØRGE FOR OVERSETTELSE.
• IKKE FORSØK Å REPARERE UTSTYRET UTEN AT DENNE
SERVICEHÅNDBOKEN ER LEST OG FORSTÅTT.
• MANGLENDE HENSYN TIL DENNE ADVARSELEN KAN FØRE TIL AT
SERVICELEVERANDØREN, OPERATØREN ELLER PASIENTEN SKADES PÅ
GRUNN AV ELEKTRISK STØT, MEKANISKE ELLER ANDRE FARER.

GE HEALTHCARE
OSTRZEŻENIE • NINIEJSZY PODRĘCZNIK SERWISOWY DOSTĘPNY JEST JEDYNIE W JĘZYKU

ANGIELSKIM.
(PL)
• JEŚLI DOSTAWCA USŁUG KLIENTA WYMAGA JĘZYKA INNEGO NIŻ
ANGIELSKI, ZAPEWNIENIE USŁUGI TŁUMACZENIA JEST OBOWIĄZKIEM
KLIENTA.
• NIE PRÓBOWAĆ SERWISOWAĆ WYPOSAŻENIA BEZ ZAPOZNANIA SIĘ I
ZROZUMIENIA NINIEJSZEGO PODRĘCZNIKA SERWISOWEGO.
• NIEZASTOSOWANIE SIĘ DO TEGO OSTRZEŻENIA MOŻE SPOWODOWAĆ
URAZY DOSTAWCY USŁUG, OPERATORA LUB PACJENTA W WYNIKU
PORAŻENIA ELEKTRYCZNEGO, ZAGROŻENIA MECHANICZNEGO BĄDŹ
INNEGO.
ATENÇÃO • ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA SÓ SE ENCONTRA DISPONÍVEL

EM INGLÊS.
(PT)
• SE QUALQUER OUTRO SERVIÇO DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA, QUE NÃO A
GEMS, SOLICITAR ESTES MANUAIS NOUTRO IDIOMA, É DA
RESPONSABILIDADE DO CLIENTE FORNECER OS SERVIÇOS DE
TRADUÇÃO.
• NÃO TENTE REPARAR O EQUIPAMENTO SEM TER CONSULTADO E
COMPREENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÉNCIA TÉCNICA
• O NÃO CUMPRIMENTO DESTE AVISO PODE POR EM PERIGO A SEGURANÇA
DO TÉCNICO, OPERADOR OU PACIENTE DEVIDO A CHOQUES ELÉTRICOS,
MECÂNICOS OU OUTROS.
ATENŢIE • ACEST MANUAL DE SERVICE ESTE DISPONIBIL NUMAI ÎN LIMBA ENGLEZĂ.

(RO) • DACĂ UN FURNIZOR DE SERVICII PENTRU CLIENŢI NECESITĂ O ALTĂ
LIMBĂ DECÂT CEA ENGLEZĂ, ESTE DE DATORIA CLIENTULUI SĂ
FURNIZEZE O TRADUCERE.
• NU ÎNCERCAŢI SĂ REPARAŢI ECHIPAMENTUL DECÂT ULTERIOR
CONSULTĂRII ŞI ÎNŢELEGERII ACESTUI MANUAL DE SERVICE.
• IGNORAREA ACESTUI AVERTISMENT AR PUTEA DUCE LA RĂNIREA
DEPANATORULUI, OPERATORULUI SAU PACIENTULUI ÎN URMA
PERICOLELOR DE ELECTROCUTARE, MECANICE SAU DE ALTĂ NATURĂ.

GE HEALTHCARE
ОСТОРОЖНО! • ДАННОЕ РУКОВОДСТВО ПО ОБСЛУЖИВАНИЮ ПРЕДЛАГАЕТСЯ ТОЛЬКО

НА АНГЛИЙСКОМ ЯЗЫКЕ.
(RU)
• ЕСЛИ СЕРВИСНОМУ ПЕРСОНАЛУ КЛИЕНТА НЕОБХОДИМО
РУКОВОДСТВО НЕ НА АНГЛИЙСКОМ, А НА КАКОМ-ТО ДРУГОМ ЯЗЫКЕ,
КЛИЕНТУ СЛЕДУЕТ САМОСТОЯТЕЛЬНО ОБЕСПЕЧИТЬ ПЕРЕВОД.
• ПЕРЕД ОБСЛУЖИВАНИЕМ ОБОРУДОВАНИЯ ОБЯЗАТЕЛЬНО
ОБРАТИТЕСЬ К ДАННОМУ РУКОВОДСТВУ И ПОЙМИТЕ ИЗЛОЖЕННЫЕ В
НЕМ СВЕДЕНИЯ.
• НЕСОБЛЮДЕНИЕ ТРЕБОВАНИЙ ДАННОГО ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЯ МОЖЕТ
ПРИВЕСТИ К ТОМУ, ЧТО СПЕЦИАЛИСТ ПО ОБСЛУЖИВАНИЮ, ОПЕРАТОР
ИЛИ ПАЦИЕНТ ПОЛУЧАТ УДАР ЭЛЕКТРИЧЕСКИМ ТОКОМ,
МЕХАНИЧЕСКУЮ ТРАВМУ ИЛИ ДРУГОЕ ПОВРЕЖДЕНИЕ.
UPOZORNENIE • TENTO NÁVOD NA OBSLUHU JE K DISPOZÍCII LEN V ANGLIČTINE.
(SK) • AK ZÁKAZNÍKOV POSKYTOVATEĽ SLUŽIEB VYŽADUJE INÝ JAZYK AKO

ANGLIČTINU, POSKYTNUTIE PREKLADATEĽSKÝCH SLUŽIEB JE
ZODPOVEDNOSŤOU ZÁKAZNÍKA.
• NEPOKÚŠAJTE SA O OBSLUHU ZARIADENIA SKÔR, AKO SI NEPREČÍTATE
NÁVOD NA OBLUHU A NEPOROZUMIETE MU.
• ZANEDBANIE TOHTO UPOZORNENIA MÔŽE VYÚSTIŤ DO ZRANENIA
POSKYTOVATEĽA SLUŽIEB, OBSLUHUJÚCEJ OSOBY ALEBO PACIENTA
ELEKTRICKÝM PRÚDOM, DO MECHANICKÉHO ALEBO INÉHO
NEBEZPEČENSTVA.
ATENCION • ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO SOLO EXISTE EN INGLES.

(ES) • SI ALGUN PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS AJENO A GEMS SOLICITA UN IDIOMA
QUE NO SEA EL INGLES, ES RESPONSABILIDAD DEL CLIENTE OFRECER UN
SERVICIO DE TRADUCCION.
• NO SE DEBERA DAR SERVICIO TECNICO AL EQUIPO,
SIN HABER CONSULTADO Y COMPRENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO.
• LA NO OBSERVANCIA DEL PRESENTE AVISO PUEDE DAR LUGAR A QUE EL
PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS, EL OPERADOR O EL PACIENTE SUFRAN
LESIONES PROVOCADAS POR CAUSAS ELÉCTRICAS, MECÁNICAS O DE
OTRA NATURALEZA.

GE HEALTHCARE
VARNING • DEN HÄR SERVICEHANDBOKEN FINNS BARA TILLGÄNGLIG PÅ ENGELSKA.

(SV) • OM EN KUNDS SERVICETEKNIKER HAR BEHOV AV ETT ANNAT SPRÅK ÄN
ENGELSKA ANSVARAR KUNDEN FÖR ATT TILLHANDAHÅLLA
ÖVERSÄTTNINGSTJÄNSTER.
• FÖRSÖK INTE UTFÖRA SERVICE PÅ UTRUSTNINGEN OM DU INTE HAR LÄST
OCH FÖRSTÅR DEN HÄR SERVICEHANDBOKEN.
• OM DU INTE TAR HÄNSYN TILL DEN HÄR VARNINGEN KAN DET RESULTERA
I SKADOR PÅ SERVICETEKNIKERN, OPERATÖREN ELLER PATIENTEN TILL
FÖLJD AV ELEKTRISKA STÖTAR, MEKANISKA FAROR ELLER ANDRA
FAROR.
DİKKAT • BU SERVİS KILAVUZUNUN SADECE İNGİLİZCESİ MEVCUTTUR.

(TR) • EĞER MÜŞTERİ TEKNİSYENİ BU KILAVUZU İNGİLİZCE DIŞINDA BİR BAŞKA
LİSANDAN TALEP EDERSE, BUNU TERCÜME ETTİRMEK MÜŞTERİYE DÜŞER.
• SERVİS KILAVUZUNU OKUYUP ANLAMADAN EKİPMANLARA MÜDAHALE
ETMEYİNİZ.
• BU UYARIYA UYULMAMASI, ELEKTRİK, MEKANİK VEYA DİĞER
TEHLİKELERDEN DOLAYI TEKNİSYEN, OPERATÖR VEYA HASTANIN
YARALANMASINA YOL AÇABİLİR.

GE HEALTHCARE
Revision History
Revision Date Reason for change

1 JUL.15, 2011 First Release
2 AUG.11,2011 1. Chapter 3 Tools and Materials Checklist
Section 1.0 Checklist: Add the Loctite 242(Blue)
2. Chapter 7 System Cabinet
Section 3.0 System Cabinet Installation: Add the System main
power cable Connections and its photos
3. Chapter 8 Table
Section 3.0 Initial Table and Bridge Alignment: Add the remove
table shipping 4 brackets and add its photos
4. Chapter 10-Tether Interface Box Installation
Section 2.0 Installation Procedure: add PN#:5400785: TIB Ground
Cable (Cabinet to TIB)
3 AUG.31,2011 1. Chapter 19 Configuration
Section 6.0 Operator Manual (OM) Installation: Update OM
installation procedure.
2. Chapter 22 Regulatory Tests (HHS)
Section 2.0 HHS Compliance Compatibility List: Update HHS
Compliance Compatibility List
4 NOV.04,2011 1. Chapter 1 - Safety and Service
Add section4 Symbols
2. Chapter 8 Table – Section 4.3 Table Ion Chamber/Detector
Installation: Update Step 9
3. Chapter 9 Wall Stand and Extended Wall Stand
Section 3.0 Aligning and Installing the Wall Stand. 3.3 Update left
- right insertion rework
4. Chapter 12: Add Grid Holder Installation
5. Chapter 14 Jumpers, Switches, Terminations and Power
XR656 System Schematics and Drawings manual (5343954-
1EN).updated to XR656 System Schematics (5343955-1EN)
6. Chapter 18 software
Section 4.0: 4.4.4 Perform the “Load from Cold”.updated.
7. Chapter 18 Software
Section 3.0 System Data Backup and Restore updated.
8. Chapter 19 Configuration
Section 8.0 System Login (HIPPA): Change password updated.
9. Chapter 19 Configuration
1.3.6 E-license Generation Process Update
5 May.03,2012 IEC V3 Updated
Revision History Page 13

GE HEALTHCARE
Revision Date Reason for change
6 Dec.20,2013 Add new Patient Barrier Installation Procedure and SN35185
Add Dunker Motor Firmware Download procedure
7 July 02.2014 Add an adjustment procedure of auto position for new 120cm Grid
8 Aug 10.2014 Version control
9 JAN 19.2015 Update 2m, 3m, 4m Bridge-to-Carriage Placement in 3.1.3 of
Chapter 5
Update 2m, 3m, 4m Bridge-to-Stationary Rails in 3.5.1 of Chapter 5
Update Section 6.0 X-ray Tube Stator & Fan/Interlock Connections
in Chapter 5
Update Section 7.0 Collimator in Chapter 5
Update Section 8.0 User Interface (UIF) in Chapter 5
Update Section1.0 Detector BIN Installation (Wall mount) in
Chapter 12
Add a note on Re-mount the detector housing (4 screws) and re-
install the Nylon cable clamp (4 screws) in section 3.0,Chapter 9
Add a warning on Collimator to X-Ray Tube (XRT) alignment in
Section 6.0,Chapter 20
10 Jul.01,2015 1. Add Section 3.3 Wallstand Housing URP Detector Lock at
Chapter 9
2. Add Loctite and toque information to the OTS cover at Section
2.0 Chapter 16
3. Add paint mark information to Wallstand at page 188 and 203 in
Section 3.0 Chapter 9
11 Sep.01,2015 1. Add notice that ION Chamber cable connector should be
tightened enough to avoid RCN value larger at Section 4.3 Chapter
8 and Section 3.2 Chapter 9
2. Add WS-spring information at Section 4.0 Chapter 16
3. Add wait 60s before doing QAP information at Section 22
Chapter 20
4. Move Section 3.1.4 to 3.1.7 at Chapter 5 about Lateral and
Vertical Motor to Replacement Procedure manual
5. Update the authentication security information
12 OCT.28,2019 1. Chapter 9 Section 3.0 Aligning and Installing the Wall Stand
Add Warning for install Anchors
2. Updated: Chapter 22 Section 6.0 Collimator Tests
13 Dec, 26 2022 1. Updated step 7 content in chapter 4 section 2.5 Longitudinal
Anchor Rails.
2. Updated lifting tool info in chapter 3 Section 1.0 Checklist and
chapter 5 3.1.1 XT Lifting Fixture.
Page 14 List of Effected Pages

GE HEALTHCARE
List of Effected Pages
PAGES REVISION PAGES REVISION

1 through 530 12 1 through 548 13
Revision History Page 15

GE HEALTHCARE
Page 16 List of Effected Pages

GE HEALTHCARE
Preface Information
Section 1.0 Important Precautions

1.1 DAMAGE IN TRANSPORTATION
All packages should be closely examined at time of delivery. If damage is apparent, have notation“
damage in shipment” written on all copies of the freight or express bill before delivery is accepted
or “signed for” by a General Electric representative or a hospital receiving agent. Whether noted
or concealed, damage MUST be reported to the carrier immediately upon discovery, or in any
event, within 14 days after receipt, and the contents and containers held for inspection by the
carrier. A transportation company will not pay a claim for damage if an inspection is not requested
within this 14 day period.
To file a report:
• Call 1-800-548-3366 and use option 6.
• Fill out a report on http://egems.med.ge.com/edq/home.jsp
• Contact your local service coordinator for more information on this process.
Rev. JUL. 15, 2011
1.2 CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT

All electrical installations that are preliminary to positioning of the equipment at the site prepared
for the equipment shall be performed by licensed electrical contractors. In addition, electrical feeds
into the Power Distribution Unit shall be performed by licensed electrical contractors. Other
connections between pieces of electrical equipment, calibrations and testing shall be performed
by qualified GE Healthcare personnel. The products involved (and the accompanying electrical
installations) are highly sophisticated, and special engineering competence is required. In
performing all electrical work on these products, GE will use its own specially trained field
engineers. All of GE’s electrical work on these products will comply with the requirements of the
applicable electrical codes.
The purchaser of GE equipment shall only utilize qualified personnel (i.e., GE’s field engineers,
personnel of third-party service companies with equivalent training, or licensed electricians) to
perform electrical servicing on the equipment.
1.3 IMPORTANT...X-RAY PROTECTION

X-ray equipment if not properly used may cause injury. Accordingly, the instructions herein
contained should be thoroughly read and understood by everyone who will use the equipment
before you attempt to place this equipment in operation. The General Electric Company,
Healthcare Group, will be glad to assist and cooperate in placing this equipment in use.
Although this apparatus incorporates a high degree of protection against X-radiation other than
the useful beam, no practical design of equipment can provide complete protection. Nor can any
Preface Page 17
GE HEALTHCARE
practical design compel the operator to take adequate precautions to prevent the possibility of any
persons carelessly exposing themselves or others to radiation.
It is important that anyone having anything to do with X-radiation be properly trained and fully
acquainted with the recommendations of the National Council on Radiation Protection and
Measurements as published in NCRP Reports available from NCRP Publications, 7910 Woodmont
Avenue, Room 1016, Bethesda, Maryland 20814, and of the International Commission on
Radiation Protection, and take adequate steps to protect against injury.
The equipment is sold with the understanding that the General Electric Company, Healthcare
Group, its agents, and representatives have no responsibility for injury or damage which may result
from improper use of the equipment.
Various protective materials and devices are available. It is urged that such materials or devices
be used.
1.4 LITHIUM BATTERY CAUTIONARY STATEMENTS
Risk of Explosion.
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
Discard used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du même type ou d’un type recommandé
par le constructeur. Mettre au rébut les batteries usagées conformément aux
instructions du fabricant.
1.5 OMISSIONS & ERRORS

Customers, please contact your GE Sales or Service representatives.
GE personnel, please use the Healthcare i-Trak Process to report all omissions, errors, and defects
in this publication.
1.6 WARNING
Do not modify this equipment without authorization of the manufacturer.
Page 18 Preface
GE HEALTHCARE
Section 2.0 Preface Publication Conventions

Standardized conventions for representing information is a uniform way of communicating
information to a reader in a consistent manner. Conventions are used so that the reader can easily
recognize the actions or decisions that must be made. There are a number of character and
paragraph styles used in this publication to accomplish this task. Please become familiar with them
before proceeding forward.
It’s important that you read and understand hazard statements, and not just ignore them.
2.1 Safety & Hazard Information

Proper product safety labeling allows a person to safely use or service a product. The format and
style for safety communications reflected in this publication represents the harmonization of IEC/
ISO 3864 and ANSI Z535 standards.
Within this publication, different paragraph and character styles are used to indicated potential
hazards. Paragraph prefixes, such as hazard, caution, danger and warning, are used to identify
important safety information. Text (Hazard) styles are applied to the paragraph contents that are
applicable to each specific safety statement.
2.1.1 Hazard Messages

Any action that will, could or potentially cause personal injury will be preceded by the safety alert
symbol and an appropriate signal word. The safety alert symbol is the triangle with an exclamation
mark within it. It’s always used next to the signal word to indicate the severity of the hazard.
Together, they are used to indicate a hazard exists.
Signal words describe the severity of possible human injures that may be encountered. The alert
symbol and signal word are placed immediately before any paragraph they affect. Safety
information includes:
1.) Signal Word - The seriousness level of the hazard.
2.) Symbol or Pictorial - The consequence of interaction with the hazard.
3.) Word Message:
a.) The nature of the hazard (i.e. the type of hazard)
b.) How to avoid the hazard.
The safety alert symbol is not used when an action can only cause equipment damage.
2.1.2 Text Format of Signal Words

DANGER - INDICATES AN IMMINENTLY HAZARDOUS SITUATION WHICH, IF
NOT AVOIDED, WILL RESULT IN DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY. THIS SIGNAL
WORD IS LIMITED TO THE MOST EXTREME SITUATIONS.
WARNING - INDICATES A POTENTIALLY HAZARDOUS SITUATION WHICH, IF NOT
AVOIDED, COULD RESULT IN DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY.
Caution - Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in
minor or moderate injury. It may also be used to alert against unsafe practices.
NOTICE - Indicates information or a company policy that relates directly or indirectly to the
safety of personnel or protection of property. This signal word is associated directly with a
hazard or hazardous situation and is used in place of 'DANGER,' 'WARNING,' or 'CAUTION.'
It can include:
• Destruction of a disk drive
• Potential for internal mechanical damage, such as to a X-ray tube
Preface Page 19
GE HEALTHCARE
2.1.3 Symbols and Pictorials Used
The following Symbols and Pictorials are be used in this publication. These graphical icons
(symbols) may be used to make you aware of specific types of hazards that could possibly cause
harm.
Illustration 1-1: Hazard Symbols
Page 20 Preface
GE HEALTHCARE
Section 3.0
Publication Conventions
3.1 General Paragraph and Character Styles
Prefixes are used to highlight important non-safety related information. Paragraph prefixes (such
as Purpose, Example, Comment or Note) are used to identify important but non-safety related
information. Text styles are also applied to text within each paragraph modified by the specific
prefix.
EXAMPLES OF PREFIXES USED FOR GENERAL INFORMATION:

Purpose: Introduces and provides meaning as to the information contained within the chapter,
section or subsection (such as used at the beginning this chapter, for example).
Note: Conveys information that should be considered important to the reader.

Example: Used to make the reader aware that the paragraph(s) that follow are examples of information
possibly stated previously.
Comment: Represents “additional” information that may or may not be relevant to your situation.
3.2 Page Layout

Illustration 1-2: Page Layout
Headers and footers in this publication are designed to allow you to quickly identify your location.
The document part number and revision number appears in every header on every page. Odd
Preface Page 21
GE HEALTHCARE
numbered page footers indicate the current chapter, its title and current page number. Even page
footers show the current section and its title, as well as the current page number.
3.3 Computer Screen Output/Input Text Character Styles

Within this publication, mono-spaced character styles (fonts) are used to indicate computer text
that’s either screen input and output. Mono-spaced fonts, such courier, are used to indicated text
direction. When you type at your keyboard, you are generating computer input. Occasionally you
will see the math operator “greater-than” and “less-than” symbols used to indicate the start and
finish of variable output. When reading text generated by the computer, you are reading it as
computer generated output. In addition to direction, characters are italicized (e.g. italics) to indicate
information specific to your system or site.
Page 22 Preface
GE HEALTHCARE
3.4 Buttons, Switches and Keyboard Inputs (Hard & Soft Keys)
Different character styles are used to indicate actions requiring the reader to press either a hard or
soft button, switch or key. Physical hardware, such as buttons and switches, are called hard keys
because they are hard wired or mechanical in nature. A keyboard or on/off switch would be a hard
key. Software or computer generated buttons are called soft keys because they are software
generated. Software driven menu buttons are an example of such keys. Soft and hard keys are
represented differently in this publication.
Example: Hard A power switch ON/OFF or a keyboard key like ENTER is indicated by applying a character style
Keys that uses both over and under-lined bold text that is bold. This is a hard key.
Example: Soft Whereas the computer MENU button that you would click with your mouse or touch with your hand
Keys uses over and under-lined regular text. This is a soft key.
Preface Page 23
GE HEALTHCARE
Page 24 Preface
GE HEALTHCARE
Table of Contents
Preface Information............................................................................................... 17
Section 1.0 Important Precautions ................................................................. 17
1.1 DAMAGE IN TRANSPORTATION .................................................................................. 17
1.2 CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT ............................................. 17
1.3 IMPORTANT...X-RAY PROTECTION ............................................................................. 17
1.4 LITHIUM BATTERY CAUTIONARY STATEMENTS ....................................................... 18
1.5 OMISSIONS & ERRORS................................................................................................. 18
1.6 WARNING ....................................................................................................................... 18
Section 2.0 Preface Publication Conventions ............................................... 19
2.1 Safety & Hazard Information............................................................................................ 19
2.1.1 Hazard Messages............................................................................................... 19
2.1.2 Text Format of Signal Words .............................................................................. 19
2.1.3 Symbols and Pictorials Used .............................................................................. 20
Section 3.0
Publication Conventions ................................................................................. 21
3.1 General Paragraph and Character Styles........................................................................ 21
3.2 Page Layout..................................................................................................................... 21
3.3 Computer Screen Output/Input Text Character Styles .................................................... 22
3.4 Buttons, Switches and Keyboard Inputs (Hard & Soft Keys) ........................................... 23
Chapter 1 Safety and Service ............................................................................... 39

Section 1.0
Lock-Out & Tag-Out (LOTO)............................................................................ 39
1.1 System Power.................................................................................................................. 39
1.2 LOTO Procedure for System Power ................................................................................ 40
1.3 System Software Shutdown............................................................................................. 40
1.4 LOTO Procedure for OTS Counterpoise ......................................................................... 41
1.5 Applying System Power................................................................................................... 42
1.5.1 System Preparation for Energizing Power.......................................................... 42
1.5.2 Energizing System.............................................................................................. 45
Section 2.0
Equipment Safety - Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) ....................................... 46
2.1 Generating Static ............................................................................................................. 46
2.2 Personal Grounding Methods and Equipment................................................................. 46
2.3 Grounding the Work Area ................................................................................................ 47
2.4 Recommended Materials and Equipment........................................................................ 47
2.5 Audio and visual .............................................................................................................. 48
Section 3.0 Avoid cabinet tipping................................................................... 48
Section 4.0 Symbols ........................................................................................ 49
4.1 Special Notices ................................................................................................................ 49
4.2 X-ray Tube Operational Symbols..................................................................................... 50
4.3 System Power On and Reset .......................................................................................... 51
4.4 Electrical Type ................................................................................................................. 51
4.5 Electrical Current ............................................................................................................. 51
Table of Contents Page 25

GE HEALTHCARE
DIRECTION 5343950-1EN, REVISION 13 DISCOVERY XR656 INSTALLATION
4.6 Ground ............................................................................................................................ 52
4.7 Collimator ........................................................................................................................ 53
Chapter 2 System Installation Guide................................................................... 55

Section 1.0 Mechanical Installation Guide ..................................................... 55
Section 2.0
Electrical (Config., Calibration... Finalization) ............................................... 57
Section 3.0 FE to Applications Specialist Handoff Guide............................. 61
Chapter 3 Tools and Materials Checklist ............................................................ 63

Section 1.0 Checklist........................................................................................ 63
Chapter 4 Overhead Stationary Rails .................................................................. 65

Section 1.0 Introduction................................................................................... 65
1.1 Summary Checklist ......................................................................................................... 65
1.2 Before You Begin ............................................................................................................ 65
1.3 Special Tools and Materials ............................................................................................ 66
1.4 Parts Shortages and Transportation Damage................................................................. 67
Section 2.0 Inboard Stationary Rails .............................................................. 68
2.1 Room Orientation ............................................................................................................ 68
2.2 Inboard Stationary Rail Length Modifications.................................................................. 68
2.3 Rail Leveling Procedures (using LASER alignment tool) ................................................ 68
2.4 Rail and Shim Installation................................................................................................ 70
2.5 Longitudinal Anchor Rails ............................................................................................... 73
Section 3.0 Auxiliary Support Rails ................................................................ 78
Chapter 5 - Overhead Tube Support (OTS)......................................................... 79

Section 1.0
Summary Checklist .......................................................................................... 79
Section 2.0 Modifying
the Bridge Length ............................................................................................. 80
Section 3.0 Bridge and Carriage - 2, 3, or 4 Meter Bridge............................. 81
3.1 Bridge Mounting Procedure ........................................................................................... 81
3.1.1 XT Lifting Fixture ................................................................................................ 81
3.1.1.1 Tools Required ............................................................................... 85
3.1.1.2 Set Up............................................................................................. 85
3.1.2 Bridge-to-Lifting Fixture Placement .................................................................... 87
3.1.3 2 m, 3 m, 4 m Bridge-to-Carriage Placement..................................................... 90
3.2 Lateral Drive Belt Hardware Installation.......................................................................... 91
3.3 Bridge Stiffener Plate Installation .................................................................................... 95
3.4 Longitudinal Drive Installation ......................................................................................... 96
3.5 Remove Front Bridge Cross-tie....................................................................................... 98
3.5.1 2 m, 3 m and 4 m Bridge-to-Stationary Rails ..................................................... 99
3.5.2 Remove Shipping Hardware From OTS .......................................................... 100
Page 26 Table of Contents
GE HEALTHCARE
3.6 Install the Lateral Cable Drape Hardware...................................................................... 101
3.7 Install OTS Cable Drape................................................................................................ 102
3.8 OTS Carriage Cable Connections ................................................................................. 105
3.9 Bridge Anti-Backlash Assemblies .................................................................................. 109
Section 4.0 Longitudinal Drive Belt Assembly ............................................ 111
4.1 Longitudinal Belt Installation .......................................................................................... 111
4.2 Longitudinal Belt Tensioning......................................................................................... 115
4.3 Longitudinal Belt Tracking ............................................................................................ 117
4.4 Longitudinal Drive Assembly Wiring .............................................................................. 118
Section 5.0 Lateral Drive Belt Tensioning and Alignment.......................... 119
Section 6.0 X-Ray Tube Covers .................................................................... 120
Section 7.0 Collimator.................................................................................... 124
7.1 Unpacking...................................................................................................................... 124
7.2 Installation...................................................................................................................... 124
7.2.1 Installing the Collimator .................................................................................... 125
7.2.2 Setting Up the Collimator.................................................................................. 126
7.2.3 Fastening instructions for collimator with rotating flange .................................. 126
7.3 Cable Connections & Routing....................................................................................... 127
Section 8.0
User Interface (UIF) ........................................................................................ 130
Section 9.0 OTS Counterpoise Adjustment ................................................. 132
9.1 Final Counterpoise Adjustment..................................................................................... 132
Chapter 6 Cables ................................................................................................. 133

Section 1.0 Summary Checklist .................................................................... 133
Section 2.0 Routing........................................................................................ 133
Section 3.0 System Cables............................................................................ 133
Section 4.0 EMC Compliance ........................................................................ 135
4.1 Grounding P-Clamps .................................................................................................... 135
Chapter 7 System Cabinet .................................................................................. 137

Section 2.0 Unpack Cabinet .......................................................................... 138
Section 3.0 System Cabinet Installation ...................................................... 140
3.1 Tools and Parts.............................................................................................................. 140
3.2 Procedure ...................................................................................................................... 140
3.3 Finalization..................................................................................................................... 147
3.3.1 Check all of the cables...................................................................................... 147
Chapter 8 Table.................................................................................................... 149

Section 2.0 Unpack Table .............................................................................. 150
GE HEALTHCARE
Section 3.0 Initial Table and Bridge Alignment............................................ 153
Section 4.0 Install Table ................................................................................. 156
4.1 Final Table-to-Bridge Alignment.................................................................................... 156
4.2 Adjust Front and Rear Pedal Stablizing Screws ........................................................... 158
4.3 Table ION Chamber/Detector Installation ..................................................................... 158
4.4 Tube and Collimator Rotation Reference Marks ........................................................... 164
Section 5.0 Table Cables................................................................................ 165
Section 6.0 Table Top..................................................................................... 166
Chapter 9 Wall Stand and Extended Wall Stand .............................................. 169

1.1 Prerequisites ................................................................................................................. 169
Section 2.0 Unpack Wall Stand ..................................................................... 170
2.1 Personnel Requirements............................................................................................... 170
2.2 Procedure...................................................................................................................... 170
2.3 Finalization .................................................................................................................... 176
Section 3.0 Aligning and Installing the Wall Stand ..................................... 177
3.2 Procedure...................................................................................................................... 177
3.3 Wallstand Housing URP Detector Lock (Options)......................................................... 191
3.4 Wallstand Insertion left or right rework.......................................................................... 193
3.5 Finalization .................................................................................................................... 202
Section 4.0 Install Wallstand Cables............................................................. 203
4.2 Preliminary Requirements............................................................................................. 203
4.2.1 Tools and Test Equipment ............................................................................... 203
4.2.2 Safety ............................................................................................................... 203
4.3 Procedure...................................................................................................................... 203
4.4 Finalization .................................................................................................................... 206
Section 5.0 Connect Display......................................................................... 207
Chapter 10 Tether Interface Box Installation .................................................... 209

Section 1.0 Summary Checklist.................................................................... 209
Section 2.0 Installation Procedure ................................................................ 209
2.1 Unpacking ..................................................................................................................... 209
2.2 Disassembly.................................................................................................................. 209
Chapter 11 Dongle Assembly Installation ........................................................ 213

Section 2.0 Installation Procedure ................................................................ 214
2.1 Unpacking and cable connection: ................................................................................. 214
2.1.1 Dongle Cable ................................................................................................... 214
2.2 Temporarily fix the dongle assembly in the default position.......................................... 215

GE HEALTHCARE
2.2.1 Step1 ................................................................................................................ 215
2.2.2 Step2 ................................................................................................................ 216
2.3 Wireless Signal Check................................................................................................... 216
2.3.1 Installation Quality Test tools and standards .................................................... 218
2.4 Final fixed dongle assembly .......................................................................................... 219
2.4.1 Install the cover and antenna............................................................................ 220
Chapter 12 Detector BIN and Grid Holder Installation (Wall mount) .............. 221
Section 1.0 Detector BIN Installation (Wall mount)..................................... 221
1.1 Unpacking...................................................................................................................... 221
1.2 Disassembly .................................................................................................................. 221
Section 2.0 Grid Holder installation (Wall mount)....................................... 224
2.1 Summary Checklist........................................................................................................ 224
2.2 Installation Procedure .................................................................................................... 224
Chapter 13 Workstation and Wall box ............................................................... 227

Section 2.0 HP z400 Workstation.................................................................. 228
2.1 z400 Workstation ........................................................................................................... 228
Section 3.0 Mouse and Keyboard ................................................................. 229
Section 4.0 RCIM2 and Handswitch.............................................................. 230
Section 5.0 LCD Monitors.............................................................................. 231
Section 6.0 Bar Code Reader (Purchased Option)...................................... 233
Section 7.0 Wall box....................................................................................... 234
Chapter 14 Jumpers, Switches, Terminations and Power............................... 235

Section 2.0 Sub-Systems............................................................................... 236
2.1 OTS Jumpers and Switches .......................................................................................... 236
2.2 Wall Stand Jumpers and Switches ................................................................................ 237
2.3 Table Jumpers and Switches......................................................................................... 238
2.4 System Cabinet ............................................................................................................. 239
2.5 CAN Bus Terminations .................................................................................................. 239
2.6 RT Bus Terminations ..................................................................................................... 239
2.7 PDU Tap Settings and 3-Phase Power Connection ...................................................... 240
Chapter 15 Grounding Resistance Test ............................................................ 241

Section 1.0 Fluke ESA612.............................................................................. 241
1.1 Personnel Requirements ............................................................................................... 241
1.2 Preliminary Requirements ............................................................................................. 241
1.2.1 Tools and Test Equipment................................................................................ 241
1.2.2 Safety................................................................................................................ 241
1.2.3 Required Conditions ......................................................................................... 242

GE HEALTHCARE
1.2.4 Setup the Tool.................................................................................................. 242
1.3 Protective Earth Resistance Test Procedure ................................................................ 244
Section 2.0 Hioki 3157 .................................................................................... 248
2.2 Overview ....................................................................................................................... 248
2.3 Preliminary Requirements............................................................................................. 248
2.3.2 Safety ............................................................................................................... 248
2.3.3 Required Conditions......................................................................................... 248
2.4 Procedure...................................................................................................................... 249
2.4.1 How to Use the Hioki 3157 for Grounding Checks........................................... 249
2.4.1.1 Needed Cables According to Site Layout ..................................... 249
2.4.1.2 Connecting Measurement Cables to the Tester ........................... 250
2.4.1.3 Setting Test Parameters ............................................................... 252
2.4.1.4 Setting Offset of the Test Measurement Cables........................... 253
2.4.1.5 Measurements .............................................................................. 254
2.4.2 Grounding resistance measurement ................................................................ 255
2.4.2.1 Measurement method................................................................... 255
2.4.2.2 Acceptance limits.......................................................................... 255
2.4.2.3 Ground measurements ................................................................. 255
2.4.3 Test Point ......................................................................................................... 256
2.5 Finalization .................................................................................................................... 257
Chapter 16 Trim Cover Installation.................................................................... 259

Section 2.0 Install OTS Trim Covers ............................................................. 260
2.1 Preparation.................................................................................................................... 260
2.2 OTS Cover Installation Procedure: ............................................................................... 263
Section 3.0 Table Covers ............................................................................... 266
3.1 Table Top Insert Removal............................................................................................. 266
3.2 Lower Front and Rear Cover Installation ...................................................................... 267
3.3 Lower End Cover Installation ........................................................................................ 268
3.4 Upper Front and Rear Cover Installation ...................................................................... 270
3.5 Front and Rear Mid Cover Installation .......................................................................... 271
3.6 Upper End Cover Installation ........................................................................................ 272
Section 4.0 Wall Stand Covers ...................................................................... 274
Chapter 17 Leakage Current Measurements .................................................... 281

Section 1.0 Personnel Requirements ........................................................... 281
Section 2.0 Prerequisites ............................................................................... 281
2.1 Procedure using Fluke ESA612 .................................................................................... 283
2.1.1 Test Equipment Setup – Fluke ESA612........................................................... 283
2.1.2 Test Procedure................................................................................................. 285
2.2 Procedure using Dale 601/601E ................................................................................... 290

GE HEALTHCARE
Chapter 18 Software............................................................................................ 293
Section 1.0 Before You Begin ....................................................................... 293
Section 2.0 Summary Checklist ................................................................. 294
Section 3.0 System Data Backup and Restore ............................................ 295
3.1 System Backup’s Coverage........................................................................................... 295
3.2 Backup........................................................................................................................... 296
3.2.1 Before You Begin.............................................................................................. 296
3.2.2 Procedure ......................................................................................................... 296
3.3 Restore .......................................................................................................................... 298
3.3.1 Before You Begin.............................................................................................. 298
3.3.2 Procedure ......................................................................................................... 298
3.4 System Protocol Backup and Retrieve .......................................................................... 300
Section 4.0 System Software Reload and/or Upgrade................................ 301
4.1 Personnel Requirements ............................................................................................... 301
4.2 Overview........................................................................................................................ 301
4.3 Preliminary Requirements ............................................................................................. 302
4.3.2 Consumables.................................................................................................... 302
4.3.3 Safety................................................................................................................ 302
4.3.4 Required Conditions ......................................................................................... 303
4.4 Procedure ...................................................................................................................... 303
4.4.1 Are you performing a new system installation? ................................................ 303
4.4.2 Backup System Files. ....................................................................................... 303
4.4.3 Backup Protocol Data Base and System Images. ............................................ 304
4.4.3.1 Save Protocol Data Base. ............................................................. 304
4.4.3.2 Save Images ................................................................................. 305
4.4.4 Perform the “Load from Cold”. .......................................................................... 306
4.4.4.1 Load Linux Operating System (OS) software................................ 306
4.4.4.2 Load Application Software............................................................. 307
4.4.5 Log into System ................................................................................................ 309
4.4.6 User Login Management .................................................................................. 309
4.4.7 Are you performing a new system installation? ................................................ 309
4.4.8 Selectively (except Generator dB) Restore System Calibration and Configuration
Files. 309
4.4.9 Load Generator Software ................................................................................. 313
4.4.10 Restore the “Generator Full dB Calibration” Files............................................. 314
4.4.11 Restore Protocol Data Base ............................................................................. 315
4.4.12 Restore System Images ................................................................................... 315
4.5 Finalization..................................................................................................................... 316
Section 5.0 Detector Registration................................................................. 317
5.1 Detector Bumping .......................................................................................................... 319
Section 6.0 Sub-System Firmware/Software Download ............................. 320
6.1 Detector Firmware/Detector MicroController Download ................................................ 320
6.2 Generator (Jedi) Application Software........................................................................... 321
6.3 Positioner Components ................................................................................................. 321

GE HEALTHCARE
Chapter 19 Configuration ................................................................................... 323
Section 1.0 When to Perform System Configuration .................................. 323
1.1 During System Installation ............................................................................................ 323
1.2 Missing or Lost System Backups .................................................................................. 323
1.3 Addition of Purchased Options...................................................................................... 324
1.3.1 Option License Simple Introduction ................................................................. 324
1.3.1.1 Option license list.......................................................................... 324
1.3.1.2 Option License Installation Process.............................................. 325
1.3.2 Option License Installation Summary............................................................... 326
1.3.3 Flex-trial Option Workflow -1 ............................................................................ 326
1.3.6 E-license Generation Process.......................................................................... 328
Section 2.0 Starting the System Configuration Tool................................... 332
Section 3.0 System Configuration Tool Parameters ................................... 333
3.1 Home Page Summary Tab............................................................................................ 333
3.2 Site Parameters ............................................................................................................ 333
3.3 General Parameters...................................................................................................... 334
3.3.1 UWB Regulatory Code..................................................................................... 335
3.3.2 UWB Regulatory code list ................................................................................ 335
3.3.3 Non Wireless Configuration ............................................................................. 337
3.3.4 Some different wireless with Non Wireless Configuration................................ 338
3.3.5 Update UWB configuration............................................................................... 339
3.3.6 Date, Time and NTP Settings .......................................................................... 341
3.4 Positioner Parameters................................................................................................... 342
3.5 Generator Parameters .................................................................................................. 344
Section 4.0 DICOM Configuration ................................................................. 345
4.1 Network Hosts............................................................................................................... 345
4.1.1 Host Tab........................................................................................................... 345
4.1.2 Preference Tab ................................................................................................ 345
4.2 Printers.......................................................................................................................... 347
4.2.1 Agfa Drystar 3000 Printer................................................................................. 347
4.2.2 Agfa Drystar 5500 ............................................................................................ 349
4.2.3 Fuji FM DPL Printer Parameters ...................................................................... 351
4.2.4 Fuji DryPix 1000 Printer Parameters................................................................ 352
4.2.7 Kodak 8200 Printer Parameters ....................................................................... 355
4.2.11 Codonics Horizon Printer Parameters.............................................................. 359
4.2.12 CARESTREAM DryView 5850 ......................................................................... 360
4.2.13 KONICA 793 .................................................................................................... 361
4.2.14 KONICA 873 .................................................................................................... 362
4.2.15 SONY UP-DF750 ............................................................................................. 363
4.3 Query Modality .............................................................................................................. 364
4.3.1 Setting the Query Modality value to “CR”......................................................... 364

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 5.0 Installing Demo Images ............................................................. 365
Section 6.0 Operator Manual (OM) Installation............................................ 366
Section 7.0 Adding a Bar Code Reader (HHP IMAGE TEAM 3800/3900)... 368
7.1 Configuration ................................................................................................................ 368
7.2 Adding a Tab to Each Scanned Line ............................................................................. 368
7.3 Setting Factory Defaults ................................................................................................ 369
7.4 Character Stripping (Optional) ....................................................................................... 369
Section 8.0 System Login (HIPPA) ............................................................... 370
8.1 User Accounts ............................................................................................................... 370
8.1.1 System Log-in................................................................................................... 370
8.1.2 About User Accounts ........................................................................................ 370
8.2 Login Feature................................................................................................................. 370
8.2.1 Logging In and Out ........................................................................................... 370
8.2.2 Understanding users and groups...................................................................... 372
8.2.3 Understanding groups and privileges ............................................................... 372
8.3 Local User Management Tab ........................................................................................ 372
8.3.1 Change Password ............................................................................................ 377
8.3.1.1 System logon in............................................................................. 377
8.3.1.2 Local users .................................................................................... 377
Chapter 20 Calibration and Alignment .............................................................. 379

Section 1.0 Before You Begin ....................................................................... 379
1.1 Service User Interface (SUIF)........................................................................................ 379
1.2 Calibration Sequence .................................................................................................... 379
1.3 Returning the System to the User.................................................................................. 380
Section 2.0 System Installation Calibration Sequence............................... 381
Section 3.0 How to Start Calibration Tools.................................................. 384
Section 4.0 Invoking New Calibrations ........................................................ 385
Section 5.0 Saving Changes ......................................................................... 386
Section 6.0 Positioner Calibration ................................................................ 387
6.1 Before You Begin........................................................................................................... 387
6.2 Collimator to X-ray Tube (XRT) Alignment .................................................................... 387
Section 7.0 Initial Positioner Calibrations.................................................... 392
7.1 OTS Longitudinal Travel Range .................................................................................... 393
7.2 OTS Lateral Travel Range............................................................................................. 393
7.3 OTS Vertical Travel Range............................................................................................ 393
7.4 OTS Tube Angulation .................................................................................................... 394
7.5 OTS Column Rotation.................................................................................................... 396
Section 8.0 X-ray Beam to SID Travel Alignment ........................................ 403
Section 9.0 Detector Perpendicular to X-ray Beam Adjustment................ 405
Section 10.0 Vertical Tracking ...................................................................... 407
Section 11.0 Final Wall Stand Anchoring..................................................... 408
Section 12.0 Final Wallstand Balance .......................................................... 409
GE HEALTHCARE
Section 13.0 Options Installation .................................................................. 412
Section 14.0 Complete the Positioner Calibrations..................................... 413
14.1 OTS Table SID.............................................................................................................. 413
14.2 OTS Table Long./Lat..................................................................................................... 414
14.3 Wall Stand Travel/Tilt Cal.............................................................................................. 414
14.4 Wall Stand 0 Degrees ................................................................................................... 415
14.5 Wall Stand 90 Degrees ................................................................................................. 416
14.6 Table Encoder Checkout and Adjustment Procedure ................................................... 418
14.6.1 Table Encoder Checkout.................................................................................. 418
14.6.2 Table Encoder Adjustment Procedure ............................................................. 418
14.7 OTS UIF Touch Screen Calibration .............................................................................. 419
14.8 “AutoPos” Park Position ................................................................................................ 419
14.9 Auto Position ................................................................................................................. 419
14.10 Wallstand 120cm Grid Auto Position (option) ............................................................... 420
14.10.1 Procedure......................................................................................................... 420
14.11 Remote Conrol .............................................................................................................. 424
Section 15.0 Generator (Jedi) Calibration .................................................... 425
15.1 Before You Begin .......................................................................................................... 425
15.2 Filament Drive ............................................................................................................... 425
15.3 Tube Warranty .............................................................................................................. 425
15.4 Tube Run-in and Stability.............................................................................................. 425
Section 16.0 Automatic Exposure Control (AEC) Calibration .................... 427
16.1 Before You Begin .......................................................................................................... 427
16.2 Table Ion Chamber ....................................................................................................... 427
16.3 Wall Stand Ion Chamber ............................................................................................... 428
Section 17.0 Detector Calibrations ............................................................... 430
17.1 Glossary of Terms......................................................................................................... 430
17.2 Before You Begin .......................................................................................................... 430
17.3 Calibration Overview ..................................................................................................... 431
17.4 When should it be performed ........................................................................................ 431
17.5 Procedure...................................................................................................................... 432
17.6 Results - Bad Pixels ...................................................................................................... 435
Section 18.0 Digital Cassette Calibrations ................................................... 436
18.1 Before You Begin .......................................................................................................... 436
18.2 Calibration Overview ..................................................................................................... 437
18.3 When should it be performed ........................................................................................ 438
18.4 Procedure...................................................................................................................... 438
18.5 Results - Bad Pixels ...................................................................................................... 441
Section 19.0 Dose Predication - mR/mAs..................................................... 442
19.1 Dose indication.............................................................................................................. 442
19.1.1 Dosimetric calibration ....................................................................................... 442
19.1.1.1 Dose and DAP accuracy check procedure ................................... 442
19.1.1.2 Dose and DAP accuracy maintenance ......................................... 443
Section 20.0 Image Quality ............................................................................ 444
20.1 Image Monitor Setup with Flat Panel Monitor ............................................................... 444
20.1.1 Before You Begin ............................................................................................. 444
20.1.2 When should it be performed ........................................................................... 444
20.1.3 Procedure......................................................................................................... 444

GE HEALTHCARE
20.1.3.1 NEC Monitor Setup ....................................................................... 444
20.1.3.2 EIZO Monitor setup ....................................................................... 446
> Display the SMPTE Test Pattern on the Viewer Monitor............... 446
> EIZO Monitor Setup....................................................................... 447
20.2 Printer calibration........................................................................................................... 448
20.2.1 Before You Begin.............................................................................................. 448
20.2.2 Procedure ......................................................................................................... 449
Section 21.0 PACS / Image Display Test Image .......................................... 451
21.1 Objectives ...................................................................................................................... 451
21.2 Simplified Procedure...................................................................................................... 451
21.3 Results........................................................................................................................... 454
21.4 Background Material...................................................................................................... 454
21.5 Additional Tests ............................................................................................................. 458
Section 22.0 Quality Assurance Procedure (QAP)...................................... 464
22.1 Before You Begin........................................................................................................... 464
22.2 When to Perform QAP ................................................................................................... 464
Chapter 21 Trouble Shooting ............................................................................. 465

Section 1.0 Diagnostics ................................................................................. 465
Section 2.0 Schematics ................................................................................. 465
Section 3.0 Replacement Procedures &Illustrated Parts List (IPL) ........... 465
Chapter 22 Regulatory Tests (HHS)................................................................... 467

Section 2.0 HHS Compliance Compatibility List ......................................... 468
Section 3.0 Customer Information................................................................ 468
Section 4.0 Test Equipment .......................................................................... 469
Section 5.0 X-ray Generator Tests................................................................ 470
5.1 General .......................................................................................................................... 470
5.1.1 Preliminary Requirements ................................................................................ 470
5.2 Generator Operator Indicators....................................................................................... 470
5.3 Beam Quality ................................................................................................................. 472
5.4 Technique Accuracy and Linearity................................................................................. 474
5.5 Reproducibility Of Exposure .......................................................................................... 475
5.6 Automatic Exposure Control (AEC) Tests ..................................................................... 477
5.6.1 AEC Minimum Exposure Time.......................................................................... 477
5.6.2 AEC Maximum mAs.......................................................................................... 479
5.6.2.1 Procedure (50kVp) ........................................................................ 479
5.6.2.2 Procedure (40kVp) ........................................................................ 480
Section 6.0 Collimator Tests ......................................................................... 481
6.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................... 481
6.2 General Tests ................................................................................................................ 481
6.3 SID Accuracy ................................................................................................................. 481
6.3.1 Procedure for Digital Table ............................................................................... 482

GE HEALTHCARE
6.3.2 Procedure (Digital Wall Stand)......................................................................... 482
6.4 Collimator Field Light Intensity ...................................................................................... 483
6.5 Collimator Light Field to X-ray Field Alignment ............................................................. 484
6.6 Collimator Field Size Indicator Accuracy....................................................................... 486
6.6.1 How to Measure ............................................................................................... 486
6.6.2 Procedure for Digital Table Mode .................................................................... 486
6.6.3 Procedure for Digital WS Mode........................................................................ 487
6.7 Digital Table Mode - Center to Center Alignment Error ................................................ 487
6.7.1 How to Measure ............................................................................................... 488
6.7.2 Procedure......................................................................................................... 488
6.8 Digital Table Mode - Size to Size Error (PBL check) .................................................... 488
6.8.1 How to Measure ............................................................................................... 489
6.8.2 Procedure......................................................................................................... 489
6.9 Digital Wall Stand Mode - Center to Center Alignment Error ........................................ 490
6.10 Digital Wall Stand Mode - Size to Size Error (PBL check) ............................................ 491
6.10.1 How to Measure ............................................................................................... 491
6.10.2 Procedure......................................................................................................... 492
6.11 Data Sheets .................................................................................................................. 493
6.11.1 SID Accuracy ................................................................................................... 493
6.11.2 Collimator Field Light Intensity ......................................................................... 493
6.11.3 Collimator Light Field to X-ray Field Accuracy Check ...................................... 493
6.11.4 Collimator Field Size Indicator Accuracy.......................................................... 494
6.11.5 Table - Center to Center Error ......................................................................... 494
6.11.6 Table - Size to Size Error ................................................................................. 494
6.11.7 Wall Stand - Center to Center Error ................................................................. 494
6.11.8 Wall Stand - Size to Size Error......................................................................... 495
Chapter 23 Networking and PACS Configuration ........................................... 497

Section 1.0 Networking and PACs Configuration....................................... 497
Chapter 24 Demo Images and Operator Manual ............................................. 499

Section 1.0 Install Demo Images and Operator Manual ............................. 499
Chapter 25 Operational Checks ........................................................................ 501

Section 1.0 Operational Checks ................................................................... 501
1.1 General ......................................................................................................................... 501
1.1.1 Preliminary Requirements ................................................................................ 501
1.2 Positioning and Manual Controls .................................................................................. 501
1.2.1 OTS.................................................................................................................. 501
1.2.2 Wallstand ......................................................................................................... 502
1.2.3 Table ................................................................................................................ 502
1.3 Safety Device ................................................................................................................ 502
1.3.1 Table ................................................................................................................ 502
1.3.2 Wallstand ......................................................................................................... 503
1.3.3 RCIM2 .............................................................................................................. 504
1.4 Lights and LEDs............................................................................................................ 504
1.4.1 RCIM2 Tube Over-Heat Indicator .................................................................... 507

GE HEALTHCARE
1.5 Purchased Advanced Applications ................................................................................ 507
1.6 Ion Chambers ................................................................................................................ 508
Chapter 26 Apply International Labels ............................................................. 511

Section 1.0 Apply International Labels........................................................ 511
1.1 Apply Safety Labels ....................................................................................................... 511
1.2 Apply Korean Rating Plate............................................................................................. 515
1.3 Apply Turkey Rating/Name Plate................................................................................... 516
Chapter 27 Final Tasks....................................................................................... 517

Section 1.0 Final Tasks ................................................................................. 517
1.1 Summary Checklist........................................................................................................ 517
1.2 Database Backup .......................................................................................................... 517
1.3 Program Remote Control............................................................................................... 517
1.4 Install Remote Control Holder........................................................................................ 518
1.5 Install URP Detector battery charger ............................................................................. 518
1.6 Final Administrative Tasks............................................................................................. 518
1.7 System Rating Plates .................................................................................................... 519
Chapter 28 Appendix A Alternative Methods................................................... 523

Section 1.0 Alternative Methods .................................................................. 523
1.1 Inboard Rail Length Modifications ................................................................................. 523
1.2 Rail Leveling Procedures (Water-Level or Transit)........................................................ 525
1.2.1 Using a Water-Level Kit .................................................................................... 525
1.2.2 Using a Transit (Alternate Method)................................................................... 528
1.3 Modifying the Bridge Length .......................................................................................... 529
1.4 Table Top Installation (Alternate Method)...................................................................... 530
Chapter 29 Appendix B Options Installation .................................................... 533

Section 1.0 Installation of Options............................................................... 533
1.1 Image Pasting Barrier 5134183-40................................................................................ 533
1.1.1 Summary Checklist........................................................................................... 533
1.1.2 Required Tools ................................................................................................. 533
1.1.3 Procedure ......................................................................................................... 533
1.2 Image Pasting Barrier 5134183-10................................................................................ 540
1.2.1 Summary Checklist........................................................................................... 540
1.2.2 Required Tools ................................................................................................. 540
1.2.3 Procedure ......................................................................................................... 540

GE HEALTHCARE

GE HEALTHCARE
Chapter 1 Safety and Service
Section 1.0
Lock-Out & Tag-Out (LOTO)
1.1 System Power
Name Of Equipment: Everest System (Workstation, System Cabinet, Table, Wall Stand and
Overhead Tube Support)
Number Of Locks: One per person, working on the system
Title(s) of Employees Authorized to Perform LOTO: Those trained in Lockout Tagout (LOTO)
Title(s) of Affected Employees and How to Notify: Hospital Personnel; notified by verbal
communication.
Location of Energy Isolating

Energy Source Yes No Magnitude of Energy
Means
Electrical X System’s Main “A1” Power 320 - 480VAC, 3 Phase
Disconnect
Pneumatic X
Hydraulic X
Gas/Water/Steam X
Chemical X
Mechanical Motion X OTS Counterpoise 200 lbs
Gravity X OTS Counterpoise 200 lbs
Springs X OTS Counterpoise 200 lbs
Thermal X
Stored Energy X
Air Under Pressure X
Oil Under Pressure X
Water Under Pressure X
Gas Under Pressure X
Steam X
Other X
Type(s) of Equipment and/or Method(s) Selected to Dissipate or Isolate Stored Energy:
Allow 3 minutes for stored energy to dissipate.
Type(s) of Equipment and/or Method(s) Used to Ensure Disconnection’s:
One Lock & Tag for Main “A1” Disconnect
Chapter 1 - Safety and Service Page 39

GE HEALTHCARE
1.2 LOTO Procedure for System Power
Name of Equipment:DiscoveryXR656 System (Workstation, System Cabinet, Table, Wall Stand
and Overhead Tube Support)
Step Lockout/Tagout Procedure

1 Prepare for shutdown of equipment by notifying affected personnel working in the area
that lockout/tagout is being performed.
2 Bring system software down. See 1.3 on page 40 and return to next step in this section
3 Locate main power supply (Service) disconnect feeding System Cabinet.
4 Lock Out / Tag Out the main power disconnect.
5 Using an insulated voltmeter, measure the incoming power connection to the system
cabinet at the circuit breaker.
6 If no voltage is present at the system cabinet’s circuit breaker; place the power switch on
the PDU to the OFF position and service equipment as required.
7 After service has been performed, notify affected personnel that equipment will be re-
energized and LOTO devices are being removed.
8 Assure the safety of the area and that all safety devices and guards have been replaced
9 Return system functions to a preset state.
10 Remove Lock-Out Tag-Out equipment from main disconnect.
11 Locate main power supply (Service) disconnect feeding System Cabinet and re-apply
power.
12 Perform system startup. See Perform system startup. Refer to Section 1.5.2. Energizing
System on page 45.
1.3 System Software Shutdown

Shut down is controlled by both software and hardware. When a shutdown is initiated, application
and the operating software execution is terminated. While this takes place, signals are sent to the
PDU to shut off system hardware. Complete shutdown takes approximately 1 minute.
1. From the application interface, using the mouse, click on the tools icon. This selects the Service
User Interface.
Figure 1-1 Service User Interface
Page 40 Section 1.0 - Lock-Out & Tag-Out (LOTO)

GE HEALTHCARE
2. Now click on [Shut Down].
Figure 1-2 Shut Down Screen
3. Now lock out and tag out the facility power to the system, if you wish to perform service. Refer
to Section 1.4.
1.4 LOTO Procedure for OTS Counterpoise

Name of Equipment: Everest OTS (Overhead Tube Support)
1. Remove OTS carriage covers.
2. Engage the counterpoise locking screw and install LOTO lock. See Fig1-3.
Figure 1-3 OTS Lock-Out-Tag-Out Installed on Counterpoise

GE HEALTHCARE
1.5 Applying System Power
1.5.1 System Preparation for Energizing Power
POTENTIAL ELECTRICAL SHOCK.

320 - 480 VAC ARE PRESENT.
PERFORM LOTO BEFORE PERFORMING SERVICE OF ANY KIND. SEE SECTION 1.0 ON
PAGE 27.
Follow the steps below to ensure that your system powers up safely, properly and reliably.
Potential for Equipment Damage. PDU tap settings must match input voltage else there is potential
for equipment damage.
1. Open System Cabinet door and verify that the PDU’s tap settings (underneath cover at TB3)
are set correctly for the line voltage being supplied to the system. See Fig1-4.
Figure 1-4 : 2293487, PDU Front Panel

GE HEALTHCARE
2. Disengage all facility (i.e. hospital) E-Stops.

Figure 1-5 : Sample Hospital E-Stop
3. Disengage E-Stop Button on Table or RCIM. Turn it 1/4 turn clockwise to release button. It will
pop out.
See Fig1-6
Figure 1-6 : E-Stop Button on Table and on RCIM
E-Stop button for 3rd edition IEC60601
4. On the PDU’s front panel, set circuit breakers CB1, CB2, CB3, CB4, CB5, CB6 and CB7 to the
“ON” position.
Figure 1-7 : PDU Circuit Breakers

GE HEALTHCARE
Note: Do not use CB8 to Switch the PDU ON or OFF. CB8 in the system cabinet should not be used
to switch power “ON” and “OFF” to the PDU. If this circuit breaker is used, there is a high
probability it will trip when switched to the “ON” position. A high “in-rush” of current causes this
situation.
5. Switch CB8 and the power switch to the “ON” position. The power switch handle points to the
“I” Position. See Fig1-8.
Figure 1-8 : PDU Circuit Breaker (CB8) & Power Switches Shown in “ON” position.
Cautions: Do not hurt your hand when turn On/Off the Switch.

GE HEALTHCARE
1.5.2 Energizing System
System power-up is controlled by both hardware and software. When power is applied, power is
switched “ON” to each of the subsystems through hardware. Software in the subsystems boot and
begin loading their operating systems and applications. Complete system startup takes
approximately 2 minutes.
1. Prepare the system for energizing, if required. Refer to Section 1.5.1.
2. Remove tag and lock from facility power. Refer to Section 1.5.1.
3. Press the [Power On] button on the RCIM to initiate system start-up.
Figure 1-9 : RCIM Power On Button
4. The table inhibit switch will be illuminated after power is applied. When the pedals are inhibited,
the switch will be illuminated. If you wish not to inhibit table motion press to turn switch light OFF.
Figure 1-10 : Table Foot Pedals Inhibit Switch
5. System startup is complete when applications screen is displayed on workstation computer.

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 2.0
Equipment Safety - Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
A sudden discharge of static electricity from your finger or other conductor can destroy static
sensitive devices or microcircuitry. Often the spark is neither felt nor heard, but damage occurs.
An electronic device exposed to electrostatic discharge (ESD) might not appear to be affected at
all and can work perfectly throughout a normal cycle. The device can function normally for a while,
but it has been degraded in the internal layers, reducing its life expectancy.
Networks built into many integrated circuits provide some protection, but in many cases, the
discharge contains enough power to alter device parameters or melt silicon junctions.
2.1 Generating Static

The following table shows that:
• Different activities generate different amounts of static electricity.
• Static electricity increases as humidity decreases.
Event 55% 40% 10%

Walking across carpet 7,500 V 15,000 V 35,000 V
Walking across vinyl floor 3,000V 5,000V 12,000V
Motions of bench worker 400V 800V 6,000V
Removing bubble pack from PCB 7,000V 20,000V 26,500V
Packing PCBs in foam-lined box 5,000V 11,000V 21,000V
Table 1-1 Relative Humidity
Many electronic components are sensitive to ESD. Circuitry design and structure determine the
degree of sensitivity. The following packaging and grounding precautions are necessary to prevent
damage to electric components and accessories.
• Transport products in static-safe containers, such as tubes, bags, or boxes to avoid hand
contact.
• Protect all electrostatic parts and assemblies with conductive or approved containers or
packaging.
• Keep electrostatic sensitive parts in their containers until they arrive at static-free stations.
• Place items on a grounded surface before removing them from their container.
• When handling or touching a sensitive component or assembly, ground yourself by touching
the chassis.
• Avoid contact with pins, leads, or circuitry.
• Place reusable electrostatic-sensitive parts from assemblies in protective packaging or
conductive foam.
2.2 Personal Grounding Methods and Equipment

Use the following equipment to prevent static electricity damage to equipment:
Page 46 Section 2.0 - Equipment Safety - Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)

GE HEALTHCARE
• Wrist straps are flexible straps with a maximum of one-megohm +/- 10% resistance in the
ground cords. To provide a proper ground, wear the strap against bare skin. The ground cord
must be connected and fit snugly into the banana plug connector on the grounding mat or
workstation.
• Heel straps, toe straps, and boot straps can be used at standing workstations and are
compatible with most types of shoes or boots. On conductive floors or dissipative floor mats,
use them on both feet with a maximum of one-megohm +/- 10% resistance between the
operator and ground.
Method Voltage
Antistatic plastic 1,500V
Carbon-loaded plastic 7,500V
Metallized laminate 15,000V
Table 1-2 Static Shielding Protection Levels
2.3 Grounding the Work Area

To prevent static damage of components and parts in the work area:
• Cover the work surface with approved static-dissipative material. Provide a wrist strap
connected to the work surface and properly grounded tools and equipment.
• Use static-dissipative mats, foot straps, or air ionizers to give added protection.
• Handle electrostatic sensitive components, parts, and assemblies by the case or PCB
laminate.
• Handle components only at static-free work areas.
• Turn off power and input signals before inserting and removing connectors or test equipment.
• Use fixtures made of static-safe materials when fixtures must directly contact dissipative
surfaces.
• Keep work area free of non-conductive materials, such as ordinary plastic assembly aids and
Styrofoam.
2.4 Recommended Materials and Equipment

Materials and equipment that are recommended for use in preventing static electricity include:
• Antistatic tape, smocks, aprons, or sleeve protectors
• Conductive bins, foam, tabletop workstations with ground cord of one-megohm +/-10%
resistance, and other assembly or soldering aids.
• Static-dissipative table or floor mats with hard tie to ground
• ESD Field service kits
• Static awareness labels
• Wrist straps and footwear straps providing one-megohm +/-10% resistance
• Material handling packages
○ Conductive plastic bags, plastic tubes and tote boxes
○ Opaque shielding bags
○ Transparent metallized shielding bags and shielding tubes

GE HEALTHCARE
2.5 Audio and visual
It is the User’s responsibility to provide the means for audio and visual
communication between the Operator and the patient.
Section 3.0 Avoid cabinet tipping
To avoid the risk of cabinet tipping, please use the anti-tipping devices if
you start any of below operations.
1. Pull out PDU when JEDI was removed.
2. Open Swing Door when JEDI was removed.
3. Remove JEDI.
See Fig1-11.
Figure 1-11 : Assemble the anti-tipping foot
Open Swing Door
Remove JEDI
Pull out PDU
Anti-Tipping foot
Warning label for anti-tipping are all in Cabinet door back. Pleas follow
the attachment.
Page 48 Section 3.0 - Avoid cabinet tipping

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 4.0 Symbols

4.1 Special Notices
Table 7-1 Special notices
Symbol Description
Dangerous voltage. This indicates an avoidable, dangerous, high voltage

hazard.
This symbol on the equipment indicates the operating instructions

should be consulted to ensure safe operation
Hand crushing hazard. This symbol indicates that serious injury to the
hand may occur.
Follow Instructions for use
No stepping or standing on unit. The component on which the symbol

appears cannot support the weight of a person. Damage to equipment or
injury may occur if the unit is stepped or stood upon.
Maximum load. This symbol indicates that the component has a

maximum weight limit. Damage to equipment or injury may occur if the
maximum weight is exceeded.
Operating temperature. This symbol indicates that the component must

be within a minimum and maximum temperature range in order to
operate. Damage to equipment may occur if equipment is used at
temperatures outside of the specified range.

GE HEALTHCARE
4.2 X-ray Tube Operational Symbols
Table 7-2 X-ray Tube Operational Symbols
Symbol Description
X-ray emission is used to indicate the X-ray tube head is emitting

X-rays. Take adequate precautions to prevent the possibility of
any persons carelessly, unwisely, or unknowingly exposing
themselves or others to radiation.
X-ray source assembly is used to indicate a reference to an X-ray

source assembly.
X-ray tube is used to indicate a reference to the X-ray tube, e.g.,

to mark the surface of a grid, which is to be oriented towards the
X-ray tube.
Identifies controls or indicators associated with normal rotational

speed of the X-ray anode.
Identifies controls or indicators associated with high rotational

speed of the X-ray anode.
Identifies controls or indicators associated with the selection of a

small focal spot or the connection for the corresponding filament.
Identifies controls or indicators associated with the selection of

focal spot or the connection for the corresponding filament.
When used with the small focal spot symbol, this symbol applies
to the larger focal spot. When used with the large focal spot
symbol, this symbol applies to the smaller focal spot.
Identifies controls or indicators associated with the selection of a

large focal spot or the connection for the corresponding filament.
Page 50 Section 4.0 - Symbols

GE HEALTHCARE
4.3 System Power On and Reset
Table 2-3 describes the power controls of the system, located on the RCIM.
Table 7-3 Power controls
Symbol Description
A SYSTEM RESET button is used to reset the system. The

button is located on the RCIM.
A POWER ON button is used to turn on the power to the system.

The button is located on the RCIM.
4.4 Electrical Type

Table2-4describes the electrical protection rating based on system type.
Table 7-4 Electrical type
Symbol Description
Type B Equipment indicates the equipment provides a particular

degree of protection against electrical shock regarding leakage
current and protective earthing per IEC60601-1.
4.5 Electrical Current

Table2-5 describes the symbols for the different types of electrical current that may be used on
your system.

GE HEALTHCARE
Table 7-5 Electrical current types
Symbol Description
Alternating Current indicates the equipment is suitable for

alternating current only.
Direct Current indicates the equipment is suitable for direct

current only.
Both direct and alternating currents indicate the equipment is

suitable for both direct and alternating current.
4.6 Ground
Table2-6 describes the different types of grounding used in your system.
Table 7-6 Ground types
Symbol Description
Functional Earth (ground) Terminal indicates a terminal directly

connected to a point of a measuring supply or control circuit or to
a screening part, which is intended to be earthed for functional
purposes.
Noiseless (clean) earth (ground) identifies any terminal of a

specially designed earthing system where noise from earth of
leads will not cause a malfunction of the equipment.
Protective earth (ground) identifies any terminal which is

intended for connection of an external protective conductor to
protect against electrical shock in case of a fault.
Frame or chassis identify the frame or chassis terminal.

GE HEALTHCARE
Symbol Description
Equipotentiality identifies terminals that bring the various parts

of equipment or systems to the same potential when connected
together. These terminals are not necessarily at earth (ground)
potential. The value of the potential may be indicated next to the
symbol.
4.7 Collimator
Table2-7 describes the collimator controls and the radiation field.
Table 7-7 Collimator descriptions
Symbol Description
Control for indicating radiation field by using light.
Identifies controls for opening the collimator blades, or indicates

partially or fully open state.
Identifies controls for closing the collimator blades, or indicates

closed state.
Indicates the collimator blades are closed. The controlled blades

are shown in thicker lines.
Indicates the collimator blades are open. The controlled blades

are shown in thicker lines.
Indicates the use of laser radiation.

GE HEALTHCARE

GE HEALTHCARE
Chapter 2 System Installation Guide
Section 1.0 Mechanical Installation Guide

Installation is broken into two primary tasks: mechanical and electrical. Most Mechanical (MECH)
tasks focus on the physical aspects of hardware assembly, equipment positioning, and cabling.
Electrical tasks are performed when system power is applied. A Project Manager - Installation
(PMI) is also involved in site planning and project coordination with the customer and installers/
field engineer(s).
The primary tasks are designed to be performed in sequence. Follow the sequence of tasks
describe for each primary task in the sections (below & Electrical (Config., Calibration, Finalization))
that follow.
1 Complete Pre-Installation Checklist People Required: 1 Hours to Complete: 0.5

Fill out the "GE Healthcare Site Readiness Checklist". See Fill Out GE Healthcare Site Readiness
Checklist, in Installation Handoff Checklists.
2 Receive and Inventory System People Required: 2 Hours to Complete: 2.5
Inventory equipment & report discrepancies immediately.
Plan route and transport equipment to room.
Collect Product Locator Cards and store in a secure location.
Schedule electrician to coincide with System Cabinet 3-phase power connections.
3 Install Rails & Overhead Tube Support (OTS) People Required: 2 Hours to Complete: 5
Select rail length, assemble rails, mount, level and secure supports, assemble and install longitudinal drive
belt anchor rails and brackets. Refer to the Chapter 4, Inboard Stationary Rails section.
Install the longitudinal drape rail. Refer to the Chapter 4, Auxiliary Support Rails section.
Assemble bridge and OTS, lateral and longitudinal drive hardware, lift bridge and mount in stationary rails,
install anti-backlash assemblies. Refer to the Chapter 5, Bridge and Carriage - 2, 3, or 4 Meter Bridge
section.
Tension longitudinal drive belt and wire up the longitudinal drive belt assembly. Refer to the Chapter 5,
Longitudinal Drive Belt Assembly section.
Tension lateral drive belt. Refer to the Chapter 5, Lateral Drive Belt Tensioning and Alignment section.
Install X-ray tube covers. Refer to the Chapter 5, X-ray Tube Covers section.
Mount the collimator. Refer to the Chapter 5, Collimator section.
Mount the UIF. Refer to the Chapter 5, User Interface (UIF) section.
Set up OTS counter balance. Refer to the Chapter 5, OTS Counterpoise Balance section.
4 Pull MIS Cables People Required: 2 Hours to Complete: 5
Pull MIS cables between sub-systems. Refer to the Chapter 6, System Cables section.
5 Install System Cabinet (Sys. Cab) People Required: 2 Hours to Complete:5
Position cabinet according to site plans & drawings, and secure. Refer to the Chapter 7, System Cabinet
Installation section.
6 Install Digital Table(TBL) & options People Required: 2 Hours to Complete: 4
Remove table from shipping container. Refer to the Chapter 8, Unpack Table section.
Chapter 2 - System Installation Guide Page 55

GE HEALTHCARE
Position table according to site plans & drawings. Refer to the Chapter 8, Initial Table and Bridge
Alignment section.
Lay table baseplate and drill mounting holes. Refer to the Chapter 8, Install Table section.
Position, level and secure table to floor. Refer to the Final Table-to-Bridge Alignment subsection of
Chapter 8, Install Table.
Adjust pedal stabilizers. Refer to the Adjust Front and Rear Pedal Stabilizing Screws subsection of
Chapter 8, Install Table.
Install Table ION Chamber & Detector Installation Refer to the subsection of Chapter 8, Install
Table.
Connect table cables. Refer to the Chapter 8, Table Cables section.
Attach table top. Refer to the Chapter 8, Table Top section.
7 Install Wall Stand (WS) People Required: 2 Hours to Complete: 4
Remove wall stand from shipping container. Refer to the Chapter 9, Unpack Wall Stand section.
Install Gas Spring. Refer to the Chapter 9, Install Gas Spring section.
Aligning and installation the Wall Stand, mount Wall Stand. Refer to the Chapter 9, Aligning and Installing
the Wall Stand section.
Connect cables. Refer to the Chapter 9, Install Wallstand Cables section.
Install display. Refer to the Chapter 9, Connect Display section.
8 Install TIB&Dongle&BIN People Required: 2 Hours to Complete: 2
Install TIB & Dongle & BIN onto wall. Refer to the Chapter 10,11 and 12
9 Install Workstation&Wall Plate People Required: 2 Hours to Complete: 1
Position and connect Workstation computer, RCIM, accessories and wall plate. Refer to the Chapter 13,
Workstation and Wall Plate section. Including any purchased equipment (i.e.Bar Code Reader) options.
10 Cleanup Site People Required: 2 Hours to Complete: 1
Remove and dispose of shipping materials and tools properly.
11 Complete MI==>FE Handoff Checklist People Required: 1 Hours to Complete: 1
Fill out Mechanical ==>FE handoff checklist and deliver it to the local FE for review at completion of
mechanical install. See Mechanical ==> FE GE Healthcare Final Checklist & Mechanical FE Handoff, in
Installation Handoff Checklists.
Page 56 Section 1.0 - Mechanical Installation Guide

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 2.0
Electrical (Config., Calibration... Finalization)
All Class A (General) documentation for the system is provided on the DiscoveryXR656 Service
Documentation CDROM, 5343956-2EN, shipped with the system. Any DiscoveryXR656
documentation that is referenced in this Installation manual can be found on this CDROM. In
addition, paper copies of the Installation manual (this document) and the Schematics manual are
provided to assist in system installation and troubleshooting.
Review GE Healthcare Site Readiness & Hours to Complete:

1 People Required: 1
MI==>FE Handoff Checklists 0.5
Local FE to review the GE Healthcare Site Readiness Checklist with the mechanical install team..
Local FE to review the MI==>FE GE Healthcare Final Checklist with the mechanical install team to
confirm completion of mechanical installation before continuing with the installation process.
If the customer has purchased the Auto Protocol Assist option, the Field Engineer should request a list
of the protocol codes from the HIS/RIS manager for the facility. This list will be provided to the
Applications Specialist so they can manually enter the codes.
2 Equipment and Personnel Readiness People Required: 1 Hours to Complete: 2
Apply LOTO to power. Refer to Chapter 1, Lock-Out & Tag-Out (LOTO).
Verify equipment is configured per the site plans and drawings. Also, see Pre-Install Manual, 5343949-
8EN which can be found on the DiscoveryXR656 Service Documentation CDROM 5343956-2EN,
shipped with the system.
3 System Hardware Configuration & Power People Required: 1 Hours to Complete: 8
Check and configure system hardware. Refer to Chapter 14, Jumpers, Switches, Terminations & Power.
Electrician or authorized FE to connect 3-phase power to System Cabinet. Refer to PDU Tap Settings
and 3-Phase Power Connection subsection in Chapter 14, Jumpers, Switches, Terminations & Power.
Perform System Grounding Resistance Tests. Refer to Chapter 15, Grounding Resistance Tests.
Install Trim Covers (this must be done prior to performing Leakage Current Measurements). Refer to
Chapter 16, Install Trim Covers.
Perform Leakage Current Measurements. Refer to Chapter 17, Leakage Current Measurements.
4 System Power Up and Minor Tasks People Required: 1 Hours to Complete: 1
Prepare system for Energizing. Refer to the System Preparation for Energizing Power subsection in
Chapter 1, Lock-Out & Tag-Out (LOTO).
Power Up system. Refer to the Energizing System subsection in Chapter 1, Lock-Out & Tag-Out
(LOTO).
Software& LFC, Configure, Calibrate and

5 People Required: 1 Hours to Complete: 12
Alignment, install Options
Perform Load From Cold to install system software. Refer to Chapter 18 Software, Chapter19
Configuration and Chapter 20 Calibration & Alignment.
Table 2-1

GE HEALTHCARE
Configure System parameters listed in System Configuration Chapter/ System Configuration Tool
Parameters section of System installation Manual 5343950-1EN which can be found on the
DiscoveryXR656 Service Documentation CDROM 5343956-2EN, shipped with the system. Verify
system is configured correctly per FDO for software options, generator power (50,65 or 80kW) and ion
chamber (3-Cell or 4-Cell) feature.
Firmware download of ALL controllers is required for proper system operation. Refer to Chapter 18,
Perform Controller Downloads.
Firmware download of ALL detectors is required for proper system operation. Refer to Chapter 18,
Perform Detector Downloads.
Firmware download of the generator is required for proper system operation. Refer to Chapter 18,
Perform Generator Download.
Perform initial positioner calibrations. Refer to Chapter 20, Initial Positioner Calibrations.
Perform X-ray Beam to SID Travel alignment. Refer to Chapter 20, X-ray Beam to X-ray Beam
Adjustment.
Perform Detector Perpendicular to X-ray Beam adjustment. Refer to Chapter 20, Detector Perpendicular
to X-ray Beam Adjustment
Perform Vertical Tracking check. Refer to Chapter 20, Vertical Tracking.
Perform Final Wall Stand Anchoring. Refer to Chapter 20, Final Wall Stand Anchoring.
Perform Final Wall Stand Balance. Refer to Chaoter20, Final Wall Stand Balance.
Install hardware option: Image Pasting Barrier. Refer to Chapter20, Options Installation, Image Pasting
Barrier subsection
Finish System Calibrations. In the order specified, perform the calibrations identified in the System
Manual 5343950-1EN, Calibration /System Installation Calibration Sequence, which can be found on the
DiscoveryXR656 Service Documentation CDROM 5343956-2EN, shipped with the system.
6 HHS Tests People Required: 1 Hours to Complete: 2
Perform HHS Tests. Refer to Chapter 21, Regulatory Tests (HHS) section or other equivalent
procedure.
Fill out HHS data sheets and submit to HHS representative. Refer to the HHS Data Sheets subsection
in Chapter 21, Regulatory Tests (HHS) section or other equivalent procedure.
Table 2-1
Page 58 Section 2.0 - Electrical (Config., Calibration... Finalization)

GE HEALTHCARE
7 Networking and PACS People Required: 1 Hours to Complete: 1
Verify that the hospital network is accessible (i.e; “Ping” Hospital IP network Address).
Configure for hospital Network Hosts and DICOM Printers. See Chapter 22, Networking and PACs
Configuration.
HIS/RIS setup. Configure Automatic Protocol Assist (Option), refer to the Operator Manual 5402340-
1EN/ Preferences / Protocols /Edit Protocol Database section, which can be found on the
DiscoveryXR656 Operator Documentation CDROM 5402340-299 provided with the system.
Hours to Complete:
8 Operational Checks People Required: 1
0.5
Verify that lights and LEDs all function (OTS UIF, RCIM, Table, Wall Stand...). Refer to Chapter 24,
Operational Checks.
Verify that safety devices function correctly (E-Stops, Inhibit switches...). Refer to Chapter 24,
Operational Checks.
Verify that positioning controls function correctly (Table, OTS and Tube, Wall Stand). Refer
to Chapter 24, Operational Checks.
Verify that all purchased options function correctly (Dual Energy, Image Pasting, Auto Positioning,
VolumeRAD, 4-Cell Ion Chamber,130 cm Cross Table Grid, AutoProtocol Assist, etc.). Refer to Chapter
24, Operational Checks.
Verify proper functionality of Ion Chambers. Refer to Chapter 24, Operational Checks.
Hours to Complete:
9 Apply International Safety Labels People Required: 1
0.5
Apply International Safety Labels in the language of that country. Refer to Chapter 25, Apply
International Labels.
Hours to Complete:
10 Final Tasks & Customer Turnover People Required: 1
0.5
Install Demo Images and Operator Manual. Refer to Chapter 26, Install Demo Images and Operator
Manual.
Table 2-1

GE HEALTHCARE
Back Up System and Protocol Data Bases. Refer to Database Backup in Chapter 26, Final Tasks.
Program Remote Control. Refer to Chapter 25, Program Remote Control.
Install Remote Control Holder. Refer to Chapter 25, Install Remote Control Holder.
Perform general house keeping tasks. Refer to Final Administrative Tasks subsection in Chapter 26,
Final Tasks.
Complete & Return Product (i.e; Locator) Cards. Refer to the System Rating Plates subsection in
Chapter 26, Final Tasks.
Turn system over to customer.
Hours to Complete:
11 Complete FE==>Apps Handoff Checklist People Required: 1
0.5
.Field Engineer to fill out FE==>Apps Handoff Checklist. Refer to FE ==> Application Handoff Checklist,
in Installation Handoff Checklists. FE should copy and deliver the following checklists to the Applications
Specialist at the completion of the installation:
MI to fill out GE Healthcare Site Readiness Checklist and return to MI company.
MI to fill out GE Healthcare Final Checklist & MI/FE Handoff checklist and give to FE.
FE to fill out Application Handoff Checklist and give to Apps.
Table 2-1
Page 60 Section 2.0 - Electrical (Config., Calibration... Finalization)

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 3.0 FE to Applications Specialist Handoff Guide

Field Engineer to Application Specialist handoff guide is used to confirm that all critical installation
steps have been completed.
Item Description Sign Off

1 Have System Leakage and Ground Tests been completed?
2 Have all calibrations been completed?

3 Has the operator manual CDROM contents been installed on the system?
4 Have the sample images been installed on the system?
5 Have purchased options been installed/enabled/configured?

6 All appropriate labels installed:
• X-ray tube focal spot
• Image Pasting Barrier (purchased option)
7 HHS testing completed?
8 In site checkout completed?

9 Have functional checks been completed?
10 Are all covers installed?
11 Have all protective tape/coverings been removed?

• Table footswitches
• OTS UIF
12 Are there any cosmetic issues?
Table 2-2

GE HEALTHCARE
Item Description Sign Off

13 Are there any system issues?
14 Are there any functional limitations?

15 Has system documentation (paper and CDROM) been given to the customer?
Also, for VA sites, has 2nd set of documentation been given to the customer?
16 Is the hospital scheduling system (HIS/RIS) configured? Does the modality display MWL
(Modality WorkList) responses successfully?
17 Are printers configured and printer calibrations done on ALL printers?

18 Are PACS configured and SMPTE and/or test images pushed to system for successful
display (be sure burn/no burn is properly set for PACS)?
19 Has local physics inspection been completed? Some states/sites may not allow use of
system for patients until this is done.
20 Has backup of pristine system been performed? (Patient Data Base as well as total system
backup)?
21 Has the list of protocol codes been provided to the Applications Specialist?
22 Have all product locator cards been collected and processed?
23 Room IP Addresses for DICOM and Broadband identified?

Table 2-2
Page 62 Section 3.0 - FE to Applications Specialist Handoff Guide

GE HEALTHCARE
Chapter 3 Tools and Materials Checklist
Section 1.0 Checklist
THE FOLLOWING TOOLS & MATERIALS ARE NEEDED FOR INSTALLATION, BUT ARE NOT SHIPPED COMPLETED
WITH THE PRODUCT
Torque Wrench Kit: 5135228 or equivalent
Assorted sizes of drywall “toggle” bolts (1/4”, 3/8”, and 1/2”)
Self-tapping screws (#8 x 1/2")
Plastic wall anchors
Tie wraps, electrical tape and wire markers
Tags for labelling incomplete work in accordance to OSHA and regulatory requirements
Lock-Out & Tag-Out (LOTO) equipment
Assorted 12-point sockets (SAE and metric), drives and wrenches
Electric and hammer drill. Masonry and high-speed bits: 10 mm, 12 mm, 1/4 inch, 1/2 inch, 3/4
inch, 1 inch, 69 mm (2.7 inch)
Assorted sizes of tongue and grove pliers, hammers, hex wrenches (metric and SAE), screw
drivers and metal files
Fishing line for longitudinal belt tensioning, 12 feet, 8 pound test, 0.25 mm or equivalent
Chalk line, plumb bob and assorted alignment tools (including squares, torpedo and 6-foot levels)
#46-156940G3, XT Hoist assemblies (Or PN# 5181752 OTS lifting tools)
6 foot (1.8 m) Step ladders
Steel measuring tapes, 12 foot (3.5 m) and 50 foot (15 m)
LASER Alignment Tool capable of +/- 1/8 inches (3.2 mm) over 30 ft. (9.14 m) or better
Optional: (1) #46-316872G1, Water Level kit [(ELECTRA/LEVEL by Zircon International) or
equivalent capable of +/- 1/8inches (3.2 mm) over 30 ft. (9.14 m)] with 30 foot (9.14 m) of 3/8
inches (9.5 mm) I.D. Plastic tubing (#46-136324P10)
Additional tool list for OTS rails: Review the Chapter 5, Chapter 5 Overhead Stationary Rails, 1.3
Special Tools and Materials section
Lead strips for wall fasteners to shield Ionizing Radiation
Heat gun
Razor knife
1 inch putty knife/scraper
Carpenter's square, 2 foot (61 cm) long
Carpenter's level, 18 inch (46 cm) long
Table 3-1 Tools materials check list
Chapter 3 - Tools and Materials Checklist Page 63

GE HEALTHCARE
THE FOLLOWING TOOLS & MATERIALS ARE NEEDED FOR INSTALLATION, BUT ARE NOT SHIPPED COMPLETED
WITH THE PRODUCT
Carpenter's level, 4 foot (122 cm) long
one small mirror
Loctite 242 or 243(Blue)
Table 3-1 Tools materials check list
Page 64 Section 1.0 - Checklist

GE HEALTHCARE
Chapter 4 Overhead Stationary Rails
Section 1.0 Introduction

1.1 Summary Checklist
Room Orientation
Inboard Stationary Rail Length Modifications (if necessary)
Rail Levelling Procedures (using LASER alignment tool)
Rail and Shim Installation
Confirm stationary rails are parallel
Confirm stationary rails are square Install
Longitudinal Anchor Rails
Install Auxiliary Support Rail and Cable Drape Rail
1.2 Before You Begin

Stationary rails are shipped fully assembled (i.e., wear strips, lock strips, end caps, and bumpers
assembled to the rail) to you. The mounting bolts and shims are usually shipped in the same
container as the rails. The container should be labelled as the rear rail. If you’re uncertain, the rear
rail has lock strips. Lock strips are thin metallic strip of 1/8 inch steel strips attached to the rail. See
Fig 4-1.
Figure 4-1 Lock Strip Location
Rails are available in various lengths ranging from 134 inches (3.4 m) to 228 inches (5.79 m).
Usually, rails require no modification to their length. If the rails require cutting, follow the procedure
described in Appendix A, - Alternative Methods.
Before the installation work begins, you should consult your system’s Pre-Installation manual for
specific room and layout requirements.
Chapter 4 - Overhead Stationary Rails Page 65

GE HEALTHCARE
1.3 Special Tools and Materials
Two people are required to install the rail system safely. A set of common tools (metric and SAE)
are required. In addition, the following items are required:
• 3/4 inch (19 mm) drill bit with 1/2 inch (13 mm) shank (only if rail length needs to be modified).
• No. 29 drill bit (3.5 mm) and 8-32 inch tap (only if rail length needs to be modified).
• No. 18 drill bit (4.3 mm) for 8-32 inch clearance hole (only if rail length needs to be modified).
• No. 7 drill bit (5.1 mm) and 1/4-20 inch tap (only if rail length needs to be modified).
• Drill motors, 1/2 inch (13 mm) & 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) chuck capacity.
• Stationary Rail Leveling Methods/Tools:
○ LASER kit (46-216640P1) or equivalent. Recommended leveling method.
* LASER must be capable of 1/8 inch accuracy over 30 feet.
○ Transit (i.e, builder’s level). Alternate leveling method, refer to Appendix A, - Alternative
Methods - Illustration - Checking Rail Supports with Transit (Alternate Method).
○ Tripod (for use with LASER or transit levels):
■ Tripod (46-194427P71) or equivalent.
■ Tripod case (46-199427P72) or equivalent.
■ Tripod adapter (46-216499G1) or equivalent.
○ Water-level kit (GE No. 46-316872G1) with 30’ (9.14 m) of 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) I.D. plastic
tubing (ELECTRA/LEVEL by Zircon International) or equivalent capable of +/-1/8 inch (3.2
mm) over 30 ft. (9.14 m). Alternate leveling method, refer to Appendix A, - Alternative
Methods, Rail Leveling Procedures (Water-Level or Transit)" subsection.
* Pint bottle containing Water-level liquid.
• Four, 3" (7.6 cm) C-clamps.
• Headless bolt or stud, 1/2 - 13 x 4" (10.2 cm) for wall-mounted units.
NOTE: Only use the “Whiz-lock” bolt brand.
Special 1/2”-13 headed bolts for mounting the stationary rails are furnished with each
Page 66 Section 1.0 - Introduction

GE HEALTHCARE
suspension bridge assembly. These bolts are case-hardened “Whiz-lock” flange bolts.
These bolts require no separate flat washer or lock washer. Bolts of this type must be
used to obtain adequate clearances and permit unrestricted longitudinal movement of
the bridge along the rails. Substitution is not recommended.
The furnished bolts are 1-1/4 inch (3.18 cm) long (GE Part No. 46-221850P13). If longer bolts are
needed, a 1-1/2 inch length (3.81 cm) can be ordered (GE Part No.46-221850P14).
MacLean-Fogg Company
1000 Allanson Roadn
Mundelein, Illinois 60060-3890
Phone (847) 566-0010
www.maclean-fogg.com
1.4 Parts Shortages and Transportation Damage

• Unpack and inspect for shortages and parts damage promptly upon receipt of equipment. Refer
to the “Damage in Transportation” statement in the front of this direction.
• Unpack what is necessary to thoroughly inspect for possible shipping damage. Shortage
claims on small parts may be avoided if packing material, envelopes, packages etc., are
carefully examined.
• Do not discard any of packing materials until all items have been located. Refer to the Product
Delivery Instructions (PAD’s) accompanying the equipment to check that all items have been
shipped.

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 2.0 Inboard Stationary Rails

NOTE: Make sure that the Unistruts that supports the Stationary Rails are parallel to each other
and spaced, center-to-center, as defined in the Pre-Installation Manual to properly
support your OTS Bridge length.
The inboard/outboard rails are supplied in 4" (10.2 cm) increments. Each rail has mounting holes
on 26" (66 cm) centers, with the first hole being located at 2" (5.1 cm) from end of rail. The last
hole is located either 2" (5.1 cm) or 4" (10.2 cm) from the other end of the rail with a variable space
of less than 26" (66 cm) between it and the second to the last hole. There must be a minimum of
2" (5.1 cm) between the ends of the stationary rails and the wall.
2.1 Room Orientation

See Fig 4-2 to understand the terminology regarding room orientation (head, foot, front,rear).
Figure 4-2 Room Orientation Terminology
2.2 Inboard Stationary Rail Length Modifications

If the stationary rail length(s) must be modified, refer to Appendix A, - Alternative Methods, Inboard
Rail Length Modifications subsection.
2.3 Rail Leveling Procedures (using LASER alignment tool)

NOTE: The LASER alignment tool is the recommended method to level the stationary rails. If a
LASER tool is not available, alternative methods to level the stationary rails can be found in
Appendix A, - Alternative Methods, Rail Leveling Procedures (Water-Level or Transit) subsection.
1. Mount both stationary rails in place using all bolts and then tighten bolts.
2. Determine a convenient location in the room to set up the LASER alignment tool. Set up the
LASER alignment tool tripod and place the LASER alignment tool on the tripod.
Page 68 Section 2.0 - Inboard Stationary Rails

GE HEALTHCARE
3. Using the LASER leveling screws, level the LASER at 0 degrees and at 90 degrees. The LASER
must be level at both angle positions. Turn the LASER back and forth between 0 degrees and 90
degrees, and adjust until correct level is achieved.
4. Attach the steel tape measure, supplied with the LASER kit, to the stationary rail at one of the
mounting bolt locations. See Fig4-3.
5. Turn the LASER ON and rotate LASER so that the beam hits the tape measure.
Figure 4-3 Checking Rail Supports with LASER
6. If using a self-levelling LASER, use a 4-foot level to verify that the LASER line is level. Fig4-4.
Figure 4-4 Verify LASER is Level
7. Take readings at each mounting bolt location and record these readings. Determine the lowest
bottom point of the stationary rails. This is the reference value. Calculate the difference between
this reference value and the other bolt locations to 1/32” (0.8 mm). Use these difference calculations
to determine height and number of shims required at each bolt hole. Shims will be required and
placed at points with calculated differences greater than 1/32”(0.8mm).
8. When all measurements have been recorded, turn the LASER OFF.
9. Proceed to Section 2.4.

GE HEALTHCARE
2.4 Rail and Shim Installation
1. Loosen all bolts until the bolts are finger tight. At each bolt location, place the previously
determined shims between the rail and the ceiling steelwork. Re-tighten all bolts.
2. Check stationary rail parallelism:
a. For systems with a 2 or 3-meter bridge: Measure the spacing between the rails. It must be
within 1/8” (3.2 mm) of the specified value. See Illustration 4-5-a, 4-5-b. The final distance
between the outside edges of the stationary rails should be 58.36 inches +/- 1/8 in. (1482 mm
+/- 3.2 mm) as shown in Illustration 4-6 .
b. For systems with a 4-meter bridge: Measure the spacing between the rails. It must be within
1/8” (3.2 mm) of the specified value. See Illustration 4-7. The final distance between the
outside edges of the stationary rails should be 111.6 inches +/- 1/8 in. (2835 mm +/- 3.2mm)
as shown in Illustration 4-8 .
c. Measure the distance from one end of a rail to the same point on the opposite end of the
other rail. These are the rails' diagonals. Compare both measurements. The rails are parallel
if the diagonals are equal.
3. Re-measure stationary rail levelness at each bolt location. Adjust shims accordingly so that all
mounting bolt readings are equal within 1/32” (0.8 mm).
4. Retighten all bolts.
5. Using a two-foot level perpendicular to the rail at each bolt location, insure that each stationary
rail is not twisted. Adjust shims accordingly. Retighten bolts.
Figure 4-5 -a Inboard Stationary Rails Installation and Leveling (for 2 Meter Bridges)

GE HEALTHCARE
Figure 4-5-b Inboard Stationary Rails Installation and Leveling (for 3 Meter Bridges)
ITEM DESCRIPTION
1 Center line of unistrut or equivalent for mounting required cable drape hardware.
2 Lateral center line of table.
3 Center line of rail bolt holes.
4 Levels
5 Longitudinal center line of table.
7 Trim to length.
8 Tighten hardware and re-check.
9 A, B,C According to the subsystem supplied.
Table 4-1
Figure 4-6 Stationary Rail Spacing, Cross-Sectional View (for 2 & 3-Meter Bridges)

GE HEALTHCARE
Figure 4-7 Inboard Stationary Rails Installation and Leveling (for 4-Meter Bridge)
ITEM DESCRIPTION
1 Center line of unistrut or equivalent for mounting required cable drape hardware.
2 Lateral center line of table.
4 Levels
5 Longitudinal center line of table.
7 Trim to length.
8 Tighten hardware and re-check.
9 A, B,C According to the subsystem supplied.
Figure 4-8 Stationary Rail Spacing, Cross-Sectional View (for 4-Meter Bridge)

GE HEALTHCARE
2.5 Longitudinal Anchor Rails
1. Locate and open the Long/Lat Belt Kit. See Fig 4-9.
Figure 4-9 Long/Lat Belt Kit
2. Remove the tensioner and anchor mounting assemblies.

3. If present, remove metal caps from the ends of each stationary rail and discard; these are not
needed for the system. See Fig 4-10.
Figure 4-10 Remove and Discard End Caps

GE HEALTHCARE
4. Mount the anchor assembly to the "foot" end of the stationary rails using the hardware supplied
in the anchor packing box. See Fig4-11.
Figure 4-11 Anchor Assembly at Foot End
5. Mount the tensioner assembly to the "head" end of the stationary rails using the hardware
supplied in the anchor packing box.
6. Install bridge bumpers.
a. Attach the short bumpers at the head-end of the stationary rails. See Fig4-12.
Figure 4-12 Short Bumpers on Head End
b. Attach the long bumpers at the foot-end of the stationary rails. See Fig 4-13. The longer
bumpers are required to prevent the longitudinal drive assembly on the bridge from hitting the
longitudinal drive belt anchor assembly on the foot-end anchor rail.
Figure 4-13 Long Bumpers on Foot End

GE HEALTHCARE
7. Rail Installation
Decide installation location and direction according to system configuration and braking plate
location. Mount both long rails in place using 7 bolts each side, and then tighten the bolts.
For rail mounting bolt, the preload torque control is 77Nm.
WARNING
If bolt torque preload not enough may lead to OTS drop.
See Fig4-14
Figure 4-14 Rail and Bolts
8. Check rail level by laser tool or water line tool in several places according to the below guidance.
if its ok, jump to next section, if it needs adjustment, go on with the steps.
• Using the Laser tool to check rail level status

GE HEALTHCARE
Figure 4-15-1 Using the Laser to check rail level status
• Using the water line tool to check the two rails level status
a. Prepare 3 cups of water solution containing 1/8 teaspoon of salt and enough food color to
enable the water level to be seen more easily.
b. Prepare a 30"(9.14 m) clear plastic 3/8"(9.5 mm) I.D. tube and fill the long plastic with water
solution prepared at step 1.
c. Tape a six (6) foot or a two (2) meter flexible steel scale to a support rod to stiffen the scale
or tape the zero scale end of a six (6) foot or a two (2) meter flexible steel scale to a stationary
rail.
d. Stick one end of the long plastic tube to one of the meter prepared at step 3. Be assure

GE HEALTHCARE
See Fig4-15
Figure 4-15 The top end of the tuber higher than the rail
9. Move the free end of the tube to each bolt location and make the water level at the same level
where the rail bottom there lies and note the reading of the meter at the warer line. Then you can
calculate the relative hight of each bolt location and determine how many shims need to be added
10. Rail adjustment and shim (PN#5140204, 5140205, 5140206) installation
Loosen all bolts until the bolts are finger tight. At each bolt location, place the previously determined
shims between the rail and the ceiling steelwork. Re-tighten all bolts.See Fig4-16
Figure 4-16 Shim
11. Check stationary rail parallelism Be assure.

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 3.0 Auxiliary Support Rails

1. Attach the auxiliary support to the Unistrut. The auxiliary support is pre-drilled for perpendicular
Unistrut on 26", and 28", centers or it can be attached to an additional parallel Unistrut as
shown in Fig5-17.
Keep the auxiliary rail at least 3 inches (8 cm) from the wall to allow for cable clamps to clear
the wall.
2. Attach the longitudinal cable drape rail to the bottom of the auxiliary support.
3. Install 2 to 4 cable drape hooks in the rail.
Figure 4-17 Auxiliary Support & Cable Drape Rail Installation
ITEM DESCRIPTION
1 Parallel Unistrut
2 Auxillary Support: 5199504-5
3 Cable Drape Rail

GE HEALTHCARE
Chapter 5 - Overhead Tube Support (OTS)
Section 1.0
Summary Checklist
Modify bridge length (if necessary)
Check cable and connecter status of in the OTS
Bridge Mounting Procedure
Lateral Drive Hardware Installation
Bridge Stiffener Plate Installation
Setup Lifting Fixture
Longitudinal Drive Hardware Installation
Install Lateral Cable Drape Hardware
Install OTS Cable Drape
Carriage Cable Connections
Bridge Anti-Backlash Assemblies
Longitudinal Belt Installation and Tracking
Wiring Longitudinal Drive Assembly
Lateral Drive Belt Alignment and Tensioning
Install X-ray Tube Cover/Endcaps
Install Collimator, Connect Cables, Install Covers
Install User Interface (UIF), Connect Cable
Perform OTS Counterpoise Balance Adjustment
Chapter 5 - - Overhead Tube Support (OTS) Page 79

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 2.0
Modifying the Bridge Length
NOTE: Modifying bridge length is NOT recommended by GE Healthcare Engineering. If
modification of the bridge is required, YOU MUST CHECK WITH YOUR INSTALLATION
SPECIALIST. Confirm that the length you desire will not limit your ability to purchase future product
options or upgrades (i.e. VolumeRAD). If the bridge length must be modified, refer to Appendix A,
- Alternative Methods, Modifying the Bridge Length subsection.
Page 80 Section 2.0 - Modifying the Bridge Length

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 3.0 Bridge and Carriage - 2, 3, or 4 Meter Bridge

NOTE: Do not remove any of the red shipping brackets from the top of the OTS shipping
crate until the OTS has been moved into the exam room.
1. Remove the plastic bag containing OTS bridge mounting hardware from the Technical
Publications box.
2. Cut the shipping bands, remove the foam protective cover from the top of the OTS.
Figure 5-1 OTS Shipping Crate
3. Remove the top shipping bracket (red) from the top of the OTS (5 wood screws on each side
that attach the bracket to the shipping crate and 3 hex head capscrews on each side that
attach the bracket to the top of the carriage). See Fig5-1.
4. Do not remove the 2 side shipping brackets (red) until the bridge has been attached to the
top of the OTS and the lifting fixtures have been attached to the bridge and stationary rails.
3.1 Bridge Mounting Procedure
3.1.1 XT Lifting Fixture

The XT Lifting Fixture PN# 46-156940G3 or PN# 5181752 has been designed and tested to permit
the installation and service of the XT suspension systems associated with the DiscoveryXR656
system.

GE HEALTHCARE
WARNING
IN ORDER TO CHECK THE LIFTING TOOLS IS RELIABLE FOR USE, BELOW SAFETY CHECK
MUST BE PERFORMED.
Follow the instruction in tool package to confirm the tool situation.

There are 2 instruction labels in lifting tool, both instruction contents are same, but Field engineer
should fill in the information on the tag.
a. The Safety Inspection Required Label.
The paint mark on the bolt head and drum, should be aligned.
b. The tag should fill in information.

GE HEALTHCARE
NOTE: The detail instruction is subject to the actual label.
When installing or removing an XT suspension bridge from the stationary rails two (2) lifting fixtures
are required. The lifting capacity of each lifting fixture is 500 lbs. (2.224 kN), NOT INCLUDING
weight of the lifting fixture
Bridges with or without lateral cable concealment installed may be raised or lowered. When working
with a bridge without cable concealment the 2 columns and belt guides may be removed and set
aside, by removing the column bolts and belt guide mounting bar. This lightens the lifting fixture and
lowers the center of gravity thus facilitating handling. See Fig5-2 and Fig5-2-2.

GE HEALTHCARE
Figure 5-2 Lifting Fixture Parts and Placement for 46-156940G3 or 5181752
ITEM DESCRIPTION
1 Stationary Rail Mounting Bolt
2 Clamp Block and Bolts (3/4" Hex Wrench)
3 Rail Brackets (9/16" Hex Wrench)
4 Belt Guide
5 Bearing Cover
6 Belt Center Line
7 Column (9/16" Hex Wrench)
8 Crank Handle
9 Stationary Rail
10 Side Plate

GE HEALTHCARE
Figure 5-2-2: Lifting Fixture for PN# 5181752
3.1.1.1 Tools Required

• 9/16 inch Wrench or Socket
• 3/4 inch Wrench or Socket
3.1.1.2 Set Up
NOTE: Each lifting fixture is approximately 76 lbs. Care should be taken when handling.
1. Confirm that the belt lengths are equal at both ends of each lifting fixture before attaching the
lifting fixtures to the stationary rails.
2. Remove the lifting fixtures from their boxes and check assemblies for unsafe conditions. Pay
particular attention to the condition of the belts and the manner in which the triangular buckles are
fastened to the belts, see Fig5-3.
If the belts are not in good condition do not use the lifting fixtures until the faulty condition is
corrected or the belt(s) are replaced.

GE HEALTHCARE
Figure 5-3 Belt and Buckle
ITEM DESCRIPTION
1 Position of projections
2 Buckle
3 Belt and buckle engagement, the ONLY recommended way
4 Belt
3. Attach the rail brackets to the stationary rails, with respect to the stationary rail mounting bolts,
as shown in Fig5-2.
Be sure that the brackets on the front rail are opposite the brackets on the rear rail.
Be certain that the belts on the same lifting fixture have equal number of turns on the reels, this will
ensure the lifting fixture is level during the lifting process and allow proper engagement of the bridge
wheels in the stationary rails.
4. Fasten the belt buckles to the rail brackets with ½” bolts (Mark 52, 53), use rail bracket positions
as shown in Fig5-4.
Figure 5-4 Rail Bracket

GE HEALTHCARE
ITEM DESCRIPTION
1 Stationary Rail
2 Rail Bracket
A Position A
B Position B
C Position C
D Position D
5. Connection for strap located at ’crank-end,' uses position “A.”

6. Connection for strap located at ’opposite crank-end’ uses position “B.”
Position D
Position C
3.1.2 Bridge-to-Lifting Fixture Placement
Component 2 Meter Bridge 3 Meter Bridge 4.4 Meter Bridge Lifting Fixture
(each)
Weight 140 lbs. (64 kg) 185 lbs. (84 kg) 305 lbs. (138 kg) 76 lbs. (35 kg)
Table 6-1: Distance “C”
DIMENSION C DIMENSION C
(2 or 3 Meter Bridge) (4.4 Meter Bridge)
~ 42” (1,066.8mm) ~ 95” (2,413mm)

GE HEALTHCARE
1. Position the two lifting fixtures on the floor with the distance “C” between lifting fixtures as
specified in Table 6-1, see Fig5-5.
2. Lift and place the bridge on the lifting fixtures as shown in Fig5-5.
Figure 5-5 Lifting Fixture-to-Bridge Positions
ITEM DESCRIPTION
A Bridge
B Lifting Fixture crank handle to the outside
C C dimension is between bearing cover and side plate
3. Position the bridge on the lifting fixtures so that the bridge overhang is equal on both ends of the
bridge as measured from the lifting fixtures to the bridge ends. When lifting the bridge, do not stand
on the inside of the bridge.

GE HEALTHCARE
4. Clamp the bridge rails to the lifting fixtures with clamp blocks on top of the columns and tighten
the clamp block bolts.
Figure 5-6 Positioning Bridge in Lifting Fixtures

GE HEALTHCARE
3.1.3 2 m, 3 m, 4 m Bridge-to-Carriage Placement
1. Raise the bridge by simultaneously turning the crank handle clockwise on each lifting fixture to
keep the bridge as level as possible. If the room configuration is such that it prevents full rotation of
the lifting fixture crank then the handle can be removed and wrench may be used.
2. Raise the bridge a sufficient distance that will allow the shipping crate with OTS carriage
assembly to be positioned under the bridge.
3. Align the dolly and carriage mounting holes.
4. Slowly lower the bridge by rotating both crank handles counterclockwise until the bridge rests on
top of the carriage.
5. Apply Loctite 242 or 243 (Blue) to the six (6) 10 mm x 60 mm hex head cap screws. The cap
screws and spring washer(#46-328432p4) can be found in the large zip-lock plastic bag in the
Technical Publications box.
6. Turn in and tighten the six (6) hex head cap screws to 19.4N.m (and lock washers) connecting
the front and rear of the OTS carriage to the dolly. See Fig5-7.
NOTE: Don’t pinch cables. Be extremely careful not to pinch cables between the dolly and the
carriage when tightening the bolts.
Figure 5-7 Mounting OTS Carriage to Dolly
Screws in bag

GE HEALTHCARE
3.2 Lateral Drive Belt Hardware Installation
The following steps are taken to install the lateral drive belt mounting brackets and drive belt.
Figure 5-8 Lateral Position Sensor and Belt Anchor Bracket Locations
1. See Fig 5-8 for assembly directions for the front (fixed) anchor. Loosely assemble the upper belt
clamp (item 1) and the lower belt clamp (item 2) using the four socket head capscrews (item 3).
Figure 5-9 Front Lateral Belt Anchor Assembly Directions

GE HEALTHCARE
Item Qty Part Number Description

1 1 2402780 Stationary Belt Clamp
2 1 2402712 Belt Clamp Plate
3 4 46-328417P5 M4 x 16 Socket Head
Cap Screw (use 3 mm
Allen Wrench)
2. Attach one end of the lateral drive belt to the front belt anchor assembly as shown in Fig6-11 and
tighten the four socket head cap-screws.
3. Attach the front belt anchor assembly to the top of the bridge front end cap (closer to the headend
side of the bridge). See Fig 5-10 and Fig 5-11.
Figure 5-10 Front Lateral Belt Anchor Assembly Directions
Figure 5-11 Lateral Drive Belt Anchor on Front of Bridge
Make sure the line line side

shouldbe facing up
point side

GE HEALTHCARE
4. Carefully feed the lateral drive belt through the lateral drive assembly. See Fig5-12.
Figure 5-12 Lateral Drive Belt Engaged
5. See Fig5-13 for assembly directions for the rear (tensioner) assembly. Loosely assemble the
upper belt clamp (item 1) and the lower belt clamp (item 3) using a 3 mm allen wrench, tighten the
four socket head capscrews (item 4). DO NOT OVER TIGHTEN.
Figure 5-13 Rear Lateral Belt Tensioner Assembly

GE HEALTHCARE
6. Attach the belt tensioner bracket (item 1) to the top of the bridge rear end-cap (item 3) withfour
bolts (item 2) per FIg 5-14.
7. Attach the belt to the belt tensioner assembly per Fig5-15.
8. Place the belt clamp assembly on the tensioner bracket per Fig5-15.
9. Install the tension adjustment bolt through the rear of the belt tensioner bracket, through the
locknut and into the belt clamp assembly. See Fig5-15.
10. The lateral drive belt tensioner adjustment will be performed after the bridge has been lifted and
installed into the stationary rails.

GE HEALTHCARE
3.3 Bridge Stiffener Plate Installation
1. Using a 3/16 inch Allen wrench, attach the stiffener plate to the top of the bridge (16 bolts and
lock washers). The small notch in the stiffener plate should be positioned at the foot-end of the rear
bridge cross-tie. See Fig5-16 and Fig6-17.
Figure 5-16 Attach Stiffener Plate to Bridge
ITEM DESCRIPTION
1 Notch
2 Rear of Room
3 Carriage locking bolt. Keep this bolt installed until the bridge has been
mounted in the stationary rails.
Figure 5-17 Attach Stiffener Plate to Bridge

GE HEALTHCARE
3.4 Longitudinal Drive Installation
1. Before raising the OTS/bridge assembly with the lifting fixtures, make sure that the carriage
locking bolt is still installed as shown in Fig5-18.
Figure 5-18 OTS Carriage Locking Bolt
2. Raise the bridge until the weight of the OTS is slightly resting on the OTS shipping crate.
3. Inspect the longitudinal drive mounting studs on the inside of the bridge rail. If a gap is present,
tighten the studs. See Fig6-19.
Figure 5-19 Bridge Longitudinal Drive Mounting Studs

GE HEALTHCARE
4. From both sides of the OTS, remove the red OTS shipping brackets. See Fig5-20.
Figure 5-20 Remove OTS Shipping Brackets
5. Raise the bridge until it is approximately 3 inches above the OTS shipping crate.
6. Mount the longitudinal drive assembly to the top of the bridge, over the two 1/4" studs on the top
surface of the foot-end rail. See Fig5-21 and Fig5-22.
Figure 5-21 Longitudinal Drive Assembly

GE HEALTHCARE
7. Make sure that the longitudinal drive assembly is mounted tightly against the side of the bridge
rail, then secure the assembly to the bridge using two washers and locking nuts on the top and one
washer and bolt on the side. Tighten the side bolt first, then tighten the two top nuts. See Fig5-22.
Figure 5-22 Longitudinal Drive Assembly
3.5 Remove Front Bridge Cross-tie

1. Mark current position of front bridge crosstie.
2. Completely remove all eight bolts from the front bridge crosstie.
3. Remove the front bridge tie. See Fig5-23
Figure 5-23 OTS Bridge Installation

GE HEALTHCARE
3.5.1 2 m, 3 m and 4 m Bridge-to-Stationary Rails
1. Slowly raise the bridge by turning both crank handles clockwise on each lifting fixture to keep the
bridge as level as possible. The bridge must be raised to a sufficient height that will allow the rear
bridge tie bearings to clear the front lip of the stationary rail and be lowered into the stationary rail
running groove.
2. Carefully position the bridge so that the bearings of the rear cross-tie are placed into the rear
stationary rail.
NOTE: Two of these bearings are now made of a plastic material and more caution is
required to prevent damage to these bearings.
NOTE: Care should be taken as to not drop or lower the bridge at a fast pace that will damage
the bearings.
3. Lower the bridge until the rear cross-tie roller bearings contact the wear strip in the rear stationary
rail.
4. Once the rear bearings are in place, the front bridge cross-tie can be re-assembled back on the
bridge.
5. Set the front cross-tie gap to center the bearings on the wear strips and tighten the eight screws
securing the front cross-tie to the bridge with the torque is 24 Nm and Loctite 242 or 243 also needs
to be
applied. See Fig5-24.
Figure 5-24 Centering Front Cross-Tie
Figure 5-25 Tighten Eight Screws
Apply Loctite 242 or 243

Torque 24 Nm

GE HEALTHCARE
6. Unbolt the lifting fixtures from the bridge rails and lower the lifting fixtures to the floor.
NOTE: The lifting fixtures can be lowered independently.
7. Disconnect the lifting fixtures from the stationary rails.
8. Adjust the upper bearings on both cross-ties by turning the screws clockwise until the bearings
just touch the stationary rail, then back off 1/8 turn (for 0.02" gap between the tops of the bearings
and the upper part of the rails). The adjustment is made with a 3/16" Allen wrench from the bottom
of the cross-tie. See Fig5-25.
Figure 5-26 Cross-Tie Bearing Adjustment
NOTE: Potential for mis-alignment.

Be sure the bearings ride on the center of the wear strips over the complete range of OTS
longitudinal travel. If the bearings travel off of center, the stationary rails and cross-tie alignment
must be checked.
3.5.2 Remove Shipping Hardware From OTS

1. Using an 8 mm Allen wrench, remove the column shipping rod from the rear of the OTS. See
Fig5-26. Keep the column shipping rod with the system for future use. DO NOT DISCARD.
Use caution after removing the column shipping rod. If the OTS is not correctly counter-balanced,
the column may drift upward after being pulled down and released
Figure 5-27 OTS Column Shipping Rod

GE HEALTHCARE
3.6 Install the Lateral Cable Drape Hardware
1. Using a 5 mm Allen wrench, mount the lateral cable drape bracket to the OTS carriage.
See Fig5-27. The lateral cable drape bracket is located in the OTS cable drape box.
Figure 5-28 Lateral Cable Drape Bracket on Carriage
2. Use 8 screws to install the lateral cable drape channel. See Fig5-28. The channel should be
mounted flush with the OUTSIDE edge of the bridge rail.
Figure 5-29 Installing the Lateral Cable Drape Channel
3. At the front end of the cable drape channel, install a self-tapping screw through the side of the
channel. See Fig 5-28.

GE HEALTHCARE
4. Slide three cable drape hooks into the lateral cable drape channel from the rear of the
channel.See Fig5-29.
Figure 5-30 Cable Drape Hooks
3.7 Install OTS Cable Drape

1. Unpack the OTS cable drape.
2. Using an 8 mm Allen wrench, remove the carriage locking bolt, then install the plastic plug
buttons into the carriage locking bolt access holes on each side of the bridge (1 or 2 buttons each
side). Keep the carriage locking bolt with the system for future use. DO NOT DISCARD.
3. Manually position the OTS all the way to the front of the bridge.
4. Connect the OTS cable drape to the cable drape bracket. See Fig5-30.

GE HEALTHCARE
Figure 5-31 Lateral Cable Drape Installed
Attachment Attachment Type 2/3 meter Bridge Length 4.4 meter Bridge Length
Point
1 Anchor to bracket with tie Loop 1 1000 mm (40”) Loop 1 1422 mm (56")
wrap
2 Attach to Trolley Hook Loop 2 1000 mm (40”) Loop 2 1549 mm (61")
with tie wrap
3 Attach to Trolley Hook Loop 3 1270 mm (50”) Loop 3 1422 mm( 56")
with tie wrap
4 Anchor to rear corner of
bridge with tie wrap
5. Attach the remaining OTS cable drape to the bridge using the 3 cable drape hooks with cable ties.
○ The front loop (between points 1-2) needs to be shorter than the back loop (3-4).
○ The front loop should be as short as possible (recommended lengths shown below). Best
case would be that the cable loop on the X-ray tube does not hit the front loop on the bridge at
max SID (height) during tube angulations.

GE HEALTHCARE
○ See Fig5-31 for recommendations for true cable drape length between anchor/ hook points
on 3m bridge with OTS full-forward.
Figure 5-32 Attach Cable Drape to Bracket
Cable drape cover material

butts up against the cable rpe bracket
NOTE: Tie wraps at points 2 and 3 should be tight enough so that the cable drape cannot
come off the hook.
6. Position the OTS toward the front of the bridge. Attach the remaining portion of the OTS cable
drape to the cable drape hooks (on the auxiliary support channel) using cables ties, evenly
spaced. See Fig5-32.
NOTE: The cable drape should be neat and organized. It should not be ’coiled’ and should move
freely from front to rear without binding or bunching up. See Fig5-32.
Figure 5-33 Desired Cable Drape Appearance

GE HEALTHCARE
3.8 OTS Carriage Cable Connections
1. Connect the following cables to the OTS:
○ A12J1, J2 Stator, Fan & Pressure Switch (see Fig5-33)
○ A12J3, J4 Grounds (see Fig5-33)
Figure 5-34 Connecting Stator, Fan/Pressure & Ground Cables
2. Connect the following cable to the OTS:

- B1 J2 OTS CAN (see Fig5-34)
Figure 5-35 TSL Assembly Connections

GE HEALTHCARE
TSL CONNECTOR DESCRIPTION

B1J2 System CAN
B1J3 Not Used
B1J4 Collimator/UIF CAN
B1J5 Angulation Power and I/O
B1J10 Not Used
B1J11 Cyclops Board
B1J12 Angulation CAN with Power

- A7 J5 OTS Power 120VAC (see Fig5-35)
Figure 5-36 Connecting OTS Power Cable
4. Attach the knurled tightening rings to the high voltage cables. See Fig 5-36.
5. Connect the following cables to the OTS:
○ A12 Anode HV Cable (see Fig 5-36, Fig 5-37), apply silicone oil to the sleeve and pins. (GE
Part Number: LNR8733, 1 ounce tube)

GE HEALTHCARE
○ A12 Cathode HV Cable (see Illustration 6-36, Illustration 6-37), apply silicone oil to the
sleeve and pins. (GE Part Number: LNR8733, 1 ounce tube)
Figure 5-37 Lubrication of HV Cable Connectors with Silicone Oil
Figure 5-38 Connecting High Voltage Cables
Anode
Cathode Anode

GE HEALTHCARE
- B1 J7 Longitudinal Drive (see Fig5-38)
Figure 5-39 Connecting Longitudinal Drive Cable
7. Check all OTS cable connections, including factory installed cables, to confirm that they are
securely fastened.
8. Use Cable Ties to position OTS cables together to keep them from rubbing against the
counterpoise and Black Cable Track. See Fig5-38.

GE HEALTHCARE
3.9 Bridge Anti-Backlash Assemblies
NOTE: The anti-backlash adjustment must be performed before the longitudinal drive belt
alignment and longitudinal drive belt tensioning.
Purpose of Anti-Backlash Assembly: The purpose of applying a specific amount of force (via the
anti-backlash assemblies) is to react against forces produced when the OTS is accelerating in a
longitudinal direction during auto-positioning or tomo sweeps.
The force applied by the anti backlash assemblies cannot be too high or the bridge bearings may
be damaged (the bearings on the rear of the bridge are very difficult to replace).
These plastic bearings were introduced so that the bearing material does not wear on the aluminum
stationary rails like steel bearings would.
High applied force will also increase moving efforts in the longitudinal direction.
1. Using a 3/16 in. Allen wrench, install two anti-backlash assemblies to the top of the bridge rails,
behind the rear stationary rail, using two Allen-head bolts, washers and lock-washers on each
assembly. See Fig5-39.
Figure 5-40 Anti-Backlash Assembly Locations
2. Initial adjustment of backlash tension:

a. Adjust the head-end tensioning bolt clockwise (finger tight only) until the bearing just
touches the rear surface of the stationary rail.
b. Adjust the foot-end tensioning bolt clockwise (finger tight only) until the bearing just touches
the rear surface of the stationary rail.
3. Place a mark on the tensioning bolts so that adjustment revolutions of the bolts can be counted.
4. Turn the tensioning bolts 2 1/2 turns clockwise.
5. Run the bridge back and forth 1 - 2 meters (3 - 6 feet) several times to finish drawing the bridge
up to the rear stationary rail. This produces the proper spring force of 50 lb-f or 225N. Make sure
each bolt has equal turns so that the bridge is perpendicular to the stationary rails.
Unequal force could result in the bridge being at an angle.

GE HEALTHCARE
6. Apply Loctite 242 or 243(Blue) to the cover mounting screws. Use 2 mm Allen wrench to install
the
anti-backlash assembly covers. See Fig5-40.
Figure 5-41 Anti-Backlash Assembly Covers

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 4.0 Longitudinal Drive Belt Assembly

4.1 Longitudinal Belt Installation
1. Route the belt through longitudinal drive assembly; over the top idler, under the drive pulley
and back out over the top other idler. See Fig5-41.
Figure 5-42 Longitudinal Drive Belt Installation
2. Verify that the longitudinal drive assembly is installed flush against the rail.
a. There should be no gap between the longitudinal drive and the bridge rail surface. See
Fig 5-42.
b. If a gap exists, loosen the screws and push the longitudinal drive flush against the rail. While
holding the drive in position, tighten the side bolt first and then the nuts on the top.

GE HEALTHCARE
Figure 5-43 Bad and Good Longitudinal Drive Alignment
3. Attach the belt.

a. At the tensioning (head) end of the longitudinal rail, install the belt. See Fig5-43.
i. Using a 3/16" Allen wrench, remove the four (M6 Hex Socket) belt clamp screws.
Figure 5-44 Tensioning Clamp
Food End
Head End

GE HEALTHCARE
ii. Create belt tension adjustment range; turn the tension adjustment screw
counterclockwise until the belt clamp slightly overhangs the plate by ½ of a tooth.“We
want the tensioning belt clamp as far out as possible, so you have the most tension range.
As you turn the adjustment screw, the belt clamp plate will move in (clockwise) or out
(counterclockwise).” See Fig5-44.
Figure 5-45 Tensioning Belt Clamp Setup
iii. Pull out the slack in the belt and position it parallel to the belt clamp. "We want the belt
pulled tight so that it is captured by seven teeth of the belt clamp."
iv. Make marks (using a marker) on the belt so that it can be placed in the same position
after you cut the belt to length. See Fig5-45.
Figure 5-46 Marking Belt Position in Clamp
■ Place a mark on the belt where it will be cut off and still be captured by seven clamp
teeth. “The belt clamp must capture seven teeth of the belt after you cut off the excess
length.”
■ Place a mark on the belt where it enters the belt clamp. “This mark serves as
additional reference point. It helps to ensure that you will capture the proper amount
of belt teeth in the clamp. The mark should be visible when the clamp is secured.”

GE HEALTHCARE
v. Cut the belt off at the "cut-off" mark you’ve made. See Fig5-46.
Figure 5-47 Belt Markings
vi. Place the cut-off end of the belt into the tensioner belt clamp and secure the belt clamp
screws by turning them clockwise. “Use the marks you made on the belt to position the belt.”
See Fig5-47.
Figure 5-48 Tensioning Belt Clamp
vii. Using an 8 mm or 3/16 in. Allen wrench, tighten the two screws that secure the tensioner
plate to the rail. See Fig5-48.
Figure 5-49 Tensioner Plate Mounting Screws

GE HEALTHCARE
4.2 Longitudinal Belt Tensioning
NOTE: Tensioning Line - The tensioning line may be provided with the longitudinal belt kit. If the
tensioning line is not provided with the kit, use a mono-filament “fishing line" (8 pound test, 0.25 mm)
or equivalent to measure belt deflection.
It's important that the line you choose has a small mass. A high mass causes the line to sag in the
middle and your resulting tension will be wrong.
1. If not already present, place one end of the tensioning line into the anchor end belt clamp and
position it towards the middle on the tooth side of the belt. We want the belt clamp to capture both
the belt and the line when the clamp is secured.
2. Now place the belt between the clamp and the plate along with the tension line. The clamp must
capture seven (minimum) teeth on the belt when properly installed.
3. With the belt and tensioning line in the belt clamp, torque the belt clamp (M6 Hex Socket) screws
to 9.9 Nm (7.3 lbs-ft).
Figure 5-50 Anchor Plate Assembly (Foot End)
4. Tighten the two (M10 Hex Socket) plate screws that secure the anchor plate to the rail.
5. Loosen each of the plate screws that secure the anchor plate by one turn counterclockwise.
We want the tension plate to be slightly loose so it can move during our tracking adjustment.
6. Move the bridge longitudinally until it is two meters from the anchor end belt clamp, as measured
from a tangent point on top of the idler pulley to the point where the tension line exits the anchor
end belt clamp. See Fig5-50.
Figure 5-51 Belt Tension Setup
d = 6mm

GE HEALTHCARE
7. Using clamping devices (i.e. locking pliers, C-clamps, etc.), secure the bridge to the stationary
rail to prevent it from moving.
8. Set up the tension line.
a. Loop the tension line over the idler and down the middle of the belt.
b. While maintaining this position, pull the line tight. The line should make a well-defined sound
(pitch) if pulled and released.
c. Secure the line to prevent loss of tension.
d. Place a mark on the belt that is one meter from where the tension line exits the anchor end
belt clamp.
e. Using a ruler, measure the distance from the tension line to the belt teeth immediately above
the 1-meter marking.
f. The distance (d) between the tension line and the belt at this point should be 6 millimeters
(+/- 1 millimeter). Set the tension at the tensioner (head) end of the stationary rail to achieve
this.
i. Using a 10 mm Allen wrench, turn the tension screw (located on the head end tension
assembly) until 5 or 6 millimeters of deflection is achieved.
■ Clockwise to increase tension.
■ Counterclockwise to decrease tension.
ii. Torque the belt clamp (M6 Hex Socket) screws to 9.9 Nm (7.3 lbs-ft) each.
9. Remove any clamps used to hold the bridge stationary.
10. Do not remove the tension line from the anchor clamp. Store the excess line and secure it to
the top of the rail out of sight for future use.

GE HEALTHCARE
4.3 Longitudinal Belt Tracking
1. Move the bridge back and forth between the head and foot ends of the stationary rails several
times.
Figure 5-52 Belt Tracking at the Longitudinal Drive
2. Move the bridge to the head end of the stationary rails. Adjust the head-end belt tensioner
assembly side-to-side to center the belt in the longitudinal drive pulley. See Fig5-51.
- At the head end, hold the tension plate so the plate doesn’t move, while you torque the (M10 Hex
Socket) screws to 48 Nm (35.4 lbs-ft).
3. Move the bridge to the foot end of the stationary rails. Adjust the foot-end belt anchor plate
assembly side-to-side to center the belt in the longitudinal drive pulley.
- At the foot end, hold the anchor plate so the plate doesn’t move, while you torque the (M10 Hex
Socket) screws to 48 Nm (35.4 lbs-ft).
4. Move the bridge back and forth between the head and foot end several times and recheck belt
alignment. Re-adjust if necessary.
5. Finally, verify that the belt does not rub "excessively" against the metal flange of the drive
pulley at any point along its entire longitudinal travel.
It is normal for the belt to move (walk) a little from side to side on the drive pulley. It is not normal
to have excessive contact with the drive pulley flange, which can later result in “squeaking” noises
as the bridge is moved longitudinally.
○ If the belt occasionally touches the metal flange on the drive pulley – tracking is good.
○ If the belt constantly touches the metal flanges or drives hard into the drive pulley metal
flange or makes any noise during tracking – tracking is bad and should be adjusted.
6. Install tensioner assembly cover plate.
a. Apply a small amount of non-permanent thread locker, such as Loctite 242 or 243(Blue), to
screw (M6 Hex Socket) threads.
b. Torque screws 9.9 Nm (7.3 lbs-ft).

GE HEALTHCARE
4.4 Longitudinal Drive Assembly Wiring
1. Route the longitudinal drive cable and ground cable through the cable trough (located on
footend bridge rail) and connect it to the longitudinal drive assembly per Fig5-52 and Fig 5-53.
Figure 5-53 Routing the Longitudinal Assembly Cable and Ground
Figure 5-54 Connecting the Longitudinal Assembly Drive Cable
2. Apply Loctite 242 or 243(Blue) to the mounting screws and attach the cover to the longitudinal
drive assembly.

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 5.0 Lateral Drive Belt Tensioning and Alignment

1. Position the OTS to the front of the bridge.
2. Loosen the locknut on the rear lateral belt anchor assembly. See Fig5-54.
Figure 5-55 Rear Lateral Belt Anchor Assembly
3. Adjust the belt tensioning bolt (clockwise) just to the point where you can no longer see any
change in the lateral belt sag, then tighten the tensioning bolt an additional 1 1/4 turns
clockwise.
4. Tighten the locknut.
5. Adjust front and rear brackets for proper side-to-side alignment of the lateral drive belt as
follows:
a. Position the OTS carriage to the front of the bridge.
b. Adjust the front bracket longitudinally so that the belt is centered where it enters the drive
pulley.
c. Tighten the capscrews when adjustment is completed.
d. Position the OTS carriage to the rear of the bridge.
e. Adjust the rear bracket longitudinally so that the belt is centered where it enters the drive
pulley.
f. Tighten the capscrews when adjustment is completed.
6. Move the OTS carriage back and forth between the front and rear of the bridge several times and
recheck belt alignment. Re-adjust if necessary.

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 6.0 X-Ray Tube Covers

1. Position the X-ray tube to a comfortable working height and lock the OTS counterpoise in place.
See Fig5-55.
Figure 5-56 Counterpoise Locking Bolt
2. Place the tube/fan cover in position on the X-ray tube and connect the tube select lamp wires
to terminals 4 and 5 on the X-ray tube terminal strip. See Fig5-56 and Fig5-56b.
Figure 5-57 Tube Select Lamp Wiring
X-ray Tube Stator & Fan/Interlock Connections

GE HEALTHCARE
FIgure5-56b:Stator Cable Connections
OTS X-RAY TUBE
OTS BULKHEAD A12 TB1 X-RAY TUBE TERMINAL STRIP
1 (Connector A) MAIN T2 TB1- 8

(BLK) BLK STATOR
DANGER
POTENTIAL FOR 2 (Connector A) AUX T2 TB1- 7
ELECTRICAL SHOCK. (GRN) GRN
INNER SHIELD CARRIES
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES STATOR COMMON TB1- 6
3 (Connector A)
WHEN GENERATOR IS (WHT) WHT
POWERED.
5 (Connector A) INNER SHIELD - 230VDC BUS
(BRN)
OUTER SHIELD GRN/YEL

6 (Connector A)
GND (Tube casing)
FAN T2 A TB1- 5
1 (Connector B)
(BLK) BLU
GREEN FAN
PILOT BLK BLK BLU
2 (Connector B) FAN T2 B LIGHT
(RED) TB1- 4
THERMOSWITCH**
BLK S1 BLK
PVALVE T2 A TB1- 2
4 (Connector B)
(GRN)
N.C. C.
Pressure SW
3 (Connector B) PVALVE T2 B TB1- 1
(WHT)
5 (Connector B) OUTER SHIELD

GND (Tube casing)
OTS BULKHEAD GROUND

(GRN/YEL) GND (Tube casing)
FOR TUBES WITH 8 POSITION STRIP

Note: Check wiring of tube and change as
necessary to make it look like above diagram.
** Used on tubes with 2 speed fans.
Note: The Maxi-100 tube manual please Refer to Direction 46-014427

GE HEALTHCARE
Figure 5-58 Install Tube/Fan Cover and Cable Entrance Cover
3. Use 3.5 mm (9/64 inch) Allen wrench to attach the tube/fan cover and cable entrance cover to
the tube unit. See Fig5-58 and Fig5-59.
NOTE: For detailed X-ray tube stator cable connections, refer to the Discovery XR656 System
Schematics and Drawings manual, 5343954-1EN, MIS Chart 020013.
Figure 5-59 Tube Cables Routing
4. Use 4mm Allen wrench to attach fan grill. See Fig5-59.

Figure 5-60 Install Fan Grill

GE HEALTHCARE
5. Use 3.5 mm (9/64 inch) Allen wrench to attach plastic end caps to anode and cathode end of X-
ray tube using 6 cap screws. See Fig5-60. Install each end cap so that the GE logo is correctly
oriented when the X-ray tube is in the standard (non-rotated) position.
Figure 5-61 Install X-ray Tube End caps
6. Leave the OTS counterpoise locking bolt in place for the collimator installation procedure.

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 7.0 Collimator

7.1 Unpacking
• Remove all additional papers which are attached to the packaging and keep them with the
system documents.
• Remove the transportation safeguard of the focal blades (two resp. three red screws).
• Remove the protective cover before installation and check the adjustment of the focal blades.
• Use the adjustment gauge (part no.: 0468769 G052G or part no.: 7736791 for off focal blades
in two directions) supplied with the collimator.
• The off focal blades should have a distance of 0.0 mm up to 1.0 mm to the angle of the
adjustment gauge, when the rectangular blades are straightened into the closed end position
by hand.
• If, due to deviations of the focus within the tube unit, the off focal blades should extend into the
path of rays, the particular leaf has to be bent outwards carefully.
Note: Keep the cover on the input window until the final installation of the collimator on the tube
to protect the focal blades against damage.
7.2 Installation
1.) Carefully rotate the tube assembly 180 degrees (pointing up). See Figure 5-62.
In order to meet the mounting integrity requirement, the following steps below must be performed
during installation procedure
• Re-install the outer ring, the alignment pins only allow mounting in the proper orientation.
a.) Visually center the outer ring in the front to back direction.
b.) Apply loctite 222 to the four hex head screws and torque the screws to 26in-lbs (2.9Nm)
• Re-install the inner ring
a.) Torque the Flat head screws (4x) to 38in-lbs (4.3Nm)

GE HEALTHCARE
Figure 5-62 Tube Pointing Up With Collimator Removed
Turn the tube motor
Apply Loctite 222 Apply Loctite 222

Torque to 2.9Nm Torque to 5Nm
Note: The collimator is designed for a focus to flange distance of 80mm. Please refer to
specifications below, showing the mechanical interface (SIEMENS tube flange, part no.:
8440786 X1122).
7.2.1 Installing the Collimator
Note: The mounting means of the unit supporting this product, must be able to support a load of
24 kg (7 kg accessories included).

GE HEALTHCARE
7.2.2 Setting Up the Collimator
For attaching the collimator to the tube flange, the three screws (1) with a distance of 120° on the
tube flange are to be used.
7.2.3 Fastening instructions for collimator with rotating flange

Note: Collimators with a rotating flange are delivered ex-factory with a lightly greased flange.
• Place the collimator on the tube unit flange, insert the screws and tighten them slightly. Then
tighten one of the 3 screws (1) so the collimator just can no longer be turned
Note: Carefully place the collimator on the tube unit. The collimator blades are extremely sensitive
and can be damaged very easily.
• Hook a spring balance (100N) (2) to the lever of the rotating flange.
• Loosen the screw again so that the collimator is able to turn if a force of 20 –30 N is applied to
the spring balance. Tighten one of the other two screws to 40 – 50 N as described previously
and tighten the 3rd screw to 60 – 70 N using the spring balance.
• Being careful not to damage the collimator fingers, position the collimator on the X-ray tube.
See Fig5-62.

GE HEALTHCARE
• Be sure the detent lever is not preventing the collimator from seating fully.
Figure 5-63 Collimator Mounting
1.) Screws fastening the collimator to the tube assembly come loose.
2.) Risk of injury due to falling collimator.
3.) Follow the fastening instructions for the collimator and mount the collimator backlash-
free.
7.3 Cable Connections & Routing
1. Position "Tee" cable over new bracket holes. See Fig5-63.

Figure 5-64 Cable Routing Top View
2. Use the 4 mm hardware to secure the "Tee" shaped cable to the bracket:
a. Flat washer on top of cable.
b. Flat washer and nut on underside of bracket.
c. Apply a drop of Loctite 242 or 243 to each cap screw.
* Torque to 20.4 lbf-in (2.3 N-m).

GE HEALTHCARE
3. Remove slack and store further up the cable drape. See Fig5-64.
Figure 5-65 Cable Routing Side View
4. Route cable behind the cathode tube well and above the bracket. See Fig5-65 and Fig 5-66.
NOTE: Do not use the clamp shipped with the collimator. Re-use the existing clamp as it is
designed to secure two (2) cables.
5. Route cables to rear of collimator and make side connection. Install cable clamp as shown in
Fig5-65. Torque to 20.4 lbf-in (2.3 N-m).
Figure 5-66 Cable Routing Side Clamped Entry
NOTE: The rear cover has two cable cutouts. For the Discovery XR656 the cables enter the left
side of the cover. Make sure the unused cable cutout has the plug installed.

GE HEALTHCARE
6. Install rear cover and ensure cables are not pinched. See Fig5-66.
Figure 5-67 Rear Cover Installed
7. Install cable ties to dress and secure cables.

8. Install cable drape sleeves.
9. Rotate collimator through its full range of motion. Ensure cables are not snagged, pinched, or
pulled in any way that might cause damage.
10. Leave the OTS counterpoise locking bolt in place for the UIF installation procedure.

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 8.0
User Interface (UIF)
In order to ensure meeting the security requirement, below steps must be performed while
installation and FRU replacement,
1.) Apply the Loctite 242 or 243 on the threads of the installed bolts
2.) Torque the bolts to 9.9 N-m (7.3 lbs-ft) each with torque wrench.
1.) Re-install OTS console to mounting plate with 4 bolts, and install the OTS console to the tube/
collimator interface plate with two screws. Daub the Loctite 242 or 243 glue on all of the 6 bolts.
Torque all of the 6 bolts to 9.9 N-m (7.3 lbs-ft) each with torque wrench.See Figure 5-67.
Figure 5-68 UIF Installation
Fix Screws
2.) Connect the cable to the UIF. See Fig5-68.

Figure 5-69 UIF Cable Connection
Page 130 Section 8.0 - User Interface (UIF)

GE HEALTHCARE
3.) Remove the OTS counterpoise locking bolt. See Fig5-69.
Figure 5-70 Counterpoise Locking Bolt

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 9.0 OTS Counterpoise Adjustment

9.1 Final Counterpoise Adjustment
1. Shut down the system, then turn off system power.
2. Position the vertical column so that it is in the middle of the vertical range of travel.
3. If the vertical column tends to drift upward or downward when released, adjust the counterpoise
tensioning bolt to eliminate drift (clockwise rotation results in more lift). See Fig5-72.
Throughout the range of vertical column travel, the tube/collimator should not drift downward.
Figure 5-71 OTS Counterpoise Tensioning Bolt
4. Move the vertical column through the complete range of vertical travel. Check for drift at the top
and bottom limits of travel and adjust the counterpoise tensioning bolt to equalize the amount of
drift.
Page 132 Section 8.0 - User Interface (UIF)

GE HEALTHCARE
Chapter 6 Cables
Section 1.0 Summary Checklist

• Pull all MIS cables between sub-systems
• Connect MIS cables to (installed) sub-systems
• EMC Compliance
Section 2.0 Routing
Potential for Equipment Damage: The Ethernet Cable is extremely fragile. Avoid stepping on
the cable.
• If excess cables must be coiled and stored, they must be coiled in a “figure 8" configuration
to prevent induced currents and signal noise, NOT in a single coil stack.
• Power cables must be kept separate from signal cables as much as possible. In wall ducts or
raceway, power cables should be routed in a separate channel from signal cables. Inside the
System Cabinet, power cables should not be bundled together with signal cables.
Section 3.0 System Cables

NOTE: Refer to the following document for details on system cabling: 5343954-1EN,
DiscoveryXR656 - System Schematics and Drawings (this document contains the MIS Map).
1. Perform routing and connection of system, power and ground cables.
2. All MIS cables connecting to the Magic PC will pass through the wallbox (installed by electrical
contractor) and wall box (supplied by GE with set of MIS cables, installed on the wallbox).
See Fig6-1 and Fig6-2.
NOTE: The Table and Wallstand ethernet cables can be pulled directly to the Control Room without
having to pass through the System Cabinet (if an alternate path exists).
NOTE: The Table and Wallstand ethernet cables must not be modified.
Chapter 6 - Cables Page 133

GE HEALTHCARE
Figure 6-1 Magic PC Wall box (Front)
Figure 6-2 Magic PC Wall box (Rear)
Page 134 Section 3.0 - System Cables

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 4.0 EMC Compliance

4.1 Grounding P-Clamps
For EMC compliance, several cables require additional grounding through the use of P-clamps
connected to the cable shields. It is important that these P-clamps connections are made properly
in order to provide the necessary electrical ground. When more than one P-clamp must be attached
at the same mounting location, see Fig6-3 and Fig6-4 for correct orientation of the P-clamps. .
Figure 6-3 Correct Installation of Multiple P-Clamps
Figure 6-4 Incorrect Installation of Multiple P-Clamps
Chapter 6 - Cables Page 135

GE HEALTHCARE
Page 136 Section 3.0 - System Cables

GE HEALTHCARE
Chapter 7 System Cabinet
Risk of minor injury from low voltage.

The power for the X-ray On warning light circuit is provided by the customer.
Therefore, these wires may already have 24VAC present during installation.
Use caution that you do not touch the conductors or allow them to come in contact
with any system cabinet components or ground.
• Position cabinet near mounting position

• Pull MIS cables into cabinet
• Mount cabinet to wall/floor
• Connect MIS cables to cabinet
• Connect P-clamps to cabinet cables
• Connect cabinet to wiring for door interlock and room warning light
Chapter 7 - System Cabinet Page 137

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 2.0 Unpack Cabinet

Remove the packing box and remove the all of the packing materials See Fig7-1
Figure 7-1 remove packing materials
Raised the four support legs up, and make sure the four foot wheels are touched to the
package bottom wood plate, and then move the cabinet to the ground through the wood
ramp. See Fig7-2.
Figure 7-2 Raise the four support legs up
Page 138 Section 2.0 - Unpack Cabinet

GE HEALTHCARE
Carefully guide the wheel down the wooden ramp until the cabinet has reached the floor.See Fig7-3
Figure 7-3
NOTE: The cabinet can pass up a maximum slope of 10 degrees and pass over a maximum
barrier on the floor of 25mm (0.98 in).

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 3.0 System Cabinet Installation

3.1 Tools and Parts
Items required:
Standard Service Tools
Parts:
• Wall mounting bracket (supplied with cabinet).
• Customer or contractor supplied wall and floor anchoring devices that meet local requirements
(seismic, etc.).
• Customer or contractor supplied wiring/cable conduits, fittings, etc.
Initial Conditions:
Before installation work begins, the site should be checked to verify the correctness of junction box
sizes, their locations, the number and sizes of interconnecting wiring and proper power availability
in the room. In addition, cabinet mounting methods should already be determined prior to cabinet
installation (customer supplied attaching devices). Refer to Direction 5343949-8EN
Discovery XR656 Pre-Installation.
3.2 Procedure
1. Unbolt the wall mount bracket from the top of the System Cabinet. If the cabinet will be mounted
flush to the wall, then the wall mount bracket should be bolted flush to the rear of the cabinet
as shown in Illustration 8-1. If the cabinet cannot be mounted flush to the wall due to an
obstruction (such as wall-mounted duct-work or raceway), then the wall mount bracket should
be bolted to the cabinet in the extended position by using the other set of mounting holes.
2. The System Cabinet will be shipped attached to shipping dollies. Position the cabinet (while
on the dollies) according to your room plan.
3. Route the system cabinet MIS cables through the cable access opening (rear, bottom or side) of
the cabinet. Lower the cabinet until contact is made with the floor.
4. Remove the front dolly retaining cables and open the front cabinet door.
5. Complete this step if required by local regulations or job-site requirements:
a. Using the base of the cabinet as a template, mark the front mounting holes on the floor.
b. Re-install the front dolly retaining cables, raise the dolly from the floor, and move the cabinet
from the mounting area. Use care not to damage the MIS cables.
c. Drill mounting holes to fit the required cabinet anchors (3/8" x 2").
d. Re-position the cabinet (on the dollies) over the mounting holes and lower the cabinet to
make contact with the floor. Remove the dollies from the cabinet.
e. Install locally approved floor anchoring devices through the cabinet base into the floor.
Page 140 Section 3.0 - System Cabinet Installation

GE HEALTHCARE
6. Attach the cabinet to the wall with the supplied bracket using locally approved wall anchoring
devices.
Figure 7-4 System Cabinet Mounting Plate (Flush-Mount Position)
7: The shipped cabinet from factory is using the bellowing four hexagon socket button head screws
on the top of the cabinet. If need to lift up the cabinet during the unpacking or installation, please
MAKE SURE THE FLYING RINGS ARE TIGHENED ENOUGH to the cabinet before lifting up
cabinet. See Fig7-5 and Fig7-6. After completing the lifting process, remove the four flying rings and
screw down the four hexagon socket button head screws back to cabinet
Figure 7-5 System Cabinet with hexagon socket button head screws
Figure 7-6 System Cabinet with flying rings

GE HEALTHCARE
8. Connect cables to System Cabinet as shown in Fig7-7 through Fig7-9. Refer

to the system MIS Map (System Schematics and Drawings manual, 5343954-1EN) for details.
a. Bulkhead and ground connections. See Fig7-7 and Fig7-8.

Figure 7-7 System Cabinet Cables - Bulkhead Connections
Figure 7-8 System Cabinet Ground connector position

GE HEALTHCARE
b. High voltage cables:
VIII.)Install knurled ring and brass collar on both HV cables. See Fig7-9.
Figure 7-9 HV Cables - Install Ring and Collar
NOTE: If the HV cable wells do not have the proper amount of transformer oil and none is available,
do NOT install the HV cables. Notify the local Field Engineer that the HV cables have not been
installed.
IX.) Check the HV cable wells to verify that the proper level of transformer oil is present
and fill to a depth 5 mm (0.185 in.) as necessary.
X.) Install HV cables in cable wells and tighten with HV spanner wrench.
Figure 7-10 System Cabinet Cables - High Voltage Cable Connections
XI.) Fix the HV Cable. See Fig7-11.
Figure 7-11 Fix the HV Cable

GE HEALTHCARE
c. PDU room interface connections. See Fig7-12 and Fig7-13.
* Make connections to the PDU for the Door Interlock and X-ray On warning light circuits.
These room interface connections are provided by the TB2 terminal block.
See Fig7-12 and Fig7-13.
Figure 7-12 a: System Cabinet TB2 Connections
POSITION SIGNAL NAME

1 Door Interlock
2 24VDC
3 Rm Light Sw (not used)
4 Rm Light Power - provided by the hospital room (not used)
5 X-ray ON Switch
6 X-ray ON Power (24VAC provided by the hospital room)
7 24VDC (not used)
8 Emergency Off (not used)
Figure 7-12b: System main power cable Connections

GE HEALTHCARE
Figure 7-13 PDU Room Interface Wiring

GE HEALTHCARE
9. Remove the bubble-wrap from around the ferrite beads. Three are located on the back of the
swingout panel (Fig7-14) and the other is located above the JEDI control assembly (Fig7-15).
Figure 7-14 Ferrite Beads on Rear of Swingout Panel
Figure 7-15 Ferrite Bead on JEDI Control Assembly

GE HEALTHCARE
3.3 Finalization
3.3.1 Check all of the cables

1. Check the corona2 all of the cables statu should is well
J18
Note: In corona2 board, J18 is the main power input, J22 is just the hot backup.If the main power
down, the hot backup will continue powering the system from J22, but the system will receive the
24v error report, then know the main power error. Our system only use main power and have no
hot backup(UPS), so it should power the system from J18.
2. Check the Holle cables

GE HEALTHCARE
3. Check JEDI cables
4. Check PDU Cables and Grounding cables

GE HEALTHCARE
Chapter 8 Table

• Unpack table
•
• Perform initial table-to-bridge alignment
•
• Drill table anchor holes
•
• Install detector and ion chamber in table
•
• Level table, re-check alignment to bridge, mount to floor
•
• Adjust table pedal stabilizing screws
•
• Install rear port and power supply
•
• Install chiller
•
• Route and connect table cables and hoses
•
• Fill chiller with coolant
•
• Install table top
Chapter 8 - Table Page 149

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 2.0 Unpack Table

This section will describe the basic steps required to un-crate the table.
1. Remove the top cover and four top cross members from the table shipping crate. See
Illustration 8-1.
Illustration 8-1: Table Crate with Top Removed
2. With the help of another person, remove the table top and store in a safe place.
See Illustration 8-2.
Illustration 8-2: Table Top Removed
3. Remove all packing materials

Illustration 8-3: Remove all packing
Page 150 Section 2.0 - Unpack Table

GE HEALTHCARE
4. Remove the wooden ramp from the shipping crate.
Illustration 8-5: Remove Wooden Ramp
5. Remove the protective covering. See Illustration 8-6.
Illustration 8-6: Removing Protective Covering
6. Remove all braces used to secure the table base and remove 4 screws to mount the table before
table base lift up. See Illustration 8-7.
Illustration 8-7: Removing Braces
7. While holding the manual release lever in the release position, use a hex socket wrench to turn
the hex-head bolt at the end of the vertical drive motor. See Illustration 8-8. Clockwise rotation of
the motor will lift the table base above the surface of the shipping crate.
NOTE: Two people are required to release the table vertical brake and to raise the table.

GE HEALTHCARE
Illustration 8-8: Table Vertical Brake Manual Release
8. Continue turning the motor until the table base is about 1-2 inches (25 - 50 mm) above the
shipping crate. Once you feel increased resistance with turning the motor, then you have reached
the limit of travel; do not continue turning the motor or you may damage the motor assembly.
Illustration 8-9: Table Dolly
9. Position the wooden ramp at the end of the shipping crate. See Illustration 8-10. Carefully guide
the table dolly down the wooden ramp until the table has reached the floor.
Illustration 8-10: Wooden Ramp Placement
10. Move table into room and begin the alignment process. The table dolly casters may be rotate
for better clearance through doorways.
Page 152 Section 2.0 - Unpack Table

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 3.0 Initial Table and Bridge Alignment

The OTS bridge must be installed and able to move longitudinally in the stationary rails.
1. Move the table to the location specified on the plan drawings. Leave the table on the dollies but
lower the table base all the way down to the floor.
2. Remove the detector shipping bracket and remove table shipping 4 brackets. See Illustration 8-
11.
Illustration 8-11: Remove the table shipping Bracket
3. Move the detector housing to the foot (right) end of the table.
4. Hang a plumb bob from the outside of the bridge rail (not carriage) and position it just above the
detector barrier. See Illustration 8-12.
Illustration 8-12: Plumb Bob Attached to Bridge

GE HEALTHCARE
5. Place a piece of masking tape on the detector barrier and directly beneath the plumb bob. See
Illustration 8-13.
Illustration 8-13: Position Plumb Bob Over Tape
6. Mark the position of the plumb bob on the tape. See Illustration 8-14.
Illustration 8-14: Mark Plumb Bob Location
7. Move the detector and bridge longitudinally to the head end. Position the bridge so that the plumb
bob is over the mark made when at the foot end.
8. Carefully move the head end of the table laterally to position it beneath the plumb bop. Try not to
move the foot end of the table.
9. Re-check the alignment at the foot-end and head-end and adjust the table position until the plumb
bob is on the mark at one end of travel and within +/- 2 mm (0.08 in) of the mark at the other end of
travel
Page 154 Section 3.0 - Initial Table and Bridge Alignment

GE HEALTHCARE
10. The table should now be positioned close to the final mounting location. Re-check the table
position to verify it is at the location specified by the site drawings. If necessary re-position and
repeat the initial alignment.

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 4.0 Install Table

NOTE: Anchors require a minimum engagement of 80 mm (3.15 in.) into the concrete. If the floor
thickness is less than 4” it is recommended that the unit should be secured using a through-bolt
method with a reinforcement plate on the back side.
1. Use a center punch or marking pen to mark the location of the 4 mounting holes in the corners
of the table base.
2. Raise the table and move it away from the mounting location.
3. Use a masonry bit and impact drill to drill four (4) 12mm holes for the anchor bolts, M8 X 190 mm
(2400546, supplied).
4. Evacuate the holes of all dust and debris.
5. Remove all construction debris from table mounting location.
6. Make a 1 inch (2.54 cm) circle around each mounting hole. Remove compressible flooring
(linoleum) with a heat gun and razor knife.
7. Reposition the table over the anchor holes.
8. Lower the table to the floor and remove the lifting fixtures.
9. Install the 4 mounting bolts through the centers of the four table base adjusters and into the
anchor holes in the floor. See Illustration 8-15. Do not tighten the mounting bolts until the table
has been leveled.
Illustration 8-15: Table Mounting Bolts
4.1 Final Table-to-Bridge Alignment

NOTE: If the table MIS cables enter from the bottom access cut-out, it is recommended that these
cables be pulled before mounting the table. See Table Cables for details.
A properly levelled and adjusted table will have all 4 levelling adjusters in contact with the floor with
the table frame as close to the floor as possible.
1. Position the detector assembly at the head-end of the table.
Page 156 Section 4.0 - Install Table

GE HEALTHCARE
2. Place an 18 inch level on the top of the detector housing in both longitudinal and lateral directions.
Illustration 8-16: Table Base Leveling: Detector At Head-End
3. Adjust the table base leveling adjusters (See Illustration 8-18) until the table is level in both
longitudinal and lateral directions.
4. Position the detector assembly at the foot-end of the table.
5. Place an 18 inch level on the top of the detector housing in both longitudinal and lateral directions.
Illustration 8-17: Table Base Leveling: Detector At Foot-End
6. Adjust the table base leveling adjusters (See Illustration 8-18) until the table is level in both lateral
and longitudinal directions.
Illustration 8-18: Table Base Leveling Adjusters
7. Tighten the table base leveling adjuster locknuts. See Illustration 8-18.
8. Re-check the alignment at the foot-end and head-end and adjust the table position until the plumb
bob is on the mark at one end of travel and within +/- 2 mm (0.08 in) of the mark at the other
end of travel
9. Torque all 4 anchors to: .
○ 25 N-m (220 in-lbs)
○ OR Local code requirements
10. Remove the table dollies.

GE HEALTHCARE
4.2 Adjust Front and Rear Pedal Stablizing Screws
1. On the front pedal assembly, remove the 3 flat-head screws to access the pedal stabilizing Allen
screws. See Illustration 8-19.
Illustration 8-19: Pedal Stabilizing Screws
2. Adjust the Allen stabilizing screws until they just touch the floor.
3. Re-install the 3 flat-head screws.
4. Repeat the above steps for the rear pedal assembly.
4.3 Table ION Chamber/Detector Installation

1. Remove 4 large Phillips screws from the head and foot end of the grid frame to separate the
frame from the guide blocks.
Illustration 8-20: Screws on Grid Frame Guide Blocks

GE HEALTHCARE
2. Remove the 2 Phillips screws from the Head end grid guide block.
Illustration 8-21: Grid Guide Blocks
3. Remove the grid frame through the front of the table.
Illustration 8-22: Removing the Grid Frame
4. Remove ION Chamber frame by removing 4 screws and remove mylar.
Illustration 8-23: ION Chamber Frame Screw Location

GE HEALTHCARE
5. Fasten the rear grid frame slide blocks to the detector housing with tape (to prevent the blocks
and internal teflon glides from falling out).
Illustration 8-24: Grid Frame Slide Blocks Taped Down
6. Remove the two Phillips screws (Illustration 8-25) to remove the bracket.
Illustration 8-25: Foot-End Pre-Amp Bracket Screws
7. Attach the bracket to the pre-amp using the supplied screw as shown in Illustration 8-26.
Illustration 8-26: Foot-End Bracket Attached to Pre-Amp

GE HEALTHCARE
8. Install pre-amp as shown in Illustration 8-27 and Illustration 8-28.
Illustration 8-27: Head-End (DO FIRST)
Illustration 8-28: Foot-End
9. Connect the pre-amp cable to the pre-amp. Make sure to route the pre-amp cable such that it
does not interfere with the detector tray insertion. And with photo of XR656 table AEC pre-amp
cable
The ION chamber cable connector should be well tightened to the ION Chamber, otherwise the
RCN test value will become larger, this could lead to the failure in QAP test
Illustration 8-29: Pre-Amp Cable Connection

GE HEALTHCARE
10. Install the ION Chamber.
a. Make sure the ION Chamber cables are routed under the detector tray bumpers. Illustration
8-30: Correct Cable Routing
Illustration 8-30: Correct Cable Routing
b. When installing ION Chamber make sure the orientation is as shown in Illustration 8-31.
Illustration 8-31: ION Chamber Correct Orientation
11. Install the mylar and ION Chamber frame by tightening the four screws shown in Illustration 8-
32.
Illustration 8-32: Grid Frame Screw Locations

GE HEALTHCARE
12. Partially insert the grid frame assembly.
Illustration 8-33: Grid Frame Assembly
13. Make sure the grid frame pin is positioned as shown in Illustration 8-34.
Illustration 8-34: Foot-End Grid Guide Block
14. Fasten the Head-End Grid Guide Block and tighten in place.
Illustration 8-35: Head-End Grid Guide Block

GE HEALTHCARE
15. Attach the Grid Frame Guide blocks on the both the Head-End and Foot-End sides of the grid
frame.
Illustration 8-36: Attaching Grid Frame Guide Blocks
16. Install detector
Illustration 8-37: URP Detector Installation
1 2 3
4.4 Tube and Collimator Rotation Reference Marks

NOTE: These reference marks will be used to aid in OTS Rotational alignment and Collimator Zero
Detent alignment.
1. Attach a plumb bob to the OTS bridge, centered over the detector assembly.
2. Temporarily place two pieces of tape on top of the detector assembly, on the left and right sides,
in line with the plumb bob.
3. Move the bridge longitudinally and mark the position of the plumb bob onto the tape.
4. Remove the plumb bob from the bridge.
5. Attach the plumb bob to the OTS carriage, centered over the detector assembly.
6. Temporarily place two pieces of tape on top of the detector assembly, at the front and rear, in line
with the plumb bob.
7. Temporarily clamp the bridge to prevent motion in the longitudinal direction.
8. Move the carriage laterally and mark the position of the plumb bob onto the tape.
9. Remove the plumb bob and bridge clamps.

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 5.0 Table Cables

NOTE: The MIS cable connections between the Table and the System Cabinet cannot be made
until the system MIS cables have been pulled.
1. Connect the cables as shown in Illustration 8-80.
Illustration 8-80: Table Cable Connections
CABLE LOCATION DESCRIPTION

J1 MIS020005 Table Power 220 Vac
J2 MIS11753A Detector Power Supply 120 Vac
J3 No use
J4 MIS020045 Table ION Chamber
J5 MIS11632A Table CAN
J6 MIS11754A Table RT Bus
1Gbps Ethernet MIS020003 Ethernet – Table Dock
2. Connect table ground wires to brass grounding bar. See Illustration 8-81.
Illustration 8-81: Table Ground Connections

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 6.0 Table Top

The table top is installed by sliding the top onto the table bearing rails from either the head end or
the foot end of the table. This requires a minimum of 2200 mm of clearance from the head or foot
edge of the table frame.
• If there is enough clearance, install the table top according to the method described below
• If there is not enough clearance, install the table top using the alternate method described in
Appendix A, - Alternative Methods, Section 4.0 Table Top Installation
Potential for Equipment Damage: Avoid damage to the Table Top Collision Sensor
Switches during table top installation.
Potential for Finger Pinch Injury.

The collision sensor switches and the magnetic locks need to be depressed while installing
the table top.
When installing table top, use a tool to depress collision sensor switches and magnetic
locks. DO NOT USE YOUR FINGERS!
1. If installed, use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the bumper from one end of the table top. See
Illustration 8-84.
2. Carefully position the table top on the edge of the table frame. Do NOT begin to slide the top onto
the bearing rails.
3. Using a tool (not fingers), depress the two magnetic locks (rotate to allow up/down movement)
and the actuators of the two table top collision sensor switches. See Illustration 8-83.
Illustration 8-83: Table Top Installation
4. Slowly slide the table top over the locks and switches being careful not to damage the switch
actuators or pinch your fingers.
5. Slowly slide the top towards the opposite end of the table, stopping before the magnetic locks
and collision sensor switches are encountered.
6. Using a TOOL (not fingers) to depress the two magnetic locks and the actuators of the two table
top collision sensor switches, rotate to allow up/down movement).
7. Slowly slide the table top over the locks and switches being careful not to damage the switch
actuators or pinch your fingers.
Page 166 Section 6.0 - Table Top

GE HEALTHCARE
8. Remove the table top insert and transfer the lateral plumb bob marks from the detector housing
to the table top rails. Re-install the table top insert.
9. Using a Phillips screwdriver, install the bumper to prevent the top from accidentally moving
beyond the end bearings. See Illustration 8-84
Illustration 8-84: Table Top Bumper Installation

GE HEALTHCARE
Page 168 Section 6.0 - Table Top

GE HEALTHCARE
Chapter 9 Wall Stand and Extended Wall

Stand

• Unpack wall stand
• Install Wall Stand
• Install Detector
• Wall Stand Cables
• Wall Stand Jumpers and Switches
• Install Display
1.1 Prerequisites
This section assumes that the table has been mechanically installed and is aligned longitudinally to
the OTS, and the collimator is level.
Chapter 9 - Wall Stand and Extended Wall Stand Page 169

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 2.0 Unpack Wall Stand

2.1 Personnel Requirements
Personnel Preliminary Reqs Procedure Finalization

Requirements
1
Table 9-1
2.2 Procedure
1. Remove the top and side covers from the shipping crate.
2. Unpack the wallstand cover boxes and set aside.
3. Completely retract the rear positioning wheels (closest to the shipping pallet).
Illustration 9-1: Rear Positioning Wheels
4. Using the lifting handles at the top of the vertical column, raise the wallstand to the vertical
position.
Page 170 Section 2.0 - Unpack Wall Stand

GE HEALTHCARE
5. Disconnect the lift assist gas springs from the front of the wallstand column.
Illustration 9-2: Lift Assist Gas Springs
6. Lower the front positioning wheels to the floor.
Illustration 9-3: Front Positioning Wheels

GE HEALTHCARE
7. Remove the hinge pin that attaches the wallstand wooden base to the shipping pallet.
Illustration 9-4: Hinge Pin Location
8. While supporting the wallstand, pull the shipping pallet away from the wallstand.
Illustration 9-5: Removing Shipping Pallet

GE HEALTHCARE
9. Extend all of the positioning wheels to stabilize the wallstand.
Illustration 9-6: Extending Positioning Wheels
10. Unfold the tilt caddy from the rear of the wallstand. Attach the lower ends of the gas springs to
the wheel assembly; use the lower hole position
Illustration 9-7: Installing Tilt Caddy

GE HEALTHCARE
11. Unbolt and remove the wooden base from the bottom of the wallstand. Do not discard, as this
will be used in a later step.
Illustration 9-8: Removing Wooden Base
12. Adjust all of the positioning wheels until the wallstand baseplate rests on the floor (protect the
floor with cardboard and/or plywood).
13. Adjust the rear wheels until the bottom of the wheels are above the top of the baseplate. This
will prevent the wallstand from rolling while it is being tilted.
Illustration 9-9: Base Plate
TIPPING HAZARD
14. Using 2 people (3 are recommended), carefully tilt the wallstand backwards until the tilt caddy
wheels are on the floor. If the gas springs do not compress, carefully apply additional downward
pressure on the wallstand column until they compress.
15. Adjust the rear wheels until the baseplate clears the floor by ~10 mm (1/2 in.).
16. Move the wallstand into the room where the system is being installed.

GE HEALTHCARE
17. Adjust the rear wheels until the rear of the baseplate touches the floor (protect the floor with
cardboard and/or plywood).
Illustration 9-10: Base Plate
18. Continue to adjust the rear wheels until the bottom of the wheels are above the top of the
baseplate.
TIPPING HAZARD
19. Adjust front wheels to match the height of the rear wheels. This is to prevent the wallstand from
rolling while it is being raised to the vertical position. Using 2 people (3 are recommended), raise
the wallstand to the vertical position.
20. Remove the tilt caddy from the rear of the wallstand column.
* a. Disconnect the gas shocks from the upper bracket. Do NOT remove the upper
brackets.
* b. Remove the lower tilt dolly pivot bracket.
Illustration 9-11: Remove Tilt Caddy and Pivot Bracket

GE HEALTHCARE
21. Remove the gas spring support brackets from the front of the column.
Illustration 9-12: Remove Gas Spring Support Brackets
22. Remove the two metal covers that protect the column during shipping.
Illustration 9-13: Remove Metal Covers
23. Adjust the front and rear wheels until the wallstand baseplate is slightly above the floor.
24. Position the wallstand into the mounting location defined by the room layout drawings.
25. Lower the wallstand to the floor.
2.3 Finalization
No finalization steps.

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 3.0 Aligning and Installing the Wall Stand


Requirements
1
Table 9-2
3.2 Procedure
1. Move the wallstand into the exact mounting location (as defined in the room layout drawings).
Lower the wallstand to the floor.
2. Attach a plumb bob to the OTS bridge or carriage:
* a. If the wallstand is mounted off the head or foot end of the table, attach the plumb
bob to the OTS bridge.
* b. If the wall stand is mounted off the front or back wall, attach the plumb bob to the
OTS carriage. Clamp the OTS bridge to prevent it from traveling longitudinally within
the stationary rails.
3. Position a 24" carpenter’s square on the detector housing mounting bracket as shown in
Illustration 9-14.
Illustration 9-14: Alignment using Plumb Bob and Carpenter's Square
4. Move the OTS bridge or carriage to make the plumb bob travel along the edge of the carpenter’s
square (longitudinally with respect to the table if the wall stand is mounted off the head or foot end
of the table and laterally with respect to the table if the wall stand is mounted off the front or back
wall).

GE HEALTHCARE
Make sure wallstand is still in installation position per room layout drawing.
5. Adjust the wallstand position as necessary to get the OTS plumb bob to travel directly along the
edge of the carpenter’s square as the OTS is moved along the length of the carpenter's square.
6. Mark the location of the four baseplate mounting holes. See Illustration 9-15.
Illustration 9-15: Mark Mounting Holes
7. Raise and move the wallstand away from the mounting position so that the holes can be drilled.
8. At the marked positions (see Illustration 9-16), drill four 10 mm diameter holes 95 mm deep with
a masonry drill. Clean the holes of all dust and chips.
Illustration 9-16: Baseplate Mounting Hole Positions Marked
9. Move the wallstand back into the final mounting location and lower to the floor.
Page 178 Section 3.0 - Aligning and Installing the Wall Stand
GE HEALTHCARE
10. Drive the anchors into the holes, then slightly loosen the nuts and washers to allow for levelling
adjustments. See Illustration 9-17.
When doing the wall stand levelling adjustments, ensure the thread engagement at least one
nut thickness on the four anchors, otherwise the wall stand will have tipping hazard.
Illustration 9-17: Install Anchors
11. Loosen the 3 nuts that attach the sub-plate to the bottom of the baseplate (see Illustration 9-18).
This will allow the sub-plate to float away from the baseplate when the column is leveled.
Illustration 9-18: Loosen Sub-Plate Nuts

GE HEALTHCARE
12. Loosen the locknuts on the 5 baseplate leveling adjustors. See Illustration 9-19.
Illustration 9-19: Loosen Leveling Adjustor Locknuts
13. Place a 2-foot level on the sides of the vertical column bearing rail and adjust the baseplate
leveling adjustors to level the column front-to-rear and side-to-side. See Illustration 9-20.
Illustration 9-20: Level the Column
14. Tighten the 5 baseplate leveling adjustor locknuts.

15. Install the nuts on the 4 baseplate mounting studs. Torque all 4 anchors to 27 N-m, then to 41
N-m. Make paint mark (not use red) for visual screw loose check (4x)
GE HEALTHCARE
16. Remove the detector housing covers and set aside in a safe place:
* a. Remove the upper rear cover (4 screws). See Illustration 9-21.
Illustration 9-21: Upper Rear Cover
* b. Remove the lower rear cover (4 screws). See Illustration 9-22.
Illustration 9-22: Lower Rear Cover
* c. Disconnect the tilt brake switch cable from the lower rear cover. See Illustration 9-
23.

GE HEALTHCARE
Illustration 9-23: Tilt Brake Switch Cable
* d. Remove the detector housing front cover (2 in the bottom and 4 screws in the top).
See Illustration 9-24 and Illustration 9-25.
Illustration 9-24: Front Cover - Bottom
Illustration 9-25: Front Cover - Top
e. Remove the detector housing side covers (4 screws in each cover). See Illustration10-
26.
GE HEALTHCARE
Illustration 9-26: Side Covers
17. Place a level on the top of the detector housing (see Illustration 9-27). Loosen the four mounting
screws (at rear of detector housing) and adjust the housing until it is level, then retighten the
mounting screws.
Illustration 9-27: Level Detector Housing
18. Remove the lifting handles from the top of the vertical column. See Illustration10-28.

GE HEALTHCARE
Illustration 9-28: Lifting Handles
19. Unbolt and remove the transport dolly from the wallstand baseplate.
20. Using a 5mm Allen wrench, remove the left and right locking clamps and Teflon spacers from
the vertical column bearing rails. See Illustration 9-29.
Illustration 9-29: Remove Locking Clamps
GE HEALTHCARE
Heavy Object
Wallstand arm weighs in excess of 50 lbs. (22.7 kg). Use 2 people to safety raise/lower this
assembly.
21. Using an 8mm Allen wrench, remove the upper set of left and right carriage bumpers from the
sides of the vertical column. Do NOT remove the lower bumpers! When the bumpers are removed,
assure that the drive belts are properly positioned over the pulleys. See Illustration10-31.
Illustration 9-31: Remove Upper Bumpers
CRUSH HAZARD
WALLSTAND ARM WEIGHS IN EXCESS OF 50 LBS. (22.7 KG).
USE 2 PEOPLE TO SAFETY RAISE/LOWER THIS ASSEMBLY.
22. Use 2 people to remove the wooden support and lower the carriage until the weight is on the
belts.
23. Push down on the carriage arm to raise the counterweights, then remove the counterweight
shipping bolt and gas spring support bracket from the rear of the vertical column. See Illustration 9-
32.
Illustration 9-32: Remove Counterweight Bolt and Bracket
24. Remove the top plate from the detector housing. See Illustration10-33.

GE HEALTHCARE
Illustration 9-33: Remove Top Plate
25. Remove the grid holder assembly from the front of the detector housing (6 Phillips screws on
each side). See Illustration 9-34.
Illustration 9-34: Remove Grid Holder Assembly
26. Perform this step only if you are configuring for left-hand Grid insertion:
* a. Cut the cable ties and re-route the Grid Partial In sensor cable to the middle-left of
the detector housing. See Illustration 9-35.
* b. Cut the cable ties and re-route the larger gray cable (Grid Sensor / Grid In) to the
right side of the detector housing (along with the existing small black cable (Manual
Tilting Button)) and through the opening in the chassis. See Illustration 9-35.
* c. Attach the cables to the cable-tie mounts with cable ties.Illustration 9-35: Re-route
Cables for Left-Hand
GE HEALTHCARE
Illustration 9-35: Re-route Cables for Left-Hand Grid Insertion
27. Position the bottom of the ion chamber pre-amp over the flat head screw and secure at the top
with a screw through the back of the detector housing. Only the pre-amp is installed at this point;
the ion chamber should be placed on the carriage arm housing and will be installed after the
detector has been installed. See Illustration 9-36 and Illustration 9-37.
Illustration 9-36: Install Ion Chamber Preamp
Illustration 9-37: Lay Ion Chamber on Carriage Arm

GE HEALTHCARE
28. For both 3-cell and 4-cell ION Chambers, connect the ion chamber cable (5237224-DCW) to
the top of the ion chamber preamp. See Illustration 9-38.
The ION chamber cable connector should be well tightened to the ION Chamber, otherwise the
RCN test value will become larger, this could lead to the failure in QAP test
Illustration 9-38: Connect Ion Chamber Preamp Cable
29. For 4-cell ION Chambers only, connect the ion chamber cable to connector J6. See Illustration
10-39.
GE HEALTHCARE
Illustration 9-39: Connect Ion Chamber Preamp Cable to J6
30. Inspect the external surfaces of the mylar barrier for any foreign objects. Clean the mylar barrier
if necessary to remove any foreign objects.
31. Attach the grid holder assembly to the front of the detector housing (6 Phillips screws on each
side). Right-hand grid insertion is shown below (see Illustration 9-40). For left-hand grid insertion,
rotate the grid holder assembly 180 degrees before installation.
Illustration 9-40: Install Grid Holder Assembly
32. Connect the Grid Sensor cable (upper) and Grid In cable (lower) to the grid holder assembly.
Make sure to connect the Grid In wires to the correct terminals. Right-hand grid insertion is shown
in Illustration 9-41 and Illustration 9-42.

GE HEALTHCARE
Illustration 9-41: Connect Grid Sensor Cables
Illustration 9-42: Grid Switch Connections
GE HEALTHCARE
3.3 Wallstand Housing URP Detector Lock (Options)
WS Housing URP Detector Lock Kit 5409131 is an optional accessory to lock WS Tray and
Wireless Detector. If the customer requires to lock the Wallstand detector, then use the following
procedure to install the lock structure
Note: After the lock assembly, the WS Tray and the Detector cannot be removed from Wallstand housing,
and the wireless battery also be locked.
1.) During system power on, tilt WS housing to vertical position (0 degree) and move housing to
a comfortable working height.
2.) Switch off the system by following LOTO procedure.
3.) Remove WS Housing front Cover, back covers and right side cover.
4.) Remove Hexagon Socket Counterunk Head Screw M5x12 (2x) and screw M6x20 (2x)
Hexagon Socket C-Sunk

Head Screw M5x12 (2x)
Hexagon Socket C-Sunk

Head Screw M6x20 (2x)
5.) Remove Tray Latch mechanical structure
Tray Latch
mechanical structure

GE HEALTHCARE
6.) Remove Screw M4x8 (2x) and Screw M4x16 (3x)
7.) Remove WS Housing Lock Pin Assembly
WS Housing
Lock Pin ASM
Screw M4x8 (2x)
Screw M4x16 (3x)
8.) Pull out WS Housing tray

9.) Insert wireless Detector (with Battery) to WS tray
10.) Push WS tray with Detector into WS housing
11.) Mount Bracket for Tray Lock by Hexagon Socket Head Screw M4x8 (2x)
12.) Mount Clamp for Detector Lock by Hexagon Socket Head Screw M3x16 (2x)
Hexagon Socket
Countersunk
Head Screw
M3x16 (2x) Hexagon Socket
Countersunk
Clamp for Head Screw
Detector Lock M4x8 (2x)
Bracket for
Tray Lock
13.) Remount all the WS Housing Covers
GE HEALTHCARE
3.4 Wallstand Insertion left or right rework
Following procedure step by step the wallstand insertion can be change to left or right by same way.
1. Turn off system. Insert the counterweight shipping bolt from the rear of the vertical column. See
Illustration
Insert the counterweight shipping bolt
2. Remove the upper rear cover (4 screws). Remove the lower rear cover (4 screws). See
Illustration
3. Disconnect the tilt brake switch cable from the lower rear cover.

GE HEALTHCARE
4. Remove the detector housing front cover (2 in the bottom and 4 screws in the top).
5. Remove the detector housing side covers (4 screws in each cover). be careful to disconnect the
connector of pig-tail display board
6. Remove the grid partial sensor (2 screws)
GE HEALTHCARE
7. Remove the patient barrier assembly (10 screws)
8. Disconnect all of the connector (Grid Sensor Board and Wallstand detector in house sensor) and
remove the cable
9. Disconnect the Ion chamber cable and remove Ion chamber and Pre-amplifier Box

GE HEALTHCARE
10. Loose the two Screw M4x6,take off the Shield.
11. Disconnect these connectors and grounding cable.
J1 J2 J6
Ethernet
Detector Power cable
12. Remove the Nylon cable clamp (4 screws)
13. Remove two front cover bracket.
GE HEALTHCARE
14. Push the rubber cable clamp to out side
Note: If it is possible prepare a table or stand on the detector housing bottom
15. Loose the detector housing (4 screws)

GE HEALTHCARE
16. Rotate the detector housing to 180 degree
17. Re-route these cables, These lines are not too tight for detector housing tilting rotate to -20
degree.
18. Re-mount the detector housing (4 screws) and re-install the Nylon cable clamp (4 screws)
Note:
• Daub the Loctite 242 or 243 glue on the bolts,
• Torque the bolts to 19.4 N-m (14 lbs-ft) each with torque wrench.
• Add paint mark (not use red) for visual screw loose check (4x)
GE HEALTHCARE
19. Re-Connect the connector cable J1,J2, Detector Power cable and Ethernet and re-install the
grid partial sensor (2 screws) but it should be located temporarily at the upper limit.
20. Re-install the front cover bracket and replace the detector holder positions like as below.
21. Re-install the Shield (2 screws) which should be into the slit.

GE HEALTHCARE
22. Rotate the Ion Chamber on its base plate by 180 degree clockwise as picture shows and then
fasten screws.
23. Re-connect the Ion Chamber cable and Assembly Ion Chamber Pre-amplifier as picture shows,
insert right end with open hole into the pin catcher, and fasten Screw.
Pin catcher
24. Re-connect connector J6, detector in house sensor connector. Re-assembly Ion chamber and
re-route Ion chamber cable.
25. Re-assemble the patient barrier assembly and use Cable Clips to fix the cable from Pre-
amplifier Box. have no any impact when insert detector
GE HEALTHCARE
26. Re-adjust the Insert the grid partial sensor height when insert one grid be careful, didn’t have
any impact each other. Then re-connect connector of grid sensor board .
27. Re-connect the pigtail feature display board, then re-install the Side Cover-Right ASM and WS
receptor side cover-left
28. Exchange the Manual Tilting Button connector position, then re-install all of the covers.

GE HEALTHCARE
29. Remove the counterweight shipping bolt.
Remove the counterweight shipping bolt
3.5 Finalization
Re-do configuration wallstand detector insertion: Right to Left (or Left to Right) make sure it is match
with detector insertion installed.
GE HEALTHCARE
Section 4.0 Install Wallstand Cables


Requirements
1 0min 15min 0min
Table 9-3
4.2 Preliminary Requirements
4.2.1 Tools and Test Equipment
Item Qty Effectivity Part# Manufacturer

Standard toolkit 1 - - -
4.2.2 Safety
No general safety information.
4.3 Procedure
1. Connect the wallstand cables:

GE HEALTHCARE
Illustration 9-54: Cable Connections - Lower Front
Part No Connection Description

5146500-4 A1J1 MIS 020021 Wallstand ION Chamber cable
5402563 A1J3 WS Foot switch assembly (Option)
5146500-1 A1J2 MIS 11644A Wallstand CAN cable
5146500-2 A1J4 MIS 11756A Wallstand 120VAC
5146500-3 A1J5 MIS 11755A Wallstand DPS 120VAC
5146500-5 WS MIS11757A WS Ground Cable
Table 9-4
Page 204 Section 4.0 - Install Wallstand Cables

GE HEALTHCARE
Illustration 9-55: Cable Connections - Rear
Connection Description
A6J1 MIS 20100A Ethernet cable from Magic PC

Table 9-5 Cable Connections - Rear
Illustration 9-56: Cable Connections - Grounds
A7 Gnd MIS 11757A Ground cable from System Cabinet

Table 9-6 Cable Connections - Grounds

GE HEALTHCARE
2. Route the cables underneath the restraining bracket at the side and rear of the wallstand, then
tighten down the brackets.
Illustration 9-57: Route Cables Under Brackets
3. Connect the cooling hoses (2) to the Conditioner.
4.4 Finalization
No finalization steps.
Page 206 Section 4.0 - Install Wallstand Cables

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 5.0 Connect Display

1. Connect the display cable to the display board in the top cover.
Illustration 9-58: Display Cable
Illustration 9-59: Connect Display Cable

GE HEALTHCARE
2. Install the top cover (2 screws). The remaining covers will be installed after configuration/
calibration steps have been completed.
Illustration 9-60: Install Top Cover
Page 208 Section 5.0 - Connect Display

GE HEALTHCARE
Chapter 10 Tether Interface Box Installation

• Confirm Tether Interface Box (TIB) Location & Height on Room Layout Drawing
• Confirm Tether Interface Box (TIB) Wall Backing Support with PMI (PN:5343949-8EN) or FE
• TIB Levelling
• Cable Connect
Section 2.0 Installation Procedure

2.1 Unpacking
Figure 10-1 Tether Interface Box
2.2 Disassembly
1.) Open TIB door and remove 4 screwes
Figure 10-2 Remove screwes
Chapter 10 - Tether Interface Box Installation Page 209

GE HEALTHCARE
2.) Take apart TIB
Bracket
Cover
Figure 10-3 TIB disassembly
3.) Wall mount bracket
Figure 10-4 Mount bracket
4.) Install TIB cover
Figure 10-5 Install TIB cover
Page 210 Section 1.0 - Summary Checklist

GE HEALTHCARE
5.) Connect TIB cable
J1:120VAC Input
Tether Ethernet
Tether backup cable 12VDC Output
J1:120VAC MIS 020075 TIB Power cable (Cabinet to TIB PN5402662)

Tether Ethernet MIS 020077 TIB Tether Ethernet Cable (PC to TIB)
Grounding PN# 5400785 TIB grounding cable (Cabinet to TIB)
Tether Backup Tether backup cable to URP detector
Table 10-1
Chapter 10 - Tether Interface Box Installation Page 211

GE HEALTHCARE

GE HEALTHCARE
Chapter 11 Dongle Assembly Installation

Only for Wireless system (default)
• Confirm Dongle Location & Height on Room Layout Drawing
• Confirm Dongle Wall Backing Support with PMI (PN:5343949-8EN) or FE
• Dongle installation process
• Find out the final position of dongle assembly
• Finish the wireless signal environment check
• Finally fixed the dongle assembly to the wall after signal check
Note: Non Wireless Configuration Statement

For the countries where wireless communications applications are not allowed by the
regulations, the FlashPad wireless detector shall be used under Tether Only Mode by
selecting the wireless regulatory code during configuration in SUIF. So that it can conform to
the local laws and regulations
For Non Wireless Configuration system, without dongle with Discovery XR656 system
shipping to site
Chapter 11 - Dongle Assembly Installation Page 213

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 2.0 Installation Procedure

2.1 Unpacking and cable connection:
USB Cable and Dongle assembly cover
Dongle
Grounding Cable
Figure 11-1 Unpacking
Connect the USB signal cable; USB power cable and ground cable after remove dongle assembly
cover of dongle (Refer to Figure-11-2)
USB Signal cable Ground Cable USB power cable
Figure 11-2 Dongle Internal Cable Connection
2.1.1 Dongle Cable
Dongle Bracket and USB 5411389

Cable Assembly
Grounding 5412201
Table 11-1

GE HEALTHCARE
2.2 Temporarily fix the dongle assembly in the default position
(IT’S NOT FINAL FIXED, JUST FOR SIGNAL CHECK):
Note: Please finish the detector registration first before starting the wireless signal check.
2.2.1 Step1
Refer to below pictures to find out the default position of dongle assembly. There are two different
scenarios shown below. If more details needed, please refer to Pre-installation manual.
Figure 11-3 Default position for the layout that control room is inside
Figure 11-4 Default position for the layout that control room is outside
1.) Dongle location should face to the detector insert direction in table housing.

GE HEALTHCARE
2.) Antenna angle is 45 degree pointing to the wall
3.) Antenna height is close to ceiling, but without metal obstacles within 20 cm range.
4.) No obstacles are between antenna and application range of portable detector.
5.) For “Control room outside” room configuration, default location is center of wall, and adjusting
range is 1m to left and 1m to right.
6.) For “Control room inside” room configuration default location-1is the center position from the
exam room wall to the control room wall (A-B). It’s applied when most common used application is
in area-1. The second default location is on the corner of shielding wall of control room, and
adjusting rang is still 1m both in left side and right side.
2.2.2 Step2
Temporarily fix the dongle assembly for the wireless signal check and test.
2.3 Wireless Signal Check
Figure 11-5 Flow chart for the wireless signal check
The test points is shown on the below two pictures. It includes total eight points around table and
three test points around the WS.

GE HEALTHCARE
Figure 11-6 Test points for Table
Figure 11-7 Test points for WS
Pass standard: Detector wireless LED is always green or recover from orange to green within 15
seconds
Fail standard: Detector wireless LED is always red or persist in orange
Figure 11-8 Detector LED

GE HEALTHCARE
Note: Default dongle location could cover almost every site situation, so if all test points pass quality
test at a location, just install Dongle over there. You don't need continue test other locations
Use table-11-2 to record the total failed point and define the best position of dongle location.
TEST POINTS DONGLE LOCATION

DEFAULT ADJUSTING ADJUSTING ADJUSTING OTHER LOCATION
POSITION RANGE RANGE RANGE
LOCATION 1 LOCATION 2 LOCATION 3
Wall stand
Table
FE defined
points
Total number of
"Failed" Points
Table 11-2 Record of wireless signal testing result
2.3.1 Installation Quality Test tools and standards
Figure 11-9 Wireless signal testing tool

GE HEALTHCARE
From Simple to Complex

Figure 11-10 Wireless signal pass standard
2.4 Final fixed dongle assembly

After finding out the best location of dongle, follow below instruction to finish the final installation of
dongle assembly.

GE HEALTHCARE
2.4.1 Install the cover and antenna
Figure 11-11 Final dongle assembly installation
NOTE: Antenna angel is 45 degrees pointing the wall
NOTE: Hide all the USB cables and ground cable if it’s required by local regulation of
medical system room

GE HEALTHCARE
Chapter 12 Detector BIN and Grid Holder

Installation (Wall mount)
Note: Detector BIN can be floor mount or wallmount. This chapter is only for detector BIN wallmount.
Section 1.0 Detector BIN Installation (Wall mount)

1.1 Unpacking
Figure 12-1 BIN
1.2 Disassembly
1.) Remove BIN Base
Figure 12-2 Remove BIN Base
Chapter 12 - Detector BIN and Grid Holder Installation (Wall mount) Page 221
GE HEALTHCARE
2.) Remove rear cover
Rear Cover
Figure 12-3 Remove rear cover
3.) Remove front cover
Mainbody Front cover
Figure 12-4 Remove front cover
4.) Wallmount anchor screw
Note: Two requirements about wall are:

• Texture should be concrete
• Thickness should be more than 80mm
If the wall meets the requirements, then drill three holds with 8.5mm in diameter and 75mm in
deepness and mount the BIN on the wall.
If not, the BIN could also be mounted on the ground.
Make sure D=7mm +/-1mm (0.27" +/- 0.039") is reserved outside for TIB main body fixation.
Page 222 Section 1.0 - Detector BIN Installation (Wall mount)

GE HEALTHCARE
Note: Daub the Loctite 242 or 243 glue on the 4 bolts.
5.) Install rear cover
Loosen the two screws
Figure 12-5 Install rear cover
6.) Install BIN main body and fasten screw
Figure 12-6 Install BIN main body
7.) Install front cover
Figure 12-7 Install front cover
GE HEALTHCARE
Section 2.0 Grid Holder installation (Wall mount)

• Confirm Grid Holder Location & Height on Room Layout Drawing
• Confirm Grid Holder Wall Backing Support with PMI or FE
• Grid Holder Levelling
2.2 Installation Procedure

The grid holder will hold three grids (one from the table and two from the wall stand, the IQST
phantom holder and the flat field test phantom. See Illustration 14-1.
Illustration 14-1: Grid Holder
The following additional items will be needed to install the grid holder:
• Mounting screws with plastic sleeves
• Hand drill
NOTE: Observe the following:
The suggested height from the floor to the top of the grid holder assembly is approximately 30
inches (76 cm), depending upon hospital personnel. This means the top of the mounting panel
should be 30 inches (76 cm) from the floor.
1. Locate the wall backing support or wall studs in the area where the grid holder will be mounted.
2. Using the mounting panel as a template, level the panel at the desired mounting height and
mark on the wall where the mounting holes align with the wall studs or where the anchoring devices
are to be installed. See Illustration 14-2.
Page 224 Section 2.0 - Grid Holder installation (Wall mount)

GE HEALTHCARE
Illustration 14-2: Mounting Panel
3. Drill holes where mounting screws or anchors are to be installed.

4. Install anchors if used.
5. Secure mounting panel to the wall. See Illustration 14-2.
6. Install the grid holder assembly over the top lip on the mounting panel. As the assembly is
lowered into position, make sure the stud on the bottom of the panel protrudes through the tab on
the bottom of the grid holder assembly. See Illustration 14-3
GE HEALTHCARE
Illustration 14-3: Mounting Stud
7. Secure the grid holder assembly to the mounting panel with a 6 mm nut and washer provided.
8. Install the unused table and wall stand grids, the IQST phantom holder and flat field phantom as
shown in Illustration 14-1 and Illustration 14-4.
Illustration 14-4: Top View of Grid Holder
Page 226 Section 2.0 - Grid Holder installation (Wall mount)

GE HEALTHCARE
Chapter 13 Workstation and Wall box

• Place computer on work desk, connect cables
• Place mouse and keyboard on work desk, connect cables
• Place RCIM & handswitch on work desk, connect cables
• Place LCD monitors on work desk, connect cables
• Place Bar Code Reader (Purchased Option) on work desk, connect cables
• Install wall box and connect cables
Chapter 13 - Workstation and Wall box Page 227

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 2.0 HP z400 Workstation

2.1 z400 Workstation
1. Placement: As per room layout drawing.
2. Connections:
Figure 13-1 Magic PC Connections (HP z400)
a. Ethernet:
■ External(eth4)(Hospital Network )
■ J5 (eth0)Table Dock To MIS 020003
■ J4 (eth1)Wall Stand Dock To MIS 20100A.
■ J7 (eth2)TIB Tether To MIS 020077.
■ J6 (eth3)no use
b. CAN Bus:
■ J2: Jedi (System I/O Board) To MIS 11767A
■ J1: System (CAN Bulkhead) To MIS 11768A
c. Power To MIS 11770A
d. Ground To MIS 11776A
e. Monitor:
■ 1 ACQ monitor
■ 2.Viewer monitor
Page 228 Section 2.0 - HP z400 Workstation

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 3.0 Mouse and Keyboard

2. Connections:
○ Attach mouse to computer USB connector.
○ Attach keyboard to computer USB connector.

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 4.0 RCIM2 and Handswitch

Note: System cables cannot be connected to the computer and RCIM2 until they have been
pulled.

2. Connections:
■ Digital I/O for RCIM2, to Wallplate, then System Cabinet
■ USB for RCIM2, to Workstation
3. RCIM2 Overlays for International Use:
a. Remove the existing overlay from the RCIM2.
b. Locate the appropriate language overlay (shipped with the RCIM2).
c. Attach the overlay to the RCIM2.
d. Verify that all RCIM2 buttons operate without interference.
Grounding To WallBox USB
HandSwitch
Page 230 Section 4.0 - RCIM2 and Handswitch

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 5.0 LCD Monitors

2. Connections:
a. Power & Ground=> (Connect to wall plate only)
b. Video
HP z400 Workstation
■ Plug the video adapter cable into the rear of the workstation PC. See Figure 13-2 and Figure
13-3.
#1
ACQ Monitor
Viewer Monitor
DisplayPort to DVI Cable
Figure 13-2 Video Adapter Cable

GE HEALTHCARE
■ Connect DVI-VGA cable to the monitor1 and Connect DisplayPort- DVI cable to the
monitor2. See Figure13-3. Be sure to use the DVI-VGA cables and DVIcable that are
packaged with the Monitor.
ACQ Monitor: Connect DVI-VGA Cable Viewer Monitor (Image): Connect DVI Cable
The adapter
NOTE: There is a adapter for
the connection of ACQ Monitor
Figure 13-3 LCD Monitor Video Cable Connections
■ Control room status, See Figure 13-4
Figure 13-4 Control room
Page 232 Section 5.0 - LCD Monitors

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 6.0 Bar Code Reader (Purchased Option)

2. Connections: Attach bar code reader to computer USB connector.

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 7.0 Wall box

NOTE: System cables cannot be connected to the computer and RCIM2 until they have been
pulled.
Illustration 13-16: Magic PC Wall box (Front)
Illustration 13-17: Magic PC Wall box (Rear)
Page 234 Section 7.0 - Wall box

GE HEALTHCARE
Chapter 14 Jumpers, Switches, Terminations

and Power

• Check/set sub-system jumpers, switches and bus terminations
• Check/set system cabinet PDU tap settings
• Connect 3-phase power and ground to System Cabinet disconnect
Chapter 14 - Jumpers, Switches, Terminations and Power Page 235

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 2.0 Sub-Systems

2.1 OTS Jumpers and Switches
OTS jumpers and switches are factory configured. The jumper and switch positions can be
confirmed by referring to the System chapter in the Discovery XR656 System Schematics
(5343955-1EN).
• TSL
• Gooseneck
• OTS UIF
Page 236 Section 2.0 - Sub-Systems

GE HEALTHCARE
2.2 Wall Stand Jumpers and Switches
Wall Stand jumpers and switches are factory configured. The jumper and switch positions can be
(5343955-1EN).
• ALB ARM Core Module
• ALB I/O Board

GE HEALTHCARE
2.3 Table Jumpers and Switches
Table jumpers and switches are factory configured. The jumper and switch positions can be
(5343955-1EN).
• ALB ARM Core Module
• ALB I/O Board

GE HEALTHCARE
2.4 System Cabinet
System Cabinet jumpers and switches are factory configured. The jumper and switch positions
can be confirmed by referring to the System chapter in the Discovery XR656 System Schematics
(5343955-1EN).
• Corona Board
2.5 CAN Bus Terminations

• On the Discovery XR656 system, CAN loopback jumpers are NOT required.
• Do not install any CAN loopback jumpers on the System Cabinet A25 bulkhead or Wall Stand I/O
board.
• Remove any existing CAN loopback jumpers from the System Cabinet A25 bulkhead.
2.6 RT Bus Terminations

For Wall Stand-Only Configuration:
• System Cabinet:=> E-stop Loopback jumper installed on A25 J110 (TABLE RT BUS).

GE HEALTHCARE
2.7 PDU Tap Settings and 3-Phase Power Connection
POTENTIAL FOR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE: PDU tap settings must match input
voltage, else there is potential for equipment damage.
1. Open System Cabinet door and verify that the PDU’s tap settings (underneath cover at TB3)
are set correctly for the line voltage being supplied to the system. See Fig 14-1.
Figure 14-1 PDU Front Panel
2. Connect incoming 3-phase power and ground. See Fig14-2.
Figure 14-2 System Cabinet Cables - PDU Connections
Incoming 3 phase power cable
Warning Light
& Door Interlock
Grounding cable connector

GE HEALTHCARE
Chapter 15 Grounding Resistance Test
Note: This section is to be performed by the local field engineer.
Ground Resistance testing is done as part of the system installation tasks, to ensure the continued
electrical safety of the system, the testing is then performed annually under the system Periodic
Maintenance tasks using the Fluke ES612 or Hioki 3157 test meter or equivalent.
Note: The test procedures below contain the specific tool setup to use with the Fluke ESA612 test meter
and the Hioki 3157 test meter. Refer to device’s user manual for setup details if instead using an
equivalent testing device.
Note: “equivalent” means that the tool is designed to be capable of performing tests to the standard of IEC
62353.
Section 1.0 Fluke ESA612


Requirements
1 Not Applicable 30min 10min
Table 15-1

Fluke ESA612 1 - - Fluke
1.2.2 Safety
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK.

VOLTAGE PRESENT.
THE SYSTEM MUST BE DISCONNECTED FROM THE FACILITY MAINS INCLUDING THE A1
PANEL GROUND WIRE.
Chapter 15 - Grounding Resistance Test Page 241

GE HEALTHCARE
1.2.3 Required Conditions
Condition Reference Effectivity

All sub-system covers must be removed to access the grounding points - -
within each sub-system.
1.2.4 Setup the Tool
• How to connect the Tool

1.) Connect power cord
2.) Connect red test lead to red input jack (V/Ω/A)
3.) Connect black test lead to black input jack
• Power on the Tool

- Press the power switch on the left-side panel so the “I” side of the ac power switch is
depressed. The tool will perform a series of self tests and then display the message
shown as below picture when the self test has completed successfully.
• Setting the test standard to IEC 62353

- The tool is designed to perform electrical safety testing based on a number of different
safety standards: AAMI ES1/NFPA99, IEC62353, IEC60601-1, and AN/NZS 3551. AAMI
is the Analyzer’s default standard.
Page 242 Section 1.0 - Fluke ESA612

GE HEALTHCARE
- To select the IEC 62353 standard:
1.) Press “Setup”.

2.) From the setup menu, press “F4” button under the softkey labeled “More” to reveal
additional menu selections.
3.) Press “F2” button under the softkey labeled “Instrument” to reveal the instrument
setup selections.
4.) Press “F1” button under the softkey labeled “Standard” to open the scroll box above
the softkey label.
5.) Press button of UP or Down to scroll through the standard selections.

6.) When the desired standard is displayed, press “F1” button under the softkey labeled
“Standard” to confirm the standard.
7.) Press “F4” button under the softkey labeled “Done” to completed the standard setup.
F1 F2 F3 F4
• Accessing the tool’s protective earth resistance test interface

1.) Press “POINT TO POINT” button to access below interface
2.) Press “F2” button under the softkey labeled “Resistance” to access resistance.

GE HEALTHCARE
interface
3.) Zero out the test lead resistance. Connect the two alligator clips accessory as below.
Press “F4” button under the softkey labeled “Zero Leads”. The tool zeroes out the
measurement.
1.3 Protective Earth Resistance Test Procedure

1.) Shut down the system and turn off the main switch in the cabinet.
2.) Connect the alligator clip of the black test lead to cabinet earth terminal.
3.) Connect the alligator clip of the red test lead to each of the test points defined for the
systems.
4.) Record each of the protective earth resistance values. The protective earth resistance
value should not be greater than 0.2 Ω (200 mΩ).

GE HEALTHCARE
NO TEST POINT Expected Value (Ω) Measure Value (Ω) RESULT

1 Door of system cabinet 0.2
2 Foot pedal bracket of table 0.2
3 Ion chamber fixed bracket of 0.2
table
4 Metal cover inside housing of 0.2
wallstand
5 OTS console bracket 0.2
6 PC earth terminal 0.2
7 Screw of TIB earth terminal 0.2
8 Screw of Wall Box 0.2
Table 15-2 Test Point
1.) Door of system cabinet
2.) Foot pedal bracket of table

GE HEALTHCARE
3.) Ion chamber fixed bracket of table
4.) Metal cover inside housing of wallstand
5.) OTS console bracket

GE HEALTHCARE
6.) PC earth terminal
7.) Screw of TIB earth terminal
8.) Screw of Wall Box

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 2.0 Hioki 3157


Requirements
Table 15-3
2.2 Overview
This procedure can be performed with:
• Hioki Grounding tester

Hioki 3157-01 AC Grounding 1 - PN:5305782 HIOKI
HiTester
2.3.2 Safety

VOLTAGE PRESENT.
PANEL GROUND WIRE.

All sub-system covers must be removed to - -
access the grounding points within each
sub-system.
Page 248 Section 2.0 - Hioki 3157

GE HEALTHCARE
2.4 Procedure
2.4.1 How to Use the Hioki 3157 for Grounding Checks
2.4.1.1 Needed Cables According to Site Layout

Depending on site layout you will need two cables A & B of different length to make measurements.
This is site dependant because system components may not be close to each other.
Illustration 15-1:
Measurement points A and B are defined in Illustration 15-14.
For European countries, cables are provided with the Hioki tester.
1. For all other countries, cables currently are not provided by GE and shall be obtained locally.
Green/Yellow “ground” stranded wire cables will work, and you will need lugs to fit ¼” terminals (on
the meter-end) and two clamps for the other end of the cables. See the following illustration for
examples.
Illustration 15-2: Lugs and Clamps
2. Refer to the following table to choose the test cable gauge according to the necessary length:
Choose A & B test cable length (feet or meters) and size (AWG or mm2) based on your lab setup
(distance from the SPGP to the tested equipment).
Metric cables length in meters Cable size in mm²

Cable A Cable B Cable A Cable B
3 5 2.5 2.5
3 15 6 6
3 20 6 6
Table 15-4

GE HEALTHCARE
Metric cables length in meters Cable size in mm²
3 25 10 10
3 30 10 10
3 35 10 10
AWG cables length in feet Cable size in AWG
Cable A Cable B Cable A Cable B
9 15 12 12
9 45 10 10
9 60 8 8
9 75 8 8
9 90 8 8
9 105 6 6
Table 15-4
2.4.1.2 Connecting Measurement Cables to the Tester

1. Get the necessary test (ground) cable according to the previous table, or cables provided with
the tester (for European countries).
2. Connect Cable B according to the scheme below:
a. Rotate the current output (Source) terminal knob (top right) and the voltage
Illustration 15-3:
measurement (Sense) terminal knob (bottom right) counter-clockwise to open.

b. Connect the test cable and short bar as shown in the following illustration:

GE HEALTHCARE
Illustration 15-4:
c. Rotate the current output (Source) terminal and the voltage measurement (Sense) terminals
clockwise to tighten.
Illustration 15-5:
In a test using two test leads, be sure to use the current output (Source) terminals.
d. Repeat the same operations above for cable A at the other current output (Source) terminal
(top left). The spare short bar should not be installed between the left Source and Sense
terminals.
e. The resulting connections should be as shown in the following illustration.
Illustration 15-6:

GE HEALTHCARE
2.4.1.3 Setting Test Parameters
Test current doesn't take the same value in all countries:
• For USA, Europe, and Asia, test current shall be 25.0 A.
• For Canada, test current shall be 30.0 A.
NOTE: Maximum Test Value shall be 0.100 ohms.
Test timer shall be set to 5.0 seconds.
1. Turn the unit on by pressing in the Main Power button. The unit enters the READY state five
seconds after startup (model name and version are displayed during startup). If the unit does not
come up with the Test Parameters specified above, perform the following steps to change the
parameters as needed. (Settings are saved after power-off)
Illustration 15-7:
2. While in the READY state, press the key or the key until the Output Current display
starts flashing.
Illustration 15-8:
3. Change the Output Current value using the keys. The value changes in 0.1 A
increments. To change the value by 1.0 A, press the + keys.
4. Press the key again to move to the other settings (Maximum Test Value, Timer, and
Frequency).
Use the keys or + keys as needed to adjust the values.
5. When settings are complete, press the button.
6. Now, press the + buttons while in the READY state to display the Optional
function setting screen. This is so we can enable the Pass/Fail Hold function. The first digit is the
Output Current Frequency. It will be 0 if you left it at 50 Hz, or 1 if you left it at 60 Hz in step
GE HEALTHCARE
4 above. The second digit is the Pass/Fail hold function.
7. Press the key or the key until the second digit from the left is flashing, then press
the key to change the value to a 1. Press the + buttons again to save this
setting and return to the READY state. Now the unit will display and hold the measured resistance
value after the test.
Illustration 15-9:
2.4.1.4 Setting Offset of the Test Measurement Cables

Zero adjustment is only possible between 0.000 and 0.100 Ohms. If the test cables used are too
resistive, the offset cannot be set. Use a less resistive cable and redo the offset setting.
Measurements may be affected by a voltage drop in the A and B cables. Zero adjustment is
necessary for accurate measurement. The 0ADJ lamp is lit while the zero adjustment function is
active. Following zero adjustment, the A and B cables’ voltage drop is accounted for in returning
measurement data. Note that the zero adjustment function is automatically disabled if the output
current value is changed or when data settings are changed.
1. Zero Adjustment Procedure:

Illustration 15-10:
Confirm that the unit is in READY state, then short circuit cable A with cable B.
2. Press the button. The orange indicator is displayed, and the 0ADJ indicator
starts flashing below the resistance value, then the zero adjustment is executed.
Note that a preset current is output during zero adjustment thru the shorted leads.
Zero adjustment is completed in about 3 seconds. On completion, the unit enters READY state, and
the 0ADJ lamp lights.

GE HEALTHCARE
Illustration 15-11:
Zero adjustment is possible within a range equivalent to a resistance between 0.000 Ohms and
0.100 Ohms, on the resistor indicator. If the measured value falls outside this range, the resistance
value will blink, and the unit will enter the READY state.
2.4.1.5 Measurements
1. Connect cable A to Ground point A (SPGP ground bar).
2. Connect cable B to Measurement point B (per Illustration 15-14 and Table 16-2).
3. Make measurements according to Illustration 15-14 and Table 16-2.
4. To start the test, press the green button.
Illustration 15-12:
5. The orange indicator is displayed, the Test Current display value quickly increases from
0.0 to the preset output current (25.0A or 30.0A), then the timer counts down from 5.0 seconds to
0.0 seconds. If the test passes, the green indicator is displayed, and you can record the
displayed resistance value (example: 0.029 ohms in Illustration 15-13 below).

GE HEALTHCARE
Illustration 15-13:
6. Press the red button, move cable B to the next item to be tested, then repeat steps 4
and 5 above.
2.4.2 Grounding resistance measurement
2.4.2.1 Measurement method

1. This test must be performed with the product disconnected from the line power.
• System Cabinet Power switch OFF.
• A1 Panel Ground disconnected from System Cabinet ground bar.
The measurement time (current applied to the load) shall not exceed the time necessary to
have a stabilized reading on the measurement tool (typically, ≤ 5 seconds).
2.4.2.2 Acceptance limits

1. Voltage must not exceed 2.5 V (0.1 ohms).
2. The test instrument is measuring the true voltage across the resistance to be measured
regardless of the resistance of the measuring leads.
2.4.2.3 Ground measurements

1. On each location, check that all Y/G ground cables are secured tightly on the ground bar.

GE HEALTHCARE
Illustration 15-14: System Ground Connections
2. Measure and record the ground resistances at the following locations:
2.4.3 Test Point
NO TEST POINT Expected Value (Ω) Measure Value (Ω) RESULT

1 Door of system cabinet 0.2
2 Foot pedal bracket of table 0.2
3 Ion chamber fixed bracket of 0.2
table
4 Metal cover inside housing of 0.2
wallstand
5 OTS console bracket 0.2
6 PC earth terminal 0.2
7 Screw of TIB earth terminal 0.2
8 Screw of Wall Box 0.2

GE HEALTHCARE
2.5 Finalization
Re-connect the A1 Panel ground lead to the System Cabinet Ground Bar.

GE HEALTHCARE

GE HEALTHCARE
Chapter 16 Trim Cover Installation

• Install OTS trim covers
• Install Table covers
• Install Wall Stand covers
Chapter 16 - Trim Cover Installation Page 259

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 2.0 Install OTS Trim Covers

2.1 Preparation
1. Install the carriage shipping bolt through the bridge rail and into the carriage to prevent
the OTS carriage from moving during installation of the covers. See Illustration 16-1.
Illustration 16-1: OTS Carriage Shipping Bolt
NOTE: When installing or adjusting the brackets on the OTS front and rear covers, place the
covers on the plastic shipping bags to prevent any cosmetic damage to the covers
2.Attach the Front Cover Support Bracket on the front of the OTS casting using qty (4) 46-
328431P2 washers and qty (4) 46-328417P11 screws. See Illustration 16-2.
Illustration 16-2: OTS Front Cover Support Bracket
Page 260 Section 2.0 - Install OTS Trim Covers

GE HEALTHCARE
3. Attach the Left Side Mounting Bracket on the left side (head-end) of the OTS casting using qty
(2) 46-328430P3 washers and qty (2) 46-328417P11 screws. See Illustration 16-3.
Illustration 16-3: OTS Left Side Mounting Bracket
4.Attach the Right Rear Support Bracket on the right side (foot-end) of the OTS casting using qty
(2) 46-328430P3 washers and qty (2) 46-328417P11 screws. See Illustration 16-4.
Illustration 16-4:OTS Right Rear Support Bracket
5.Attach the baffle covers to the largest OTS column above the cable bracket at the rear of the
column. Slide the baffle down until it touches the top of the cable bracket, then tighten the four
screws.
6.Attach the Rear Mounting Bracket using qty (4) 46-328417P11 screws and the Left and Right
Alignment Brackets using qty (4) 46-328430P3 washers and qty (4) 46-328417P11 screws on the
Back Cover. See Illustration 16-5.
Illustration 16-5:OTS Back Cover

GE HEALTHCARE
7.Install the Front Mounting Bracket and the Left and Right Side End Mounting Brackets using qty
(8) 46-328430P3 washers and qty (8) 46-328417P11 screws on the Front Cover. See Illustration
16-6.
Illustration 16-6:OTS Front Cover
8. Remove the carriage shipping bolt previously placed through the bridge rail.

GE HEALTHCARE
2.2 OTS Cover Installation Procedure:
1. Lift the Front Cover and slide the slot in the front mounting bracket onto the lip of the Front
Cover Support Bracket on the front of the OTS carriage. See Illustration 16-7.
NOTE: Ensure that the tube has been moved down sufficiently to allow the front cover to hang
freely without touching it.
Illustration 16-7:OTS Front Cover on Front Cover Support Bracket
2. Position the Front Cover, adjusting the cable drape, to its final position. The bottom of the front
cover should be underneath the baffle. Ensure that cables underneath the cover are positioned so
that they are not pushing outward onto the cover (otherwise the cover may flex, making it more
difficult to attach to carriage and cause gapping between it and the back cover). While supporting
the cover with one hand, attach the Right Side End Mounting Bracket to the Right Rear Support
Bracket using a washer and screw. See Illustration 16- 8.
Illustration 16-8:Attaching OTS Front Cover to Right Rear Support Bracket

Torque 7.9 Nm

GE HEALTHCARE
3. Attach the Front Cover’s Left Side End Mounting Bracket to the Left Side Mounting Bracket
using a washer and screw. See Illustration 16-9.
Illustration 16-9:Attaching OTS Front Cover to Left Side Mounting Bracket
Apply Loctite 243

Torque 7.9 Nm
4. Lift and position the Back Cover in place, sliding the alignment brackets on the cover sides into
the support brackets on the OTS carriage (on the right foot-end side the finger slides into the
square cutout of the right rear support bracket, on the left side it rests on top of the left side
mounting bracket). The bottom of the back cover should be underneath the baffle and the front of
the back cover should engage with the lip at the rear of the front cover on both sides. Align so that
any gap between the front and back covers where they meet on the sides is minimized. Attach the
Rear Mounting Bracket of the Back Cover to the OTS carriage using 2 screws with applying Loctite
242 or 243 and Torque 38 Nm. See Illustration 16-10.
Illustration 16-10:Positioning OTS Back Cover.
5. Position the ladder in front of the OTS. Lift the front cover into position. Rest the left front
mounting bracket on the TSL (Tube Support Logic) assembly. Rest the right front mounting bracket
on the cable drape bundle. It may be necessary to rotate the left and right front mounting brackets
to obtain clearance between the cover and the TSL and/or cable drape bundle.
6. When the front cover is properly positioned, attach the front cover brackets to the OTS casting
with four screws and washers. Do not completely tighten the screws; just get them started in the
threaded holes. The bottom of the front cover should be underneath the baffle.
7. On the left side (head-end), slide the front cover pin into the cover pin receiver. Repeat on the
right side (foot-end). The cover can be flexed in order to slide the pins into the receivers.
8. Tighten the four front mounting bracket screws to the OTS casting and tighten the two screws
that attach the front mounting brackets to the OTS front cover.

GE HEALTHCARE
9. Position the ladder at the rear of the OTS. Lift the rear cover into position and slide the rear cover
pins into the cover pin receivers. Attach the rear cover bracket to the OTS casting with two screws.
If the mounting bracket holes do not line up with the threaded holes in the casting, the rear mounting
bracket can be loosened from the cover adjusted as necessary. The bottom of the rear cover should
be underneath the baffle and the front of the rear cover should engage with the lip at the rear of the
front cover.
10. Rotate the column to check for interference. If interference occurs between the OTS Column
Cable Bracket and the front OTS Cover (see Illustration 16-11), adjust the OTS Column Cable
Bracket as shown in Illustration 16-12. Ensure that the bracket is not adjusted too high such that it
interferes with the Rotation Encoder.
Illustration 16-11: OTS Column Cable Bracket Interference
Illustration 16-12: OTS Column Cable Bracket Adjustment

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 3.0 Table Covers

The installation of the table covers requires the table top insert be removed to gain access to the
cover mounting screws.
3.1 Table Top Insert Removal
Impact and/or Pinch hazard.

When the table top bumper is removed, the table top can slide off of the table rails.
Use caution while moving the table top when the bumper is removed.
1. At one end of the table top, use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the bumper. See Illustration 16-
13.
Illustration 16-13: Underside Of Table Top
2. On the underside of the table top, remove the four M4 hex socket head screws (two on each end)
that secure the table top laminate insert to the table top frame. See Illustration 16-13.
3. Raise the insert out of the metal frame, then re-install the bumper on the end of the table top.
Page 266 Section 3.0 - Table Covers

GE HEALTHCARE
3.2 Lower Front and Rear Cover Installation
1. Start the four mounting screws a few turns. Illustration 16-14.
Illustration 16-14: Front And Rear Lower Cover Mounting Tabs
2. Slip mounting tabs on front and rear cover over screw heads (or hold cover in position and start
screw). See Illustration 16-14. Tighten all four cover mounting screws installed above. See
Illustration 16-15.
Illustration 16-15: Lower Rear Cover

GE HEALTHCARE
3.3 Lower End Cover Installation
1. Install the four lower end cover mounting screws a few turns. See Illustration 16-16.
Illustration 16-16: Lower End Cover Mounting Screws
2. Position the lower end cover as shown in Illustration 16-17 by slipping it under the front cover and
over the partially installed mounting screws.
Illustration 16-17: Lower End Cover Installation

GE HEALTHCARE
3. Rotate cover until it is vertical and secure by installing two upper mounting screws and tightening
the two lower mounting screws that were started earlier. See Illustration 16-18.
Illustration 16-18: Lower End Cover Installation
4. Verify that the rear lower cover is not touching the table elevating mechanism. See Illustration
16-19
Illustration 16-19: Cover Clearance Check

GE HEALTHCARE
3.4 Upper Front and Rear Cover Installation
NOTE: If above grade floor mounted cable trough is being used, it is possible that the upper table
covers could contact the cable trough when the table is driven to its lowest possible height.
The surface mount trough dimensions abutting the table base must meet the following dimensions:
No more than 3 inches high as measured from the floor and 1.5 inches from the table base. See
Illustration 16-20.
Illustration 16-20: Surface Mount Trough Clearance for Table Cover
Failure to adhere to this requirement will result in table cover damage and/or inability to calibrate
the table SID.
1. Install the upper front and rear covers with one screw in each upper corner. The screws do not
need to be tightened since the mid-covers will also use these screws to hold them in place. See
Illustration 16-21.
NOTE: The upper front cover has one long recess cut out to allow the front detector assembly
bearing to roll on the bearing strip. The upper rear cover has three small recesses cut out to allow
for the detector bearing rod supports.
Illustration 16-21: Upper Cover Installation

GE HEALTHCARE
2. Adjust cover in the left to right direction to equalize the gap between the upper and lower covers.
Illustration 16-22: Cover Gap Adjustment
3.5 Front and Rear Mid Cover Installation

NOTE: The front mid cover has a long cut out and the rear mid cover is solid.
1. Position the mid covers as shown in Illustration 16-23. Slide the grid tray out slightly to allow the
cover to be fitted over the detector handle.
NOTE: The table top must be moved to access these screws when the mid cover is on.
2. Secure mid covers with the same screws that were used to hold the upper front and rear covers.
Illustration 16-23.
Illustration 16-23: Mid Cover Installation
Verify that the top of the detector handle does not rub on the opening in the mid-cover. If necessary,
shim the cover to prevent rubbing.

GE HEALTHCARE
3. Adjust the front and rear mid covers to prevent rubbing on the detector housing. See Illustration
17-24.
Illustration 16-24: Mid Cover Gap Adjustment
3.6 Upper End Cover Installation

1. Position the upper end covers as shown in Illustration 16-25.
Illustration 16-25: Upper End Cover Installation

GE HEALTHCARE
2. Secure end covers with four screws, two in the upper corners, see Illustration 16-25 and
Illustration 16-26 and two under the middle lip, see Illustration 16-27.
Illustration 16-26: Upper End Cover Mounting Screws
Illustration 16-27: Upper End Cover Mounting Screws

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 4.0 Wall Stand Covers

1. Install the detector housing side covers – 4 screws in each cover. See Illustration 16-28.
Illustration 16-28: Detector Housing Side Cover
2. Remove the front cover mounting brackets from the detector housing top cover and attach them
to the top of the detector housing front cover. The tapered side of the brackets go towards the
outside edges of the cover. See Illustration 16-29 and Illustration 16-30.
Illustration 16-29: Remove Front Cover Mounting Brackets
Illustration 16-30: Attach Front Cover Mounting Brackets to Top of Front

Cover
Page 274 Section 4.0 - Wall Stand Covers

GE HEALTHCARE
3. Remove the mounting bracket from the bottom of the detector housing and mount it to the bottom
of the detector housing front cover. See Illustration 16-31.
Illustration 16-31: Attach Bottom Bracket to Front Cover
4. Install the detector housing front cover – 4 screws in the top and 2 in the bottom. See Illustration
17-32 and Illustration 16-33.
Illustration 16-32: Detector Housing Front Cover - Top Screws
Illustration 16-33: Detector Housing Front Cover - Bottom Screws

GE HEALTHCARE
5. Connect the tilt brake switch cable to the lower rear cover. See Illustration 16-34.
Illustration 16-34: Tilt Brake Switch Connector
6. Install the lower rear cover with 4 screws. See Illustration 16-35.
Illustration 16-35: Detector Housing Lower Rear Cover
7. Install the upper rear cover with 4 screws. See Illustration 16-36.
Illustration 16-36: Detector Housing Upper Rear Cover

GE HEALTHCARE
8. Remove the column top cover screws. See Illustration 16-37
Illustration 16-37: Top Cover
9. Install the column rear cover. See Illustration 16-38.

Illustration 16-38: Rear Cover
Some of the springs has been installed in the WS Column Back Cover
Meanwhile, in the WS package kit, there are more individually packing
springs are as backup parts if the installed spring is destroyed.
10. Move the wall stand carriage to the top position.

GE HEALTHCARE
11. Install the column lower front cover. See Illustration 16-39.
Illustration 16-39: Lower Front Cover
12. Move the wall stand carriage to the bottom position.

13. Install the column upper front cover. See Illustration 16-40.
Illustration 16-40: Upper Front Cover

GE HEALTHCARE
14. Re-install the screws on the column top cover.

GE HEALTHCARE

GE HEALTHCARE
Chapter 17 Leakage Current Measurements

Note: This section is to be performed by the local field engineer.
Refer to Direction 46–014546 (Electrical Safety – Leakage Currents) which is included on the
system Service Documentation CDROM (5743851-2EN) as detailed reference material.
When a system installation is completed, it must be inspected for leakage current levels by qualified
personnel. A record of the inspection should be made and kept. To ensure the continued electrical
safety of the system, the testing is then performed annually under the system Periodic Maintenance
tasks.
Specification for Chassis Leakage Current, Fixed Equipment:

The leakage current must not exceed the following limits:
• Patient Care Vicinity General and Critical Care – Not to exceed 500 microamps.
Note: The test procedures below contain the specific tool setup and procedure instructions to use with the
Fluke ESA612 test meter and the Dale 601/601E test meter. Refer to device’s user manual for setup
details if instead using an equivalent testing device.
Note: “equivalent” means that the tool is designed to be capable of performing tests to both the standard
of IEC 62353 and the earth leakage current of IEC 60601-1.
Section 1.0 Personnel Requirements

Requirements
Table 17-1
Section 2.0 Prerequisites

TO SATISFY REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS, ALL SUB-SYSTEMS MUST BE INSTALLED
WHEN PERFORMING THE LEAKAGE CURRENT TESTING
This test MUST be performed under two specific conditions as follows:

1. System Power OFF and Electrically Isolated from the hospital mains.
a. System Cabinet Power Switch in the OFF position AND the A1 Panel Ground lead
disconnected in the System Cabinet.
Chapter 17 - Leakage Current Measurements Page 281

GE HEALTHCARE
2. System Power ON.
a. A1 Panel Ground CONNECTED in the System Cabinet.
3. Complete room layout sketch to identify locations of tested components. See Figure 17-1
Illustration 18-1: Room Layout Sketch
Common Prerequisites
1. All System Covers have been installed.
2. All electrical and ground connections have been verified and Grounding Resistance Testing (See
Chapter 15) completed and within specifications of less than 0.2 ohms
Safety
Page 282 Section 2.0 - Prerequisites

GE HEALTHCARE

VOLTAGE PRESENT.
PANEL GROUND WIRE.
2.1 Procedure using Fluke ESA612
2.1.1 Test Equipment Setup – Fluke ESA612
• How to connect the Tool

1.) Connect power cord
2.) Connect red test lead to red input jack (V/Ω/A)
3.) Connect black test lead to black input jack
• Power on the Tool

- Press the power switch on the left-side panel so the “I” side of the ac power switch is
depressed. The tool will perform a series of self tests and then display the message
shown as below picture when the self test has completed successfully.
• Setting the test standard to IEC 62353

- The tool is designed to perform electrical safety testing based on a number of different

GE HEALTHCARE
safety standards: AAMI ES1/NFPA99, IEC62353, IEC60601-1, and AN/NZS 3551. AAMI
is the Analyzer’s default standard.
- To select the IEC 62353 standard:
1.) Press “Setup”.
2.) From the setup menu, press “F4” button under the softkey labeled “More” to reveal
additional menu selections.
3.) Press “F2” button under the softkey labeled “Instrument” to reveal the instrument
setup selections.
4.) Press “F1” button under the softkey labeled “Standard” to open the scroll box above
the softkey label.
5.) Press button of UP or Down to scroll through the standard selections.

6.) When the desired standard is displayed, press “F1” button under the softkey labeled
“Standard” to confirm the standard.
7.) Press “F4” button under the softkey labeled “Done” to completed the standard setup.
F1 F2 F3 F4
• Accessing the tool’s Leakage current test interface

1.) Press “POINT TO POINT” button to access below interface
- Press “F3” button under the softkey labeled “Leakage” to access Leakage current

GE HEALTHCARE
interface
2.1.2 Test Procedure
• Earth Leakage Current Test

1.) Power off the system.
2.) Disconnect the system earth cable from cabinet earth terminal.
3.) Connect the alligator clip of the black test lead to system cabinet earth terminal.
4.) Connect the alligator clip of the red test lead to the disconnected system earth cable.
Figure 17-1 System earth cables from Cabinet to Hospital Power Supply
5.) Power on the system and record the leakage current value. The earth leakage current
value should not be greater than 10mA.
6.) Power off the system and reconnect the system earth cable to cabinet earth terminal.
Table 17-2 Earth Leakage Current Test

NO TEST POINT Expected Value Measure Value RESULT
(mA) (mA)
1 System earth cable 10

GE HEALTHCARE
• Touch / Patient Leakage Current Test

1.) Connect the alligator clip of the black test lead to system cabinet earth terminal.
2.) Power on the system.
3.) Connect the alligator clip of the red test lead to each of the test points defined for the
system.
4.) Record each of the leakage current values. The touch leakage current value should
not be greater than 100uA.
Table 17-3 Touch/Patient Leakage Current Test

(uA) (uA)
1 Door of system cabinet 100
2 Foot pedal bracket of table 100
3 Ion chamber fixed bracket of 100
table
4 Metal cover inside housing of 100
wallstand
5 OTS console bracket 100
6 PC earth terminal 100
7 Screw of TIB earth terminal 100
8 Screw of Wall Box 100
9 Tabletop metal frame -Patient 100
Leakage Current

GE HEALTHCARE
1.) Door of system cabinet
2.) Foot pedal bracket of table
3.) Ion chamber fixed bracket of table

GE HEALTHCARE
4.) Metal cover inside housing of wallstand
5.) OTS console bracket
6.) PC earth terminal

GE HEALTHCARE
7.) Screw of TIB earth terminal
8.) Screw of Wall Box
9.) Tabletop metal frame

GE HEALTHCARE
2.2 Procedure using Dale 601/601E
Test Equipment Setup – Dale 601/601E
NOTE: Other Leakage Current Measurement Equipment with equivalent function can be used to
test leakage current. When using other type of equipment, please refer to the operation manual for
the equipment.
1. Set the Dale 601 test meter as follows:

a. Function Switch = EXTERNAL.
b. Connect the BLACK coil cord with the CLAMP to the CHASSIS Connector on the top panel.
c. Connect the BLACK coil cord with the PROBE to the EXTERNAL connector on the top
panel.
d. Connect the Dale 601 test meter to a convenient power source within the patient care room.
(Standard hospital wall outlet, not a system powered outlet)
NOTE: Do not plug a device into the Dale 601 test meter or connect any patient leads to the
available terminals. The measurement circuit must remain isolated from ground.
Test Procedure
1. Connect the BLACK lead with the CLAMP to the System Cabinet Ground Buss (SPGP)
2. Using the BLACK lead with the PROBE connect to ALL conductive surfaces and record readings
in Table 17-4.
NOTE: ALL potential conductive surfaces within the Patient Care Vicinity as measured 1.8 m (6 ft)
beyond the device that supports the Patient during examination and treatment and extending
vertically 2.3 m (7 ft 6 in) above the floor. This includes door frames, windows, sinks, mirrors,
electrical outlets, etc.
This means measure or test any conductive surfaces 6 feet around the table, wallstand, or any
position for the Digital Cassette usage within the room.
The Patient Care Vicinity does not extend through walls, partitions, or floors.
Customer Name
Customer Address
Product Name
System ID
Test Equipment Name
Test Equipment Model/Serial Number
Test Equipment Calibration Due Date
Testers Name
Test Completion Date

Table 17-4 Sample Data Record – Leakage Current

GE HEALTHCARE
Table 17-5 Earth Leakage Current Test

(mA) (mA)
1 System earth cable 10
Table 17-6 Touch/Patient Leakage Current Test

(uA) (uA)
1 Door of system cabinet 100
2 Foot pedal bracket of table 100
3 Ion chamber fixed bracket of 100
table
4 Metal cover inside housing of 100
wallstand
5 OTS console bracket 100
6 PC earth terminal 100
7 Screw of TIB earth terminal 100
8 Screw of Wall Box 100
9 Tabletop metal frame -Patient 100
Leakage Current

GE HEALTHCARE

GE HEALTHCARE
Chapter 18 Software
Section 1.0 Before You Begin
Potential for Data Loss. Archive all protocols, patient files, and backup calibration and configuration
data. It's recommended that a system backup be performed prior to any installation, upgrade or
restoration of software. The installation of software can destroy existing files, including patient,
calibration and configuration files. You might have to configure and calibrate your system, if you do
not have a good backup to restore!
Chapter 18 - Software Page 293

GE HEALTHCARE

• System Data Backup and Restore
• Perform System Software Reload or Upgrade
• Sub-System Firmware/Software Download
* Perform Detector Downloads
* Perform Generator Download
* Perform Positioner Firmware Downloads
> OTS Firmware
> OTS UIF Firmware
> Wallstand Frimware
> Table Firmware
> RCIM Firmware
> Corona Firmware

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 3.0 System Data Backup and Restore

Files within the workstation PC and other subsystems need to be saved, if system software is
reload, upgraded or becomes corrupt. After system installation or in the event a subsystem failure
occurs, saved files can be restored in their original condition and location.
Backup Process
3.1 System Backup’s Coverage

The following data is part of a system backup:
• All Calibration Files

• All Configuration Files.
• HHS Results Files
• InSite Checkout Downloaded Files
• Custom Looks
• HIPPA Login and user accounts
• DICOM Printers/Preferences/Network Configurations.
• Repeat Reject Analysis (RRA) Preferences
• Option License
The following data is not included in a system backup:

• Archival of Image Data - Image archive is a purchasable option. The process for archiving
image data is found in the operators manual.
• Procedure Protocols - You only need to save the protocol data base (dBase) if you have made
changes to the default values. Defaults are always loaded during an SW installation. The
default protocol dBase is included with each system shipped. See the operators manual for
procedures.
• Repeat Reject Analysis (RRA) Data - RRA is a purchasable option. The process for saving
RRA data is found in the operators manual.

GE HEALTHCARE
3.2 Backup
3.2.1 Before You Begin

The backup utility is used to create a copy of system files, which are stored in various places
(subsystems and directories).
3.2.2 Procedure
1. From the application desktop, click on the Service Tools icon.
2. Click on [Launch] button.
3. Select the Utilities Tab,
4. Click on the plus sign preceding the System folder ICON, in the navigation frame.
5. Click on Backup link,

GE HEALTHCARE
6. Media Selection - CD media and USB flash drives are now supported.
* DVD media is supported for system backup and restore (If system configed more
than two URP detectors, backup media have to using DVD-R)
* USB flash drives must not contain any volume labels.
* Recommended USB flash size of 256mb or greater.
* Default media is CD Drive.
7. Insert your media.
8. Click on [START],
9. When backup is complete, you will see “backup successful” in the status bar.
10. Remove and label media.
11. Exit SUIF

GE HEALTHCARE
3.3 Restore

NOTE: If you wish to use a USB flash drive, select [USB DRIVE] and install drive into USB port
located on the front of the Magic PC.
• After the OS Configuration restore is run, the SUIF will no longer respond because of the files
that have been changed. A system Reset must be performed after restoring the OS
Configuration files to continue using the SUIF.
• Only one selection can be restored by execution of the following procedure. The following
procedure must be repeated for each item you wish to restore. There are nine system items
available to be restored. You must perform the procedure for each item to completely restore
all of the system’s files (calibration & configuration)
Available choices of in the backup CD or DVD are:
• You must have a “good” backup of the files you wish to restore.
• The “Backup” media can only be inserted after the restore utility screen is displayed.
Note: The detector calibration data Table_IDC and Wallstand_IDC can't be allowed to restore in
different system
3.3.2 Procedure
Potential for Data Loss. DICOM configuration information is not part of the backup. All DICOM
information should be kept written down and kept with system information. Use it later to manually
reconfigure DICOM, after the restore is completed.

GE HEALTHCARE
5. Click on Restore link,
6. Click on the down-arrow in the drop down box to display a drop down list of items.
7. Click on the item you wish to restore.
8. Insert your backup media.
9. Click on [START].
10. When restore is complete, you will see restore successful in the status bar.
11. Exit SUIF.

GE HEALTHCARE
3.4 System Protocol Backup and Retrieve
The protocol should be backup when after changed or edited, then it can be restored as the latest
version, the procedure please See 4.4.3.1 Save Protocol Data Base and 4.4.11 Restore Protocol
Data Base

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 4.0 System Software Reload and/or Upgrade

Required Persons Preliminary Reqs Procedure Finalization

1 5min 75 (Time estimate does not include saving 0min
and restoring patient images and/or
protocols files.)
Table 18-1
4.2 Overview
Before You Begin:
• The following times are typical for a complete system LFC:
5.) Five Minutes to backup system files to CD-RW or DVD-R.

6.) Approximately ninety minutes to save and restore images and protocols.
7.) Forty minutes to install the OS and Applications software.
8.) Thirty Minutes to load generator software
9.) Ten Minutes to restore system files from CD-RW or DVD-R.
10.)Five minutes to cleanup and return system to operational readiness.
• Only use this System Software load procedure to re-install and/or upgrade your system
software completely. The following procedure installs both the operating system, application
and Generator software.
• Pay particular attention, if instructed, to system resets. It's important that power be cycled
according to a specified procedure. Cycling power at the wrong time or by the wrong method
can result in a PC's operating file system (Linux) becoming corrupt. If the OS on the PC gets
corrupted, you may have to reload it again or start over.
• What happens when you press and hold the <reset> button on the RCIM? In less than one
minute, the system cycles all subsystem power “OFF” and then “ON” again:
1.) When the reset button is pressed, the RClM sends a signal to the I/O board (Corona)
to cycle (reset) system power.
2.) The I/O board then notifies software running on the PC that a shutdown is about to
begin.
3.) Software on the PC begins an immediate and orderly shutdown of software on the
PC.
4.) When 40 seconds has expired, the I/O board sends a command to shutoff all
subsystem power to the PDU.

GE HEALTHCARE
5.) Within ten seconds after all subsystem power is shut-off, the I/O board turns “ON” all
subsystem power again
6.) The PC then reboots and the system returns to operational readiness.
• The following SW procedure assumes that you are beginning with the System powered “ON”
and application software running (i.e. System Operationally Ready).

Linux Operating System Software DVD 1 - - -
System Applications Software DVD or CD 1 - - -
Table 18-2
4.3.2 Consumables

Empty/blank CD-R or DVD-R 2 - - -
Table 18-3
4.3.3 Safety
Potential for Data Loss.

• Use the Repeat Reject Analysis (RRA) Reporting Tool to export RRA data from the system
before performing LFC. The RRA data will NOT be retained on the system after LFC. Note:
This only applies if the site has purchased the RRA option. Refer to the Operator Manual for
details.
• Archive patient images you wish to keep.
• Backup protocols you wish to keep.
• Perform a “Save” of system configuration and calibrations data and label the CD-R or DVD-R.
• Do not press the <RESET> button on the RCIM, Unless you are instructed

GE HEALTHCARE

System must be 100% functional and operationally ready before - -
performing the following procedure
Table 18-4
4.4 Procedure
4.4.1 Are you performing a new system installation?
A.) Yes; start the procedure at Step 4.4.4 Load from Cold.
B.) No; continue on to the next step:Backup System Files.
4.4.2 Backup System Files.
a. From the application desktop, click on the Service Tools icon.
b. Click on [Launch] button.
c. Select the Utilities Tab,
d. Click on the plus sign preceding the System folder ICON, in the navigation frame.
e. Click on Backup link,
f. Insert your “Backup” CD or DVD into the CD/DVD drive.

GE HEALTHCARE
g. Click on the START button.
h. When the backup is complete, you will see Backup Successful in the status bar.
i. Remove CD or DVD from tray and label as “Cal/Config Backup” (include current date and time).
j. Place CD or DVD in safe location for future use.
4.4.3 Backup Protocol Data Base and System Images.
4.4.3.1 Save Protocol Data Base.

I.) From the Worklist screen, click Service Tools icon. The Service Tools screen will
appear.
II.) Select Preferences first and then Protocols, from the menu.

GE HEALTHCARE
III.) Insert a blank CD or DVD into the CD/DVD tray and close.
IV.) Click [Back up].

V.) A message will appear: Press OK to continue with Protocol Database back up.
VI.) Press [OK] after you see the message. The protocol database is saved to the CD-
RW/DVD-R.
VII.)Remove the CD or DVD from tray and label it as “Protocol Database” (include the
current date and time).
VIII.)Place the CD in safe location for future use
4.4.3.2 Save Images
NOTE: Pressing the eject button on the PC will not open the CD/DVD tray. While working with the
Image Management screen open, always use the eject option within the [CD1] drop-down list.
I.) Open the CD/DVD tray by selecting Eject from within the [CD1] drop-down list.
II.) Insert your blank CD-R or DVD-R into the tray.
III.) Now, select the exams you wish to copy.
IV.) Click on [CD1] as the destination. The CD Write screen will appear with the following
options:
> Deselect All - Deselects all exams on the list.
> Store Optimally - Automatically checks if the selected images will fit on the CD or
DVD. It will automatically deselect any items that cannot fit onto the CD or DVD.
> rite - Begins the copy process.
> Cancel - Closes the screen and returns you to the Image Management screen.
V.) Confirm that the exams to be copied are the ones you have chosen. Deselect any
exams you do not want saved to the CD-RW or DVD-R.
VI.) Click on [Write], using the mouse.

> The CD begins copying. You will notice the yellow light on the front of the
computer will flash, while data is being written to disk.
> To see the status of the exams being copied, click on [Transfer Log] located at

GE HEALTHCARE
the bottom of the Image Management screen.
> The transfer log screen will appear.
> Click on [Close] and return to the Image Management screen.
> When copying is complete, the CD/DVD tray will open and close.
VII.)Remove the CD or DVD from tray and label as Image Data (include current date and
time).
4.4.4 Perform the “Load from Cold”.
Do not press the RESET button on the RCIM, unless you are instructed to.
4.4.4.1 Load Linux Operating System (OS) software.
I.) Place the Linux Operating System DVD into the PC.
II.) Press and hold the RCIM RESET button for at least 3 seconds. You will hear a short
beep, and the system will begin to shut down and later reboot.
III.) When the PC “splash” screen is displayed, press <F9> on the keyboard.
IV.) When the boot Menu is displayed, select the Optical Drive option and press the
<Enter> key.
V.) When the Linux prompt appears, type: GEHCXR and then press the <Enter> key.
VI.) OS will auto reboot after installation and will enter linux desktop after the reboot.

GE HEALTHCARE
VII.) Select the cse-2.0.2xr of in the linux then click right button of the mouse and then
click the eject. See below picture.
VIII.)Remove the Linux Operating System DVD from the PC and close the CD/DVD drive
drawer.
4.4.4.2 Load Application Software
I.) After finishing OS installation, insert App SW CD into CD/DVD ROM

II.) Click “OK” while it autorun.
III.) Click " Run"

IV.) Select Discovery XR656 from the drop box
V.) Click the Install tab.

GE HEALTHCARE
VI.) After installation completed, it will show the successful message, Click OK.
VII.) After click OK it will display the reboot message, click Reboot to finish the SW App
installation

GE HEALTHCARE
4.4.5 Log into System
NOTE: Consult your Administrator for Account and Password information.
A.) Enter username.

B.) Enter password.
4.4.6 User Login Management

Please See Chapter19 Section8.0 System Login
4.4.7 Are you performing a new system installation?
A.) Yes, skip to Step 4.4.9: Load Generator Software

B.) No, proceed onto “Selectively Restore System Calibration and Configuration Files”
Next step 4.4.8.
4.4.8 Selectively (except Generator dB) Restore System Calibration and

Configuration Files.
NOTE: Do not restore the Generator dB files at this time. You will restore that file after the generator
software is loaded.

GE HEALTHCARE
A.) From the application desktop, click on the Service Tools icon.
B.) Click on [Launch] button.
C.) Select the Utilities Tab,
D.) Click on the plus sign preceding the System folder ICON, in the navigation frame.
E.) Click on Restore link,
f.) Insert your “Cal/Config Backup” CD or DVD into the CD/DVD drive.
g.) Click on the down-arrow in the drop down box to display a drop down list of items,
that can be selected.

GE HEALTHCARE
H.) Restore the Digital files
NOTE: You will repeat the following steps for each of the files in the list you restore. Do not restore
Generator Full DB at this time.
1.) Select the desired file; and with the mouse left click it.
2.) Click on [START].
3.) When you see Restore Successful in the status bar, continue onto the next file.

GE HEALTHCARE
I.) Restore IUI files.
J.) Restore Positioner files.
K.) Restore System Control files.
L.) Restore IP Looks files.
M.) Restore Table IDC files.
N.) Restore Wallstand IDC files.
O.) Restore Table Top
P.) Restore VolumeRAD Dose Recon files.
Q.) Restore Option Licence
NOTE: In the following step, after you successfully load the OS Configuration file, the SUIF will no
longer be responsive. You will perform a system reset, when instructed to continue.
R.) Restore OS Configuration files.
S.) Remove Cal/Config Backup CD.
T.) Press and hold the RCIM RESET button for 3 seconds. You will hear a short beep.
You will now re-initialize the system to recognize the restored calibration and
configuration files
U.) Log into the system, when prompted.
V.) Open the Service Desktop.

GE HEALTHCARE
W.) From the SUIF home page. verify that your current configuration accurately describes
the number of Detectors you have installed. The software load automatically defaults
to one Detector, unless you have done a successful restore and system reset.
4.4.9 Load Generator Software
A.) Select the [Subsystem Software] link.
NOTE: Allow the generator Software to completely load. Be patient, it’s important that you do not
interrupt the download process for the generator. The download consists of three parts: boot,
applications and database software downloads. All must be allowed to complete otherwise the
Generator may fail to boot and reach operational readiness.
B.) Select the [Generator Software Install] link. The download takes approximately about
30 minutes to complete.
C.) Verify the installation of all three components (boot, applications and database) of the
software installation completes successfully.
• Software installation progress is displayed on the status bar of the browser window. The first
character will cycle as follows: | / - \ | / - \ Giving the appearance of character rotation. The
percentage complete is also displayed.
• You should see the following screen messages, if successful:
Boot Image Being Installed
Boot Image Install Complete
Application Software Being Installed
Application Software Install Complete
Database Being Installed

GE HEALTHCARE
Database Install Complete
• If the kV control board diagnostic LEDS indicate normal operation, ignore any generator error
message(s) reported in the status bar. Occasionally, the generator will report a false positive
condition. If the diagnostic LED display on the generator looks like the following, the error
message can be ignored.
kV Control Board LEDs Indicating Operational Readiness
LED light sequence repeats by scrolling outwards and then inwards. Any other condition indicates
an error condition exists.
D.) Press [complete button.]
4.4.10 Restore the “Generator Full dB Calibration” Files.
A.) Insert the Cal/Config Back CD into the CD/DVD drive.
B.) Select the [Restore] link within the Utilities tab.
C.) Select Generator Full DB from the drop down list.
D.) Press [Start]
E.) After you see Restore Successful displayed in the status bar, you may continue onto
the next step.
F.) Remove the Cal/Config Backup CD.
G.) Press and hold the RCIM RESET button for at least 3 seconds. You will hear a short
beep. You will now re-initializing the system to recognize the new calibration and
configuration files you have restored

GE HEALTHCARE
H.) Log into the system.
4.4.11 Restore Protocol Data Base
A.) From the Worklist screen, click the Service Tools icon. The Service Tools screen
appears.
B.) Select [Preferences] and then [Protocols].
C.) Insert the CD with the saved protocols database into the CD/DVD drive.
D.) Click the [Retrieve] button.
E.) A message appears: Press OK to continue with Protocol Database retrieve.
F.) Click the [OK] button. The saved protocol database is now loaded onto your system.
G.) Remove the CD from the CD/DVD drive and store it in a safe place.
4.4.12 Restore System Images
A.) Use the [CD1] button to open the CD/DVD tray on the PC.
B.) Select Eject CD from the drop-down list. The CD/DVD drive tray will open.
C.) Place the CD or DVD with the images onto the tray and close.
D.) Click the [CD1] button. The exam list updates to now show you the images stored on
the CD.
E.) Select the exams you wish to retrieve. using the mouse.
F.) Click the [Local] button as the destination (located on the lower left corner of the
screen).
G.) A message appears: Images will be copied to the selected exam. Images will not
automatically be removed from the source exam.
GE HEALTHCARE
H.) Click [OK], when it appears.
* If there is a problem and the exams cannot be copied to the selected network host:
1.) A message appears: The network destination is not responding. If the problem
persists contact your network administrator.
2.) Click OK to close the message.
3.) Try copying the exams at a later time.
* To see the status of the exams being copied:
1.) click [Transfer Log] at the bottom of the Image Management screen.
2.) The Transfer Log screen appears.
3.) Click the [Close] button to close the screen and return to the Image Management
screen.
4.5 Finalization
Restore Country Code Manually.

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 5.0 Detector Registration

• URP+ Detector shall be registered first before start using
• Detector Registration shall be connected with tether cable
• UI Utilities – System- Wireless Detector – Detector Registration, Click Edit
• Click Add button

GE HEALTHCARE
• There are two different detector adding method – By Name, or “Color and Shape”
• Select one method to register detector, if selecting Color and Shape method, need to paste
the corresponding label. If selecting Name mode, need to write the name on the detector
• Before the selection, please confirm with hospital to ask them which method is preferred
• 1 Detector could be registered up to 20 systems, 1 system could register up to 10
detector
• After the registration completed, the URP+ Detector will be added into the list
Page 318 Section 5.0 - Detector Registration

GE HEALTHCARE
5.1 Detector Bumping
• Detector Bumping function will automatically record the drop event of URP+ detector, it could
be saved in health page

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 6.0 Sub-System Firmware/Software Download
Note: All of the subsystem firmware download have to complete during installation. but need
be careful the system power can’t be turn-off during download.
6.1 Detector Firmware/Detector MicroController Download
Procedure:
5. Follow the on-screen instructions as presented by the tool.

GE HEALTHCARE
6.2 Generator (Jedi) Application Software
Procedure:
Follow the on-screen instructions as presented by the tool.
Note: default was 65KW with system shipping to site, allow to download 50KW or 80KW software,
but that has to match with generator licence.
6.3 Positioner Components
Select the needed firmware download options, or click “Select all” button to choose all the firmware,
and then click “Start” button to start the firmware download.

GE HEALTHCARE
• Select needed Firmware to start download

a.) OTS Firmware
b.) OTS UIF Firmware
c.) Wallstand Firmware
d.) Table Firmware
e.) RCIM Firmware
f.) Corona Firmware
After Firmware download completed, it will show the message about if the download process is
successful or not
1: The amplifier flash download maybe fails by using SUIF tool, and if it fails, amplifier firmware can't
be downloaded again by using SUIF tool.
2: Order the corresponding spare part to solve the issue if any amplifier flash download fails.
For OTS column, vertical, longitudinal and lateral amplifier, the P/N is 5140713-3, and for angulation
amplifier, the P/N is 2391155
3: If the new Dunker Motors (Vertical and Lateral on OTS) have been installed in OTS, there is a
extra procedure to download the firmware. Please refer to 5343954-1EN Replacement Procedure
& IPL manual

GE HEALTHCARE
Chapter 19 Configuration
Section 1.0 When to Perform System Configuration
Potential for Data Loss:

1. Always create an up-to-date backup of your system data following product installation or changes
to configuration data.
2. Upon exiting the Service User Interface (SUIF), for Configuration and Calibration information to
take effect, the system must be reset. This must be done before the system is used for patient
acquisitions.
1.1 During System Installation

Your system is delivered to you configured to default values. You should configure your system to
the values that are appropriate for your particular installation. The items that must be configured are
identified in Table 2-1.
Comments System Configuration Parameter

See System Configuration Tool Site
Parameters. General
Positioner
Generator
See DICOM Configuration. DICOM
See Installing Demo Images. Demo Images
See Operator Manual (OM) Installation. Operator Manual
See Adding a Bar Code Reader (HHP Bar Code Reader (Option)
IMAGE TEAM 3800/3900).
See System Login (HIPPA). System Login (HIPPA)
Table 19-1 System Configuration Parameters
1.2 Missing or Lost System Backups

If you perform a software install and do not restore configuration files, you must re-perform all of
configurations listed in, after it’s complete. A software install resets all configuration data. If you
performed a [backup] before you began the software install, you are not required to perform the
configuration and calibrations. Simply [restore] the data saved previously
Chapter 19 - Configuration Page 323

GE HEALTHCARE
1.3 Addition of Purchased Options
Installation of purchased options can only be performed by your authorized GE sales and service
representative. If you add purchased options to your system, you should update the system
configuration files immediately and create and save a new backup.
1.3.1 Option License Simple Introduction

1.) Option License includes Media License and E-license
2.) Option license type includes Permanent type and Flex-trial type
3.) After it’s loaded in the system, Media CD with license file will automatically bonded to
system PC Host ID
4.) Option license could be backup/restored if the PC or Motherboard is not replaced
5.) Option license could be installed by hospital (Only need Class A access)
6.) E-license generation access is only opened to few OLEs in every region
7.) 1 license CD only contains 1 license, need to install the option one by one
Note: If the magic PC Z400 has been replaced or its mainboard has been replaced, then the
option license have to re-apply again.
1.3.1.1 Option license list
NO OPTION NAME FLEX-TRIAL FUNCTION SUPPORT EXTENTION NON

NEEDED? PERMANENT WALL STAND? EXTENTION
LICENSE? WS?
1 Dual Energy Subtraction Yes Yes Yes Yes
2 Wallstand Image Pasting No Yes Yes Yes
3 Table Image Pasting Yes Yes NA NA
4 WS Volume RAD (Vertical Sweep) Yes Yes Yes Yes
5 WS Volume RAD (Horizontal Sweep) Yes Yes Yes No
6 WS Volume RAD Cross-table Yes Yes Yes Yes
7 Table Volume RAD Yes Yes NA NA
8 Auto Protocol Assist Yes Yes Yes Yes
9 Generator Power 50KW No Yes Yes Yes
12 Repeat reject analysis Yes Yes Yes Yes
13 Auto Field of view Yes Yes Yes Yes
14 Remove Patient Orientation DICON No Yes Yes Yes
Tag
Table 19-2

GE HEALTHCARE
1.3.1.2 Option License Installation Process
• Step1: Log in SUIF – Configuration – Option license – Install New option
• Step2: Select one installation mode. Manual is for e-license, CD/Media license is for Flex/
Permanent media license
• Step3: After the option license is installed successfully in PC, it will show the successful
message
• Step4: Press Option License in SUIF, it will show all installed option license. And press Enable/
Disable button to activate the options in the list

GE HEALTHCARE
1.3.2 Option License Installation Summary

1.) All installation processes are in SUIF
2.) Both Flex-trial installation and permanent options could be enable/disable without Service
key (class A level, customer could do it by themselves)
3.) Installation methods includes Manual (e-license) and Media mode (Includes permanent
type and flex-trial type)
4.) After installation of option license, need SW reset
1.3.3 Flex-trial Option Workflow -1

GE HEALTHCARE
Expiration after 1 hour, if click the Option licensing button, Pop up the message customer will have
two choices within 1 hour.
Notes:
1: The “Reset Later” button will be changed to gray and not available
2: Customer need to RESET machine first, and then could continue to use machine

GE HEALTHCARE
1.3.6 E-license Generation Process
1.) “Ctrl+Shift+F5” in to the service interface.
2.) Execute getHostId.sh script present in /magichome/xruser/bin and note down the output of the
same, for example: 19434XXXXX.
3.) Log in http://elicense.gehealthcare.com/elicense/ with SSO and password (Only few OLEs has
the access)
4.) Select any one item in the left drop box. Below instruction just use the System ID as the
example, in fact you can select the other item for your convenience.
5.) Choose Modality XRAY of in the right drop box

6.) Then click Go button

GE HEALTHCARE
7.) Click Generate new license button
8.) Enter the order number, or skip the step

GE HEALTHCARE
9.) Input the information in the website with the red star mark in License Type the Permanent or
Flextrial can be selected at here for example is Flextrial, and then click submit button.
Unit: Days
Note: have to provide the Host ID, so if replaced the magic PC Z400 or replaced main board,
the license has to re-apply again.
10.) Click Generate license

GE HEALTHCARE
11.) Click e-mail license button
12.) Enter the e-mail address and click Add button, the added mail address will be shown in this
page. Click continue
13.) The successful message will be displayed. Check the mail box after several minutes, the
generated e-license will be received.

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 2.0 Starting the System Configuration Tool

1.) Log into the system
NOTE: Consult your Administrator for Account and Password information
a.) Enter username
b.) Enter password
2.) From the application desktop, click on the Service Tools icon.
3.) Click on [Launch] button.
4.) Click on Configuration icon.
5.) In the left frame, click on the page icon associated with the configuration parameter
name you wish to change.

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 3.0 System Configuration Tool Parameters

3.1 Home Page Summary Tab
The Home page Summary information shall display site information, connectivity parameters, and
enabled options
3.2 Site Parameters

The following information can be viewed regardless of service mode. All can be edited, except for
those identified by an asterisk “*” (which require setup by GE personnel).
Parameter Definition
Site Name Name of specific location (Hospital, clinic...) where system is
installed (64 characters maximum)
Site Address Address of location system is installed (5 lines, and 64 characters
maximum per line)
Department Name Department name (i.e. Radiology) responsible for equipment
maintenance (64 characters maximum)
Telephone 64 characters maximum
Fax 64 characters maximum
Contact Person Name Customer or person responsible for maintenance of equipment.
One line, and 64 characters maximum.
Contact Person Phone Two lines, and 64 characters maximum per line
System ID* System identifier assigned by GE Healthcare following system
installation and prior to customer turnover. (64 characters
maximum)
Installation Date* Date system installation completed; created by GE Healthcare. (64
characters maximum)
Service Contract Number* Customer licensed Inhouse Service Contract number; created by
GE Healthcare. (64 characters maximum)
Contract Expiration* Licensed Inhouse Service Contract number expiration date;

created by GE Healthcare. (64 characters maximum)
AE Title 16 characters maximum

Port Number* 4 characters maximum
IP Address 16 characters maximum
Subnet Mask 16 characters maximum
Default Gateway 16 characters maximum Note: If the customer site does not have a
default gateway, use the default value loaded upon installation. The
field cannot be empty.
Table 19-3 Site Parameters

GE HEALTHCARE
3.3 General Parameters
TimeZone Allows the user to change/set system time zone.
System Clock Allows the user to change/set system date and time. The Date
format is defined as MM-DD-YYYY (default) or DD-MM-YYYY.
Time Format may be kept in a 24 hour format (hh-mm-ss) or 12
hour AM/PM format: (hh:mm:ss (AM/PM)). The default, 24 hour
format.
KeyBoard Choose the keyboard language appropriate for your installation.
United States is the default value.
For Finnish-speaking countries, select Swedish keyboard.
Country Code Choose the country appropriate for your installation. United States
is the default value
UWB Regulation Code Choose the UWB regulation code appropriate for your installation.
Factory Channel Setting for “UWB Regulation code” is null ( refer to
3.3.1)
Measurement System Used to define English or Metric as the system’s measurement
system. The default value is metric.
Application Language Defines the language (English, French, Spanish, German, and
Italian) used for applications screens. The default value is English.
QAP Timeout This item determines the interval between QAP test in days. Used
to inform system users that a QAP interval has expired and a QAP
test should be performed. The default value is 7 days. (Three
characters maximum)
VA Site This will configure the system for VA options.
Screen Blank Timeout Used to set the period of inactivity (where no user inputs and
processing activity occurs) in which screen blanking can begin. This
feature functions to prolong the life of the monitor, thus preventing
a burn-in. Time is selected in minutes. The default value is 15
minutes. (4 characters maximum)
Image Mask Adjustment Adjusts the mask that is applied to the acquired image from the
detector. It affect Raw and Processed images.
Monitor 1 Serial, Install Data Monitor 1 information for remote analysis and trending data.
& Time
Monitor 2 Serial, Install Data Monitor 2 information for remote analysis and trending data.
& Time
Table 19-4 General Parameters

GE HEALTHCARE
3.3.1 UWB Regulatory Code
Procedure: SUIF -> Configuration-> General-> UWB Regulatory Code
NOTE: Error message appears when channel setting is not initialized selected by installation site.
Message says ”UWB Regulation code is not configured”. Wireless Detector exposure will be
inhibited
NOTE: Please pay attention and have to accurate selects in "Country-Wireless Regulation
code” according to local site of each country has different wireless regulation requirement
for UWB frequency band/channel allocation.
3.3.2 UWB Regulatory code list
North America-US-FCC EU-Italy-EU Asia-China-EU

North America-Canada-EU EU-Austria-EU Asia-Hong Kong-EU
North America-Mexico-FCC EU-Portugal-EU Asia-Taiwan-EU
South America-Argentina-FCC EU-Denmark-EU Asia-Japan-Japan-Korea
South America-Venezuela-FCC EU-Czech Republic-EU Asia-South Korea-Japan-Korea
South America-Peru-FCC EU-Netherlands-EU Asia-Singapore-EU
Table 19-5

GE HEALTHCARE
South America-Columbia-FCC EU-Belgium-EU Asia-Indonesia-EU

South America-Costa Rica-FCC EU-Sweden-EU Asia-Malaysia-EU
South America-Panama-FCC EU-Finland-EU Asia-Pakistan-EU
South America-Bahamas-FCC EU-Lithuania-EU Asia-Thailand-EU
South America-Bahrain-FCC EU-Poland-EU Asia-Vietnam-EU
South America-Chile-FCC EU-Greece-EU Asia-Cambodia-EU
South America-Ecuador-FCC EU-Malta-EU Asia-Philippine-EU
South America-Jamaica-FCC EU-Cyprus-EU Asia-Laos-EU
South America-Puerto Rico-FCC EU-Latvia-EU Asia-Tajikistan-EU
South America-Caribbean Island-FCC EU-Luxembourg-EU Asia-Turkmenistan-EU
South America-Bolivia-FCC EU-Slovakia-EU Asia-India-EU
South America-Honduras-FCC EU-Estonia-EU Asia-Afghanistan-EU
South America-Nicaragua-FCC EU-Romania-EU Asia-Uzbekistan-EU
South America-Paraguay-FCC EU-Bulgaria-EU Middle East-United Arab Emirates-
EU
South America-Uruguay-FCC EU-Ireland-EU Middle East-Qatar-EU
South America-Trinidad/Tobago-FCC EU-Hungary-EU Middle East-Saudi Arabia-EU
EU-UK-EU EU-Moldova-EU Middle East-Jordan-EU
EU-France-EU EU-Turkey-EU Middle East-Kuwait-EU
EU-Martinique (France)-EU EU-Bosnia-EU Middle East-Lebanon-EU
EU-Germany-EU EU-San Marino-EU Middle East-Palestinian-EU
EU-Spain-EU EU-Montenegro-EU Middle East-Syrian Arab Republic-EU
EU-Monaco-EU West Europe-Croatia-EU Africa-South Africa-EU
EU-Azerbaijan-EU East Europe-Russia-EU Africa-Nigeria-EU
EU-Andorra-EU East Europe-Ukraine-EU Africa-Tanzania-EU
EU-Liechtenstein-EU East Europe-Serbia-EU Australia-New Zealand-EU
EU-Albania-EU East Europe-Georgia-EU Australia-Australia-Pending
West Europe-Iceland-EU East Europe-Kazakhstan-EU East Europe-Slovenia-EU
West Europe-Switzerland-EU East Europe-Kyrgyzstan-EU
West Europe-Norway-EU East Europe-Belarus-EU
West Europe-Macedonia-EU East Europe-Armenia-EU
Table 19-5

GE HEALTHCARE
3.3.3 Non Wireless Configuration
For the countries where wireless communications applications are not allowed by the regulations,
the FlashPad wireless detector shall be used under Tether Only Mode by selecting the wireless
regulatory code during configuration in SUIF. So that it can conform to the local laws and
regulations
Procedure: SUIF -> Configuration-> General-> Wireless Regulatory Code, selected HongKong for
example, after selected reset system.
Note: Non Wireless Configuration system is not available wireless detector and have not got any wireless
(UWB) items in SUIF

GE HEALTHCARE
3.3.4 Some different wireless with Non Wireless Configuration
Wireless system Non Wireless Configuration system
Removed the information related to UWB adapter
Removed the diagnostics for wireless detector

Table 19-6

GE HEALTHCARE
Removed the configuration for signal strength
Changed the detector download method from Wireless to

Tether
Table 19-6
3.3.5 Update UWB configuration

• If a country’s UWB regulatory stance has changed since release, the customer will get a letter
explaining that they have to download a file from the Common Documentation Library onto a
CD/DVD/USB drive. Then plug it into the system, go to the UWB Configuration page and press
the update button. That will update the country list. After the update is complete, the current
configuration will reset to NONE. Then they can reset the software and configure UWB.
• If their country is not on the list and there is no letter sent to them, UWB won’t work or they will
select an invalid country (There is nothing we can really do about this, but this has been a
known limitation.)

GE HEALTHCARE
Click Start button

GE HEALTHCARE
3.3.6 Date, Time and NTP Settings

GE HEALTHCARE
If the system clock is set to use UTC, select the System clock uses UTC option. UTC stands for the
Universal Time, Coordinated, also known as Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). Other time zones are
determined by adding or subtracting from the UTC time
• a. If’ System Clock uses UTC’ is not checked, then the system time standard for the time that
use user set, no time zone calculation.
• b. If’ System Clock uses UTC’ is checked, then the system time will be regarded as UTC and
the system time will be set as UTC +/- time zone.
Click Help for more information.
3.4 Positioner Parameters
Parameter Meaning
Wallstand Ion Chamber Allows you to choose between a 3-cell or 4-cell (optional) Ion
Chamber. The default is “Choose One”.
Collimator Light Maximum The amount (maximum) of time you wish to have the collimator field
ON Time lights illuminate. Value are entered as two digit value in seconds.
Range: Minimum = 5 seconds, Maximum = 90 seconds. Default
shall be 90 seconds.
If a value entered is not within the allowable range, an error
message is displayed on the Acquisition Console.
Table 19-7 Positioner Parameters

GE HEALTHCARE
Parameter Meaning
Wallstand Auto Tracking Do you wish to have the tube automatically track Wall Stand
position? Lets you enable or disable the OTS auto-tracking to WS
receptor movement. The default setting is YES.
Full Collimator Message Turn “on” to display full text for inhibit conditions on the collimator’s
Display display. Turn “off” to display shortened text for inhibit conditions on
collimator display.
OTS-Table Receptor Allows you to choose desired SID Detent positions between the
Detents Table and OTS. Single or multiple predefined or user defined
values. Default value is 102 cm
Custom values are limited to 3 characters maximum. Range:

Minimum = 0, Maximum = 999.
message is displayed on the Acquisition Console
OTS-0 Degree WS Receptor Allows you to choose SID Detent positions between the OTS and 0
Detents degree WS Receptor. Default value is 183 cm.


OTS-90 Degree WS Allows you to choose SID Detent positions between the OTS and
Receptor Detents 90 degree WS Receptor. Single or multiple predefined or user
defined values allowed. Default value is 102 cm.


Wallstand Velocity Vertical Allows you to choose wallstand vertical velocity in mm/second.
Travel Range: Minimum = 2, Maximum = 70, Default value is 70
Table 19-7 Positioner Parameters

GE HEALTHCARE
3.5 Generator Parameters
The following items configure the “Jedi” Generator for use.
Tube Configuration This is not a configuration item. Tube identification is obtained from
the GetStaticId Command sent to the generator.
Tube HUR Alarm This item configures the percentage of the tube thermal capacity
which can be reach, so that the exposure can be inhibited. The
range is 20% to 100%. Default is 20%. Values entered cannot
exceed 2 characters maximum.
Tube ID This is not a configured item. Identification is obtained from the
GetStaticId Command sent to the generator.
Tube Serial Number, Install Enter tube information upon tube installation or replacement.
Date and Time
KV Control Board ID This is not a configured item. Identification is obtained from the
Rotor Board ID This is not a configured item. Identification is obtained from the
Heater Board ID This is not a configured item. Identification is obtained from the
HV Tank ID This is not a configured item. Identification is obtained from the
Inverter ID This is not a configured item. Identification is obtained from the
AC-DC Inverter This is not a configured item. Identification is obtained from the
Interface Board ID This is not a configured item. Identification is obtained from the
Table 19-8 Generator Parameters

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 4.0 DICOM Configuration

See the Operator’s Manual for instructions on how to configure DICOM on this system.
The following worksheets should be used to capture and archive your system’s DICOM
configuration for future reference. Records configuration information in the work sheets that follows.
Place worksheets in a safe place so that they may be referenced in the future if needed.
4.1 Network Hosts
4.1.1 Host Tab
Attribute Host Device 1 Host Device 2 Host Device 3

Host Label
Application Entry Title
IP Address
Port Number
Query Retrieve
Storage Commitment
Storage Commitment -
Application Entry Title
Storage Commitment - IP
Address
Storage Commitment - Port
Number
Comments
Table 19-9 Host Tab
4.1.2 Preference Tab

Values for each network node are configured using the Workstation PC. Generally, options 1, 2 and
3 are enabled (checked) for remote viewing stations, PACS, etc...
• Option 1 - Check this option if the remote host being configured should be able to Query and
get a response of a list of images on the workstation PC.
• Option 2 - Check this option if the remote host being configured should be able to Retrieve any
of images returned on the image list (pull) from the workstation PC.
• Option 3 - Check this option if the remote host being configured should be able to Send / Push
any of the images in its local database to the workstation PC.
• Option 4 - This option will never be used since the workstation PC does not yet generate multi-
frame images.

GE HEALTHCARE
• Option 5 - Checking this option will cause the workstation PC to strip out all patient information
in the images being sent to the remote node being configured. Same as de-identify and push
automatically. Some installations may want to check this option for nodes being configured for
security purposes. For example, (if you do not want to divulge any patient information to the
people using this remote node).
• Options 6- should be checked / enabled.
• Options 7 & 8 - will be used only for the HIS / RIS system being configured. Option 7 should
be selected for the HIS / RIS system only if it has been configured to accept MPPS messages
from the magic.
• Options 8 - may not be implemented on your system yet. If it has not been implemented, please
ignore.
Option Attribute Value

1 Allow this host to query the (system name) =
2 Allow this host to retrieve from the (system name) =
3 Allow this host to send images to the (system name) =
4 This network host accepts multiple frame image. =
5 Perform de-identification (anonymous patient images) when =
sending to this network host.
6 Apply “Burn-On-Send” to images when sending to this =
network host. See PACs calibration for information. (PACS
Calibration & Test Image)
7 Send MPPS N-Create and N-Set notification to this network =
host.
8 Make this host the HIS/RIS source. (Only one host can be =
designated as the HIS/RIS source.)
Table 19-10

GE HEALTHCARE
4.2 Printers
Note: This is commendatory information only, please refer to the service manual of printer
for site.
4.2.1 Agfa Drystar 3000 Printer

1 Parameters
TAB ATTRIBUTE VALUE COMMENTS

Printer DICOM Printer Label DRYSTAR3000 Or customers preference
Application Entry Title Enter value given by Site Network Administrator AE Titles may be site
specific, be sure to check
on-site
Network Address Enter value given by Site Network Administrator
Port Number 104 Port number may be site
on-site
Pixel Depth 12
Printer Pixel Size (micron) 79.4
Configuration Information PERCEPTION_LUT=LINEAR (no spaces)
Density Min. = 20, Max. = 300
Magnification Type CUBIC
Smooth Factor 140
Trim NO Not Supported
Polarity NORMAL
Border Density BLACK
Empty Image Density BLACK
Printer Memory Size 40Mbyte
Layouts Select the desired layouts 1:1, 1:2, 2:1, 2:2
allowed for this printer
Slide formats Not Applicable Not supported: Do not
select
Film Sizes 8 x 10in Pixel Width = 2388 Pixel Height = 2972 AGFA Layout - Portrait 9006
10 x 12in Pixel Width = Pixel Height =
11 x 14in Pixel Width = 3300 Pixel Height = 4256 AGFA Layout - Portrait 9014
14 x 17in Pixel Width = 4256 Pixel Height = 5174 AGFA Layout - Portrait 2411
24 x 24cm Pixel Width = Pixel Height =
General Comments:
Supports Clear and Blue Film. If medium selected (Clear, Paper) does not match the printer, the job will be queued until the correct
film is loaded.
AGFA layouts are specific to maximum printable area layouts.
Please consult the AGFA technical representative to install custom layouts.
Only 14x17 film was tested with this printer.
Trim is not supported by this printer.
Note: Avoid print job failures by having printer vendor ensure that the Confirmation Level (DICOM Connectivity) at the printer is
set to Ø (accept all). Failure to set this level on the printer will result in failed print jobs.
Table 4-10 Printer Configuration Information for - Agfa Drystar 3000

GE HEALTHCARE
2 Print Layouts
Note: For accurate image sizing, a custom layout must be configured by printer vendor/
manufacture. In addition to the above layouts, the following layouts must be installed by the
authorized AGFA print representative:
Table 4-11 AGFA Print Layouts
FILM SIZE FORMAT P/L AGFA LAYOUT
14 x 17 1:1 P 2411
14 x 17 1:2 P 9001
14 x 17 2:1 P 9000
14 x 17 2:2 P 9002
14 x 17 1:1 L 2511
14 x 17 1:2 L 9003
14 x 17 2:1 L 9004
14 x 17 2:2 L 9005
11 x 14 1:1 P 9014
11 x 14 1:2 P 9102
11 x 14 2:1 P 9103
11 x 14 2:2 P 9104
11 x 14 1:1 L 9018
11 x 14 1:2 L 9202
11 x 14 2:1 L 9203
11 x 14 2:2 L 9204
8 x 10 1:1 P 9006
8 x 10 1:2 P 9009
8 x 10 2:1 P 9008
8 x 10 2:2 P 9010
8 x 10 1:1 L 9007
8 x 10 1:2 L 9012
8 x 10 2:1 L 9011
8 x 10 2:2 L 9013

GE HEALTHCARE
4.2.2 Agfa Drystar 5500
1 Printer Parameters

Printer DICOM Printer Label DRYSTAR5500 Or customers preference
on-site
on-site
Pixel Depth 12
Configuration Information LUT=0.0
Smooth Factor 140
Trim NO
Polarity NORMAL
select
Film Sizes 8 x 10in Pixel Width = 3852 Pixel Height = 4300
10 x 12in Pixel Width = 4880 Pixel Height = 5280
General Comments:
Table 4-12 Printer Configuration Information for - Agfa Drystar 5500

GE HEALTHCARE
2. Print Layouts
For accurate image sizing, a custom layout must be configured by printer vendor/manufacture . In
addition to the above layouts, the following layouts must be installed by the authorized AGFA print
representative:
FILM SIZE FORMAT P/L AGFA LAYOUT
14 x 17 1:1 P 2411
14 x 17 1:2 P 9001
14 x 17 2:1 P 9000
14 x 17 2:2 P 9002
14 x 17 1:1 L 2511
14 x 17 1:2 L 9003
14 x 17 2:1 L 9004
14 x 17 2:2 L 9005
11 x 14 1:1 P 9014
11 x 14 1:2 P 9102
11 x 14 2:1 P 9103
11 x 14 2:2 P 9104
11 x 14 1:1 L 9018
11 x 14 1:2 L 9202
11 x 14 2:1 L 9203
11 x 14 2:2 L 9204
8 x 10 1:1 P 9006
8 x 10 1:2 P 9009
8 x 10 2:1 P 9008
8 x 10 2:2 P 9010
8 x 10 1:1 L 9007
8 x 10 1:2 L 9012
8 x 10 2:1 L 9011
8 x 10 2:2 L 9013

GE HEALTHCARE
4.2.3 Fuji FM DPL Printer Parameters

Printer DICOM Printer Label FUJIFMDPL Or customers preference
on-site
on-site
Pixel Depth 12
Printer Pixel Size (micron) 100
Configuration Information CS000
Smooth Factor SHARP
Trim NO
Polarity NORMAL
Slide formats Not Applicable Not supported: Do not select
General Comments:
The following configurations must be configured by the Fuji printer representative to print correctly sized images:
• LUT1 as SAR17 for calling AE_TITLE.
• Trim width at 1 pixel for calling AE_TITLE.
• Globally configure “a margin between image” for 0 pixels.
• Globally configure “Image layout” for spread.

GE HEALTHCARE
4.2.4 Fuji DryPix 1000 Printer Parameters

Printer DICOM Printer Label DRYPIX1000 Or customers preference
on-site
Port Number 104 Port numbers may be site
on-site
Pixel Depth 12
Smooth Factor SHARP
Trim NO
Polarity NORMAL
select
General Comments:
• LUT1 as SAR17 for calling AE_TITLE.-Trim width at 1 pixel for calling AE_TITLE.
• A densitometer filter (FUJI part number 605S0003) must be used when performing printer calibration.

GE HEALTHCARE

on-site
on-site
Pixel Depth 12
Smooth Factor SHARP
Trim NO
Polarity NORMAL
select
Film Sizes 8 x 10in Pixel Width = Pixel Height =
General Comments:
• LUT1 as SAR17 for calling AE_TITLE.
• Trim width at 1 pixel for calling AE_TITLE.
• A densitometer filter (FUJI part number 605S0003) must be used when performing printer calibration.
CAUTION: ONLY 14x17 film should be used with this printer. Any other film size used may print films with incorrect
measurements.

GE HEALTHCARE

on-site
on-site
Pixel Depth 12
Smooth Factor SHARP
Trim NO
Polarity NORMAL
Slide formats
General Comments:
Table 4-18 Printer Configuration Information for - Fuji DryPix 7000

GE HEALTHCARE
4.2.7 Kodak 8200 Printer Parameters

Printer DICOM Printer Label KODAK8200 Or customers preference
on-site
on-site
Pixel Depth 12
Configuration Information LUT=Wkstn2a.w87,2 (no spaces)
Smooth Factor 15
Trim NO
Polarity NORMAL
Layouts Select the desired layouts 1:1, 1:2, 2:1, 2:2 1:2 only valid for portrait
allowed for this printer 2:1 only valid for landscape
select
General Comments:

GE HEALTHCARE

on-site
on-site
Pixel Depth 12
Smooth Factor 15
Trim NO
Polarity NORMAL
select
General Comments:

GE HEALTHCARE

on-site
on-site
Pixel Depth 12
Smooth Factor 15
Trim NO
Polarity NORMAL
select
General Comments:
The following configurations must be configured by the Kodak printer representative:
• Calling AE_TITLE must be declared in 9410 host table or print will be rejected.
• Pixel correction turned off.
• TFT emulation enabled.Landscape printing will be functional only if a Kodak 8800 is installed.
CAUTION: Customer will get incorrect image sizing if unsupported formats (i.e. portrait 2:1 or landscape 1:2) are used.

GE HEALTHCARE

on-site
on-site
Pixel Depth 12
Configuration Information LUT = Ver693c0.w87,6
Smooth Factor 40
Trim NO
Polarity NORMAL
Printer Memory Size 40Mbytes
Layouts Select the desired layouts 1:1, 1:2, 2:1, 2:2 Check at least one (1on1) or
allowed for this printer more as desired
Slide formats
General Comments:

GE HEALTHCARE
4.2.11 Codonics Horizon Printer Parameters

Printer DICOM Printer Label HORIZON Or customers preference
on-site
Port Number Enter value given by Site Network Administrator Port number may be site
on-site
Pixel Depth 12
Configuration Information LUT=LINEAR
Magnification Type REPLICATE
Smooth Factor 0 Not Supported
Trim NO
Polarity NORMAL
Border Density BLACK Can also pass OD
value of 0-310
Empty Image Density BLACK Can also pass OD
value of 0-310
Layouts Select the desired layouts
Slide formats
General Comments:
Codonics Horizon printer supports Clear Film, Blue Film and Paper.
Only 8 x 10 and 14 x 17 inch film formats have been validated.
Other Smoothing and Sharpening Algorithms for Magnification Type are supported.
Consult Codonics technical representative to install customer preferences if desired.
T bl 4 14 P i C fi i I f i f C d i H i

GE HEALTHCARE
4.2.12 CARESTREAM DryView 5850
• Set the network address to the value specified by the hospital network administrator.
• The “Density max” value depends of the film type
- o With DVM+ film type Density max=415
- o With DVM film type Density max=360 (see the following setup)

GE HEALTHCARE
4.2.13 KONICA 793
In order to function correctly with the GE system:
- the Konica 793 printer margin configuration must be set to TOP/BOTTOM = 3.5 mm, and LEFT/
RIGHT = 1.5 mm. If these margin settings are not configured on the Konica 793 printer, unexpected
border widths will be present in the printed images.”
- the Konica 793 printers must be configured to accept any film type, for that the parameter “Image
Size check” must be set to OFF in the printer.

GE HEALTHCARE
4.2.14 KONICA 873
In order to function correctly with the GE system:
- the Konica 873 printer margin configuration must be set to TOP/BOTTOM = 3.5 mm, and LEFT/
RIGHT = 1.5 mm. If these margin settings are not configured on the Konica 873 printer, unexpected
border widths will be present in the printed images.”
- the Konica 873 printers must be configured to accept any film type, for that the parameter “Image
Size check” must be set to OFF in the printer.

GE HEALTHCARE
4.2.15 SONY UP-DF750
• The printer default settings need to be changed during the installation. The default Frame Type
“Caption2” needs to be changed to “M-Wide2” by the installing Sony technician. This is because
these settings are used to configure the SONY printer for printing with the GE mammography image
size.

GE HEALTHCARE
4.3 Query Modality
4.3.1 Setting the Query Modality value to “CR”

The default setting for Query Modality is DX, but system allow select Modality CR by filter list
System allow to select default setting for Query Modality is DX or CR in the Preferences -Worklist

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 5.0 Installing Demo Images

Load demo images from CD-ROM provided with the system into the image database. Refer to
Operator’s Manual for procedure to upload images from CD.

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 6.0 Operator Manual (OM) Installation

The operator manual can be installed by the below steps:
• when the system is initially installed

• following a complete system load from cold
• following a software reload of the workstation PC
The procedure follows:
1. Verify that no archival process is running.
2. Verify that system is not in a state where Service Browser is invoked.
3. Press the following keys: <Cntrl><Alt><F2> simultaneously, to open a command window.
4. At the login prompt, enter account and password.

Note: Consult your Administrator for Account and Password information
5. Insert Operators manual CD (including the.pdf files and with two files of autorun.inf and
shell.bat) into the CD bay of Workstation PC.

GE HEALTHCARE
Note: The Operators manual CD must included two files: autorun.inf and shell.bat. If not the
wrong information will be appear
6. To run the inter-active script, at prompt type the following: ./xrdinstall.om
7. Answer the question: “Do you want to proceed? “. Type key “y” and type key “Enter”
8. Choose the “1” if you wish to install: See below picture
9. Enter exit at the prompt.
10. To return to the graphical user interface, press <Cntrl><Alt><F7> keys simultaneously.

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 7.0 Adding a Bar Code Reader (HHP IMAGE TEAM

3800/3900)
7.1 Configuration
The following sections provide instructions on the most common configuration choices. A User’s
Guide is supplied with the bar code reader. Please refer to the User’s Guide for additional
programming choices.
Make sure the correct keyboard is connected and configured before adding the Bar Code Reader.
7.2 Adding a Tab to Each Scanned Line

Use the following procedure to program the bar code reader to add a <TAB> character to the end
of each scanned line:
1. Using the bar code reader, scan the “Add Suffix” bar code shown below ().
2. Using the bar code reader, scan the bar codes shown below () that correspond to each of the
following characters: 9 9 0 9 0 D SAVE

GE HEALTHCARE
7.3 Setting Factory Defaults
If it is necessary to program the bar code reader back to the factory default state, use the bar code
reader to scan the following bar code:
Factory Defaults
Setting the bar code reader back to the default state will disable any user-programmed
configurations, such as the addition of the tab character’ and first character stripping’.
7.4 Character Stripping (Optional)

If the customer requires character stripping of the first character of a bar code, use the following
procedure to program the bar code reader:
1. Using the bar code reader, scan the “Enter Data Format” bar code shown.
Enter Data Format
Using the bar code reader, scan the bar codes shown that correspond to each of the following
characters: 0 0 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 F 5 0 1 F 1 0 0 SAVE
Bar Codes

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 8.0 System Login (HIPPA)

NOTE: Usernames and passwords should only be created in conjunction with or in collaboration
with the users system administrator.
8.1 User Accounts
8.1.1 System Log-in

Upon system start-up, you must enter an username and password to enable the full functionality of
the system. When the log in pop-up window is displayed, use the keyboard to enter your username
and password. If you make a mistake, you will be notified to re-enter.
Once logged in, you will have full access to system features and operation you are entitled to by
permissions.
8.1.2 About User Accounts

User accounts must be created after system installation or whenever system software is installed
or re-installed
Note: Consult your Administrator for Account and Password information
8.2 Login Feature

The login feature requires you to log in to gain access to the system and can be turned “on” or “off”
by the system administrator. How your site uses this feature depends on if your site's policies. Sites
with more than one network are referred to as Enterprise systems. Those without multiple networks
are referred to as stand-alone systems. The login feature can be used withstand-alone or enterprise
networks. Although some features are more applicable to enterprise systems.
8.2.1 Logging In and Out

Logging In:
After a period of inactivity set by your administrator, a splash screen is displayed.
1.) Type in your name and password.
2.) Click [Logon]

GE HEALTHCARE
NOTE: Logging off does not prohibit other users from logging in. Logout is designed to protect
patient privacy; not to stop approved users from logging in. When you or another user logs
back in, the system returns to its last known state.
Emergency Logon
Your splash screen may or may not display the Emergency login button (2). Turning this option on
or off is set by your system administrator. When using Emergency login, you may be prompted
to enter your name.
Use Emergency logon unless you have a valid account set up.
Logon with Admin Privileges

If you have administrator privileges, when you log in you are asked if you to perform administrative
tasks or scan. Do not click the button next to the Enter administrator screen, if you only want
to scan
Manual Logout
To force the system and clike the log off button.

GE HEALTHCARE
8.2.2 Understanding users and groups

Every person who has permission to use the system is a user. Users are set up by system
administrators. These administrators may be IT personnel in an enterprise environment, or a
site manager or lead tech in stand-alone environments. The administrator adds new users and
assigns the users to a group which dictates the level of privileges a person will have. For
example, a person named Sue Smith could belong to a group called technologists,
radiologists, administrators, or any combination.
8.2.3 Understanding groups and privileges

The group to which a person belongs has privileges. If you do not have an enterprise system, the
assignment of group privileges will probably be limited to those who have administrator
privileges and those who don’t. If your system is set up for enterprise login, your IT person or
administrator will be using more of the features.
8.3 Local User Management Tab

From the Local User Management Tab, you can:
• Assign users to groups
• Add a user
• Show protected users
• Change passwords
• Remove users
UI Utilities – Login Management

GE HEALTHCARE
Illustration 2: Login Management
Click Edit
Input the Username and Password, and click Login
Note: If need to add Administrator access user, please consult your administrator for Account and
Password information

GE HEALTHCARE
The two tab selections (Local Users and Groups) are to add local User and groups

GE HEALTHCARE
Click “Add Local User” button to add the user to the group
Adding Local User

1.) Click [Add User] Button, A second screen is displayed from which you continue
adding information.
2.) Enter a user ID (For example:123456)
3.) Enter a full name.(For example: hospital)
4.) Enter a password and retype to confirm.
5.) Click [Add User].
Assigning Users to a Group

All groups set up on your system are displayed on this tab. Here you assign each user to a group.
That user will then have all the privileges assigned to the group.
1.) Click Group
2.) Click Add Local Group
3.) Enter Local Group name (For example: Wang)
4.) Define group access
5.) Apply Roles
6.) Add Membership to Group Members (For example: 123456)

GE HEALTHCARE
Exiting:
• Click [Exit] to return to the login splash screen.
• Login by “123456” as local user

GE HEALTHCARE
8.3.1 Change Password
There were two place allow the change the password.
8.3.1.1 System logon in

Click change password button
8.3.1.2 Local users

Select Preferences-Login Management, then click Edit button in to the Local users.

GE HEALTHCARE

GE HEALTHCARE
Chapter 20 Calibration and Alignment
Section 1.0 Before You Begin

1.1 Service User Interface (SUIF)
A list of available system calibrations is displayed on the Service User Interface, whenever the
calibration tab is chosen.
Service User Interface (SUIF) ICONs
Be patient when executing commands. Text status messages are generally displayed in status line,
whenever a calibration icon is selected. If you are uncertain whether a command is being
executed, check the status line first. Repeated attempts to execute a command may require
you to exit the SUIF and enter again to gain control.
1.2 Calibration Sequence

Calibrations must be performed in the order shown on the left hand side of the calibration tab. The
calibration summary screen only displays the date that a specific calibration was last
performed. Calibrations listed on the summary are not listed in the order they should be
performed.
Chapter 20 - Calibration and Alignment Page 379

GE HEALTHCARE
1.3 Returning the System to the User
1. After completing calibrations, delete any New Patients files created during service, and before
turning the system over to the end-user.
2. Perform a system reset. A system reset must be performed to invoke changes. Application
software and most SUIF tools only reads the system calibration files during boot-up. If you
make changes, they will not be invoked until you reset (reboot) the system (See Invoking
Calibration Changes.
3. Perform a system backup following calibration and after the system has reset. In order to
preserve any new calibrations, a system backup must be made.

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 2.0 System Installation Calibration Sequence
Potential for Data Loss

1. Always create an up-to-date backup of your system data following product installation or after
making any calibrations.
2. The system must be reset, upon exiting the Service User Interface for Configuration and
Calibration information to take affect. This must be done before the system is used with patient
acquisitions.
NOTE: #1
Before starting any Positioner Calibrations, rotate the X-ray tube 90 degrees counterclockwise and
move it all the way to maximum height. Check that the Tube Cable Bracket and HV Cables do
not rub against or touch the column. If there is any interference, the bracket and cables will
need to be adjusted. To adjust the bracket, loosen the 2 bolts (see Illustration 1) on each side,
pull the bracket forward towards the X-ray tube (see Illustration 2) and away from the column,
and torque the bolts to 9.9 Nm.
Illustration 1: Loosen Bolts
Illustration 2: Pull Bracket Toward X-ray Tube

GE HEALTHCARE
NOTE: #2
The Detector Gain Calibration needs to be completed at the applicable receptor (Table or
Wallstand) after any of the following Positioner Calibrations are performed:
• OTS Tube Angulation
• OTS Column Rotation
• OTS Table Long/Lat Cal
• WS 0 Degree Cal
• WS 90 Degree Cal
Failure to complete the Detector Gain Calibration after performing the above Positioner Calibrations
may result in QAP Test failure.
You must always calibrate your system before it can be used. Perform the calibrations shown in the
table below in the numerical order indicated by the order column.
Tool Calibration/Task Order1

Positioner Calibration Collimator to XRT (X-ray Tube) Alignment 1
OTS Longitudinal Travel Range 2
See Notes #1 and #2 above OTS Lateral Travel Range 3
before proceeding with
OTS Vertical Travel Range 4
Positioner Calibration
OTS Tube Angulation 5
OTS Column Rotation 6
OTS Table SID 7
OTS Table Long/Lat 8
Wallstand Travel/Tilt Cal 9
Wallstand 0 Degrees 10
Wallstand 90 Degrees 11
Table Encoder Checkout 12
OTS UIF Touch Screen Calibration 13
Auto Position: 14
- Park Position
- Install Defaults (if option installed)
- Remote Control
Perform System Reset Press the <Reset> button on the RCIM to invoke 15
calibration changes, before proceeding.
Table 20-1 System Installation Calibration Matrix

GE HEALTHCARE
Tool Calibration/Task Order1
Generator (Jedi) Calibration Filament Drive 16
Tube Warranty 17
Tube Run-in and Stability 18
Automatic Exposure Control Table Ion Chamber 19
(AEC) Calibration Wallstand Ion Chamber 20
Detector Calibrations Detector (Table & Wallstand): 21
- Bad Pixel
- Gain
- CF
Digital Cassette Calibration - Bad Pixel 22
- Gain
- CF
Dose Predication mR/mAs 23
Image Quality Printer 24
Follow on-screen instructions 25
Functional Checks Beam Quality - Overhead HVL 26
Generator Test - Generator Accuracy 28
Perform System Reset Press the <Reset> button on the RCIM to invoke 30
calibration changes.
Numbers in column indicates the order/sequence that the task is performed.
Table 20-1 System Installation Calibration Matrix

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 3.0 How to Start Calibration Tools

1.) From the application desktop, click on the Service Tools icon.
2.) Click on [Launch] button.
3.) Click on Calibration icon.
4.) In the left frame, click on the page icon associated with the calibration you wish to
execute.

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 4.0 Invoking New Calibrations

Press the <reset> button on the RCIM to invoke calibration changes.
Reset
The system must be rebooted if changes are made to calibrations files. This includes the creation
of new calibrations and/or the restoration of calibration files. Applications software running on
this system only reads calibration files during workstation boot-up. Any changes after boot-up
are not detected by the applications software.

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 5.0 Saving Changes

Save changes to calibration files by performing a backup. See System Backup

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 6.0 Positioner Calibration

The following applies when performing positioner calibrations.
1. If additional information on a calibration is not shown below, just follow the instructions presented
on SUIF.
2. Following completion and prior to exiting positioner calibrations, AutoPos park calibration
(defaults and park) must be performed.
3. Before any other non-positioner calibration(s) can be done, you must reset the system by
pressing the <reset> button on the RCIM to invoke calibration changes.
4. The Detector Gain Calibration needs to be completed at the applicable receptor (Table or
• OTS Tube Angulation
• OTS Column Rotation
• OTS Table Long/Lat Cal
• WS 0 Degree Cal
• WS 90 Degree Cal
Failure to complete the Detector Gain Calibration after performing the above Positioner Calibrations
may result in QAP Test failure.
6.2 Collimator to X-ray Tube (XRT) Alignment

NOTE: This alignment should be performed 1st as a prerequisite to all Positioner Calibrations.
In order to ensure meeting the security requirement, must follow collimator installation
procedure while re-install collimator and FRU replacement.
• Daub the Loctite 242 or 243 glue on the bolts,
• Torque the bolts with torque wrench.
The Collimator to XRT Alignment calibration procedure is run to align the large and small X-ray tube
filaments to the center of the collimator blades.
A fixed-time exposure is used to align the tube’s focal spot to the collimator interface plate.
Calibration is done using the Collimator Alignment Tool (CAT/46-166390G1) tool and
alignment tool adapter (PN# 2296120). During the calibration process, you will be moving the
interface plate relative to the X-ray tube.
When should it be performed:

GE HEALTHCARE
• Performed during initial system installation.
• Performed whenever the X-ray tube is replaced.
• Performed whenever the collimator mounting plate is loosened or removed.
• Performed as a prerequisite to all Positioner Calibrations.
Procedure:
1.) Install alignment tool.
A.) Rotate the tube/collimator assembly 180 degrees (pointing up).
Figure 20-1 Tube Pointing Up with Collimator Removed
B.) Remove the collimator cable connector cover.
C.) Disconnect the collimator cable and the collimator rotation sensor cable.
D.) Temporarily engage the counterpoise locking bolt to prevent the OTS from moving up
when the collimator is removed.
Figure 20-2 Locking the Counterpoise Assembly

GE HEALTHCARE
E.) Loosen three set screws and remove the collimator.
F.) Remove the four screws and remove the inner ring.
Inner Ring
G.) Remove the four hex head screws and remove the outer ring.
Outer Ring
H.) Install the alignment tool adapter and alignment tool. This is a friction fit only.
I.) Loosen the four interface plate mounting screws and visually square the mounting
plate to the tube. This will make the UIF parallel to the front of the tube.

GE HEALTHCARE
Tool Parallel
2.) Take an exposure with both XS (small) and XL (large) focal spots.
Figure 20-3 Collimator to X-ray Tube Alignment Screen
3.) Adjust the position of the collimator interface plate to the X-ray tube until the XS and
XL focal spots are centered on the CAT (X1+X2<3.9mm).

GE HEALTHCARE
4.) Verify that the mounting plate is still squared to the tube.
5.) Tighten the four interface plate mounting screws.
6.) Remove the CAT tool and the alignment tool adapter.
7.) Install the outer ring and four hex head screws.
8.) Install the inner ring and four screws.
9.) Install the collimator and three set screws.
10.)You can take an video by camera during exposure then to check the XL and XS
position
Replay camera video to check the XL and XS
XL(Large) XS(Small)

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 7.0 Initial Positioner Calibrations
The following calibrations must be done BEFORE proceeding to X-ray Beam to SID Travel
Alignment - Vertical Tracking
NOTE: Refer to the Discovery XR650 System Manual 5308115-8EN, Calibration->Positioner

Calibration.
PREREQUISITE: OTS COVERS MUST BE INSTALLED PRIOR TO PERFORMING THE INITIAL
POSITIONER CALIBRATIONS.
1. Collimator to X-ray Tube Alignment
2. OTS Longitudinal Travel Range
3. OTS Lateral Travel Range
4. OTS Vertical Travel Range
5. OTS / Tube Angle Alignment
6. OTS / Column Rotation
The position feedback data can be checked during positioner calibrations by command "
showStatus " at xruser@magic:~/engg> showStatus

GE HEALTHCARE
7.1 OTS Longitudinal Travel Range
Procedure
7.2 OTS Lateral Travel Range

Procedure
7.3 OTS Vertical Travel Range

Procedure

GE HEALTHCARE
7.4 OTS Tube Angulation
Procedure
Figure 20-4 Adjust OTS Angle to Zero angle position
NOTE: Tape a sheet of paper to the floor and make an “X” in the center of the paper, Vertical travel
tube from the lower position to the higher position to make sure the FOV Crosshair center"X"
aligns with the Target center "X". Using the OTS UIF Tube Anglees lock button only during
this step.
Figure 20-5 a: Adjust OTS Anglees to 90 Degrees Clockwise position
Step 1 Step 2
• Tape a sheet of paper to the wall of light and make an “X” in the center of the paper.
• The “X” will be referred to as the “Target” in the following instructions.
• Position the Tube/Collimator above the Target as follows (See Fig20-5a and Fig20-5b)
a.) Tube Angulation at 90 degrees clockwise.
b.) Remove OTS to the left limit (Step1 position)
c.) Using the FOV Crosshair, position the Tube/Collimator such that the Crosshair
center point is on the Target center point. Use only the Longitudinal and Lateral
and Vertical axis movements.

GE HEALTHCARE
d.) Using the OTS UIF Longitudinal lock button only, move the OTS two (2) or
more meters to the right of the current or Step1 starting position.
Figure 20-5b
NOTE: DO NOT move the OTS in any axis other than tube angulation.
You can now see a measurable OTS Angless error that will be either to the Up or Down of the
Target center.
e.) At this point, using the OTS UIF Tube Angless lock button only, rotate the
Tube Angless such that the FOV Crosshair center is aligned to the Target center.
f.) Now, using the OTS Tube Angulation lock button only, angulate the tube to 90
degrees.
g.) Repeat step1 position by using the OTS UIF Longitudinal lock button only,
move the OTS to step1 position such that the FOV Crosshair Lateral line is
aligned with the Target Center use only the Vertical axis movements.
NOTE: At this point you should have a very small measurable error at the Step 1 starting position.
Use the OTS UIF Vertical lock button to align the FOV Crosshair center to the Target center.
Repeat the Step 2 process until there is no measurable error resulting in an accurate OTS
Tube 90 Degree Position.

GE HEALTHCARE
7.5 OTS Column Rotation
Objective:
The purpose of this procedure is to determine 3 parameters:
1.) OTS Column Rotation Zero Degree Position

2.) OTS Column Rotation 90 Degree Position
3.) Collimator Mechanical Detent Alignment
This process consists of 3 basic steps and should be performed during System Installations or
anytime the Tube/Collimator relationships have been disturbed requiring OTS Column
Rotation and/or Wallstand 0 Degree Calibrations
When performed correctly, it can eliminate Wallstand Center to Center Tracking misalignment
issues when changing SID distances for Wallstand 0 Degree acquisitions.
Prerequisites:
Collimator to X-ray Tube Alignment has been completed.
Procedure:
The entire procedure consists of 3 steps. The first section addresses the OTS Column Rotation
Zero Degree Position, Steps 1 and 2. The second part is the Colum Rotation Clockwise 90
Degree Position Check and Adjustment, Step 3.
Before performing this procedure it is recommended that you read it in its entirety to understand the
process.
a.) OTS Column Rotation Zero Degree Position (See Fig20-6)

GE HEALTHCARE
i.) Tape a sheet of paper to the floor and make an “X” in the center of the paper
• Ignore any markings on the floor as these will confuse and distract.
• Place the paper in the Front/Head position of the Longitudinal Travel Range.
About 0.5 meters to the Front and Left of the table.
• Do not disturb the paper until the procedure is completed.
• Turn off the room lights to improve the FOV Crosshair visualization in the
following instructions
ii.) Position the Tube/Collimator above the Target as follows;

• Tube Angulation at zero degrees.
• Collimator in the mechanical Zero Detent position.
• Collimator Laser port open with slider
iii.) Turn on the FOV Crosshair lamp and using the OTS UIF Column Rotation lock
button only, rotate the column to the Zero Degree position. This is a rough
adjustment
iv.) Using the FOV Crosshair, position the Tube/Collimator such that the Crosshair
axis movements. Vertical height is to your comfort level.
End of Step 1
Start of Step 2
v.) Using the OTS UIF Longitudinal lock button only, move the OTS two (2) or more
meters to the right of the current or Step 1 starting position.
vi.) Using the OTS Tube Angulation lock button only, angle the tube such that the
FOV Crosshair center aligns with the Target center.
You can now see a measurable OTS Column Rotation error that will be either to the Front or Back
of the Target center.
vii.) At this point, using the OTS UIF Column Rotation lock button only, rotate the
column such that the FOV Crosshair center is aligned to the Target center.
viii.)Now, using the OTS Tube Angulation lock button only, angulate the tube to zero
degrees.
ix.) Using the OTS UIF Longitudinal lock button only, move the OTS such that the
FOV Crosshair Lateral line is aligned with the Target Center.
> At this point you should have a very small measurable error at the Step 1 starting

GE HEALTHCARE
position. Use the OTS UIF Lateral lock button to align the FOV Crosshair center
to the Target center. Repeat the Step 2 process until there is no measurable error
resulting in an accurate OTS Column Zero Degree Rotation Position.
Figure 20-6 OTS Positioning for Column Rotation Zero Degree Alignment
End of Step 2

GE HEALTHCARE
b.) OTS Column Rotation 90 Degree Position (See Fig20-7)

i.) Tape a sheet of paper to the floor and make an “X” in the center of the paper
• Ignore any markings on the floor as these will confuse and distract.
• Place the paper in the Front/Head position of the Lateral Travel Range.
About 0.5 meters to the Front and Left of the table.
• Do not disturb the paper until the procedure is completed.
• Turn off the room lights to improve the FOV Crosshair visualization in the
following instructions
ii.) Position the Tube/Collimator above the Target as follows;

• Collimator in the mechanical 90 Detent position.
• Collimator Laser port open with slider
iii.) Turn on the FOV Crosshair lamp and using the OTS UIF Column Rotation lock
button only, rotate the column to the 90 Degree position. This is a rough
adjustment
iv.) Using the FOV Crosshair, position the Tube/Collimator such that the Crosshair
axis movements. Vertical height is to your comfort level.
End of Step 1
Start of Step 2
v.) Using the OTS UIF Lateral lock button only, move the OTS two (2) or more
meters to the back of the current or Step 1 starting position.
vi.) Using the OTS Tube Angulation lock button only, angle the tube such that the
FOV Crosshair center aligns with the Target center.
You can now see a measurable OTS Column Rotation error that will be either to the Left or Right
of the Target center.
vii.) At this point, using the OTS UIF Column Rotation lock button only, rotate the
column such that the FOV Crosshair center is aligned to the Target center.
viii.)Now, using the OTS Tube Angulation lock button only, angulate the tube to zero
degrees.
ix.) Using the OTS UIF Lateral lock button only, move the OTS such that the FOV

GE HEALTHCARE
Crosshair Lateral line is aligned with the Target Center.
> At this point you should have a very small measurable error at the Step 1 starting
position. Use the OTS UIF Longitudinal lock button to align the FOV Crosshair
center to the Target center. Repeat the Step 2 process until there is no
measurable error resulting in an accurate OTS Column 90 Degree Rotation
Position.
Figure 20-7 OTS Positioning for Column Rotation 90 Degree Alignment
Do not change the Column Rotation, as this position will be needed to successfully accomplish
c.) Collimator Mechanical Detent Check and Adjustment (See Fig20-8)
In this section of the procedure you will check and adjust, if necessary, the mechanical collimator
detent position. This will ensure that the collimator is perpendicular to the longitudinal axis at
the OTS Column Rotation Zero Degree Position. This adjustment is approximate due to the
nature of the collimator mounting design.
i.) Position the Tube/Collimator above the Table Top as follows;

• Collimator in the mechanical Zero Detent position.

GE HEALTHCARE
• Collimator Laser port unblocked by the slider.
ii.) Turn ON the FOV Crosshair lamp and verify the laser bisects the Plexiglas
crosshair lateral line.
• These two “Light Elements” should be parallel for the entire visible Plexiglas
length AND parallel to the Lateral edges of the Light Field.
• If these relationships are not true, reference the appropriate System Manual,
Replacement Procedures, Collimator Adjustments section to correct the
Light Field Crosshair and/or Line Laser misalignments.
• Attach a plumb bob to the OTS assembly such that reference marks can be
made on the table top assembly using the OTS Lateral motion only. See
Fig20-8.
• Manually move the FOV laser using the OTS UIF Longitudinal and Lateral
lock buttons only, align the FOV laser on top of the Table Top Lateral Plumb
Bob Alignment Marks.
Figure 20-8 Align OTS to Table top
iii.) Use the Collimator Mechanical Detent Adjustment to rotate the collimator such
that the laser bisects the Table Top Lateral Alignment Marks. See Fig20-8.
• Remove the Detent Sense Switch Assembly for ease of access.

• Using a box wrench adjust the mechanical adjustment eccentric to align the
laser to the Table Top Lateral Alignment Marks.
• Manually rotate the collimator out of and back into the zero detent position.
This ensures the collimator is fully engaged with the mechanical detent after each
adjustment. This will simplify the adjustment procedure.

GE HEALTHCARE
Figure 20-9 Collimator Hardware
• Tighten the mechanical detent set screw when adjustments are completed.
• Reinstall the Detent Sense Switch Assembly.
• Verify the Detent Sense switch roller is center vertically on the mechanical
detent pivot arm.
End of thie Step3
D.) Finalization:
Perform the OTS / Column Rotation Calibration procedure per instructions on the Common Service
Desktop.
NOTE: You now have an accurate OTS Column Zero Degree Rotation position and an accurate
Collimator Zero Detent position.
This will greatly improve the Wallstand Final Alignment procedure and the Wallstand Zero Degree
Calibration Process.

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 8.0 X-ray Beam to SID Travel Alignment

NOTE: Verify that the wall stand column and detector housing are level.
The X-ray beam must be parallel to the axis used to vary the wall stand SID to assure proper
alignment at all SIDs.
1. Set the keyswitch on the rear of the UIF to ’override’ position (yellow and green LEDs flash
on
the left side of the UIF).
2. Rotate the X-ray tube and the OTS column until the collimator faces the wall stand. It is
important to position the X-ray tube and column in the same manner as it will be used at the
site.
3. Temporarily rotate the collimator 90 degrees. Using a level on the collimator mounting plate,
verify that the collimator is vertical. See Illustration 19-4. After checking collimator level, return
the collimator to the normal rotational position.
Illustration 19-4: Verify Collimator is Vertical

GE HEALTHCARE
4. Using a level, verify that the patient barrier is in the vertical position (0 degrees). See Illustration
19-5.
Illustration 19-5: Patient Barrier Vertical (0 degrees)
5. Position the OTS for a SID of 100 cm (if using tape measure, set to 95 cm).
6. With the collimator crosshair shining on the center of the patient barrier (at 0 degree position),
move the OTS to vary the SID while preventing the OTS from moving horizontally (left to right)
across the barrier.
7. Verify that the collimator crosshair does not shift more than 3 mm horizontally as the SID is
varied from 100 cm to 180 cm (if using tape measure, vary from 95 cm to 175 cm).
8. If adjustment is necessary, perform the OTS Column Rotation calibration. If the alignment is
still off, recheck Chapter 10, Aligning and Installing the Wall Stand.
9. Position the OTS for a SID of 100 cm (if using tape measure, set to 95 cm).
10. With the laser line shining on the center of the patient barrier (at 90 degree position), move the
OTS to vary the SID while preventing the OTS from moving vertically (up or down) across the
barrier.
11. Verify that the laser line does not shift more than 3 mm vertically as the SID is varied from 100
cm to 180 cm (if using tape measure, vary from 95 cm to 175 cm).
12. If adjustment is necessary, perform the X-ray Tube Angulation calibration. Another possible
cause of excess vertical shift can be improperly leveled stationary rails.
Page 404 Section 8.0 - X-ray Beam to SID Travel Alignment

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 9.0 Detector Perpendicular to X-ray Beam Adjustment
Potential for damage to eyesight.

Working with a laser to position detector.
Do not look directly into source or reflected laser beam.
1. Move the wall stand detector until it is approximately in the middle of its vertical travel. and
position the OTS for a SID of more than 180 cm.
2. Rotate the collimator until the laser light projects a vertical line on the wall stand.
3. Attach a mirror to the face of the patient barrier. See Illustration 19-6.
Illustration 19-6: Mirror on Detector Patient Barrier
4. Turn on the laser and position the OTS so the laser line hits the mirror.
5. Observe the reflected laser beam line at the collimator. Use a piece of paper to see the line.
Illustration 19-7: Reflected Line Within Limits
6. Rotate the wall stand until the reflected line is within the edges of the opening of the laser
source. This assures that the detector is perpendicular to the X-ray beam.See Illustration 19-7-1

GE HEALTHCARE
7. Move the OTS to vary the SID from 100 cm to 180 cm. The reflected line must stay within the
edges of the opening of the laser source.See Illustration 19-7-1:
Illustration 19-7-1: Reflected Line Within Limits
8. Remove mirror from wall stand.
Page 406 Section 9.0 - Detector Perpendicular to X-ray Beam Adjustment

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 10.0 Vertical Tracking

1. Set the keyswitch on the rear of the UIF to ’normal’ position (yellow and green LEDs no longer
flashing on the left side of the UIF).
2. Position the OTS for a SID of 180 cm.
3. Lower the detector to its minimum height and vertically position the OTS to maintain alignment.
4. Center the laser light on the patient barrier.
5. Raise the detector to its maximum height and vertically position the OTS to maintain alignment.
6. Note the location of the laser light on the patient barrier.
7. If the light shifts laterally (left to right) as the vertical height is varied, it will be necessary to
adjust the lateral tilt of the wall stand so that it tracks the offset of the OTS as the vertical
position of the OTS is varied. When adjusting the lateral tilt of the wall stand, do not allow the
front-to-rear tilt of the wall stand to change from vertical.See Illustration 19-7-2
Illustration 19-7-2

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 11.0 Final Wall Stand Anchoring

Torque all 4 wall stand anchors to 27 N-m, then to 41 N-m.
Page 408 Section 11.0 - Final Wall Stand Anchoring

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 12.0 Final Wallstand Balance
Cut off the power supply during adjusting the Counterweights. Avoid wallstand detector
housing with Counterweights tracking up or down.
Potential for Finger Pinch Injury.

Avoid direct put hand into wallstand column.
1. Turn on system power.

2. The wallstand is shipped with all counterweights already installed. These counterweights will
counterbalance a wallstand with grid and patient support bar installed. Counterweights can be
removed if desired (for example, if the customer never uses the patient support bar).
3. All wallstand detector housing covers must be installed.
4. Insert a grid into the wallstand detector housing.
5. Install the patient support bar on the horizontal arm.
6. Release the vertical lock and move the wallstand carriage up/down to verify proper wallstand
balance.
7. If the wallstand is unbalanced, perform the following steps:
a. Remove the counterweight access cover (2 screws) from the rear of the vertical column.
Illustration 19-8: Remove Access Cover

GE HEALTHCARE
b. Lower the wallstand until the counterweights are accessible through the column opening.
c. Add or remove counterweights until proper balance is achieved:
i. Each counterweight (except for the small ones) is secured with an Allen screw,
accessed through a small hole on the front of the vertical column. See Illustration19-
9.
Illustration 19-9: Access Hole
ii. Once the mounting screw has been removed, temporarily install it in the threaded
hole
at the rear of the counterweight to assist in removal. See Illustration 19-10. See
Illustration 19-11 for counterweight sizes and weights.
Illustration 19-10: Counterweight Removal
Illustration 19-11: Counterweight Sizes and Weights
Page 410 Section 12.0 - Final Wallstand Balance

GE HEALTHCARE
Item No. Size Weight Notes

1 3 mm 0.261 kg (0.58 lb) Small counterweight(s)
Approximate weight of grid or patient
2 22 mm 2.52 kg (5.56 lb)
support bar
3 66 mm 3.22 kg (7.1 lb) Base weight
4 N/A N/A Counterweight mounting screws
5 N/A N/A Small counterweight(s) mounting screw
Table 20-2 Counterweight Sizes and Weights
NOTE: Small counterweights are attached to the top counterweight. To add/remove

small counterweights, the top counterweight must be removed. The small
counterweights are attached to the top of the larger counterweight with a
single screw. See Illustration 19-12.
Illustration 19-12: Small Counterweight Mounting Screw
iii. Install counterweights (and mounting screws) as needed to achieve proper

balance.
d. Re-install the counterweight access cover.

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 13.0 Options Installation

Refer to Appendix B, - Installation of Options for Image Pasting Barrier and Flexi-DT Table options.
Page 412 Section 13.0 - Options Installation

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 14.0 Complete the Positioner Calibrations

Complete the following Positioner Calibrations:
• OTS Table SID
• OTS Table Long/Lat
• Wall Stand Travel/Tilt Cal
• Wall Stand 0 Degree
• Wall Stand 90 Degree
• OTS UIF Touch Screen Cal
• Auto Position:
○ Park Position
○ Install Defaults
○ Add Position
14.1 OTS Table SID

The tool calibrates the OTS maximum SID position and is also used to determine the vertical gain
for the OTS and table.
When should it be performed:
• During initial system installation.
• Whenever Table Logic Board (ALB board), OTS Vertical Encoder or OTS Logic Board is
replaced.
Procedure
5.) Removing the table top then center the OTS over the Table Detector and align it,
6.) Follow the on-screen instructions as presented by the tool.

GE HEALTHCARE
14.2 OTS Table Long./Lat.
OTS Table Longitudinal/Lateral calibration is a procedure to calibrate the table detector travel range
and the OTS longitudinal and lateral offset and gains with respect to the detector center.
• When should it be performed
Whenever a detector, Table Logic Board (ALB board), OTS longitudinal encoder, OTS lateral
encoder or OTS Logic Board is replaced.
Procedure
14.3 Wall Stand Travel/Tilt Cal.

The Wall Stand Travel/Tilt Calibration is a procedure to calibrate the WS vertical and tilt travel range
as well as the tilt offset and gain.
Procedure
Follow the Wall Stand Tilt on-screen instructions.
When should it be performed
• Whenever the WS vertical encoder or WS Logic Board is replaced.
Page 414 Section 14.0 - Complete the Positioner Calibrations

GE HEALTHCARE
14.4 Wall Stand 0 Degrees
Figure 20-10 Wall Stand at 0 Degree Position
The Wall Stand 0 Degrees Calibration is a procedure to calibrate the WS vertical, OTS lateral, OTS
longitudinal and OTS vertical gains and offsets when the wall stand receptor is at 0 degrees
(see Fig20-10).
How Field of View (FOV) Dimensions are Measured - The collimator’s lateral display size is
measured across the Wall Stand’s side to side dimension. The collimator’s longitudinal display
size is the Wall Stand’s vertical dimension when the detector is in the vertical (0 degrees)
position.
In the Calibration Step 5, SID 180cm should be measured from collimator’s display.
• Whenever the WS vertical encoder, WS Logic Board, any of the OTS linear axes encoders or
OTS Logic Board is replaced.
Procedure

GE HEALTHCARE
14.5 Wall Stand 90 Degrees
Figure 20-11 Wall Stand at 90 Degree Position
The Wall Stand 90 Degrees Calibration is a procedure to calibrate the WS vertical, OTS lateral,
OTS longitudinal and OTS vertical gains and offsets when the wall stand receptor is at 90
degrees (see Fig20-11).
Before You Begin
• The collimator’s lateral display size is measured across the Wall Stand’s side to side
dimension. The collimator’s longitudinal display size is the Wall Stand’s vertical dimension
when the detector is in the vertical (0 degrees) position.
• Position the receptor to mid-height (do not change the position of the OTS) when directed by
the on-screen instructions.
Move OTS to other ion center

GE HEALTHCARE
• Whenever the WS vertical encoder, WS Logic Board, any of the OTS linear axes encoders or
OTS Logic Board is replaced.
Wall Stand Receptor Positioning
Procedure

GE HEALTHCARE
14.6 Table Encoder Checkout and Adjustment Procedure
14.6.1 Table Encoder Checkout

1.) After running all Class A Positioner Calibrations once, enter a Digital Table exam and
verify that the OTS correctly tracks the table vertically through the full table travel
range.
2.) If it does not correctly track, proceed to Section 14.6.2 and perform the Table Encoder
Adjustment Procedure.
14.6.2 Table Encoder Adjustment Procedure

NOTE: Run this only after performing a Class A OTS to Table SID Calibration and if the system
does not properly track the SID.
1.) Remove the cover from the back side of the table.
2.) With the table at the highest position, pull the encoder bar away from the encoder
gear. See Fig20-12
Figure 20-12 Table Height Encoder
3.) Rotate the encoder gear 1/4 of a turn clockwise.

4.) Re-run the OTS to Table SID Calibration.
5.) Reset the system.
6.) Enter a Digital Table Exam and have the OTS track the table through the full table
travel range. If the OTS tracks correctly, you are complete, otherwise repeat steps 2-
6 until the OTS tracks correctly. (Maximum of 3 times).

GE HEALTHCARE
14.7 OTS UIF Touch Screen Calibration
Procedure
14.8 “AutoPos” Park Position

Avoid placing the Park position within 1.5 meters of the table center as this is within the table
tracking envelope. From the table center, the envelope is approximately 1.5 meters long to the
right and left, 0.9 meters to the back and 1.3 meters to the front.
14.9 Auto Position

• Park Position: Sets Auto Park Position.
• Install Defaults: Deletes all customer specific Auto Positions and installs software load default
positions.

GE HEALTHCARE
14.10 Wallstand 120cm Grid Auto Position (option)
If customer has 120cm WallStand Grid and if the Auto Position does not work after the calibration
of 120cm Wallstand Grid at horizon (90 degree), which means the ceiling height cannot meet the
corresponding requirements of the equipment.
The default height of the top surface of Wallstand at the current position is 750mm and this needs
to be lost down to a proper height to make this auto position possible.
Note: If perform below procedure, please notify customers better not to use cross table.
Since the height of Wallstand is lower than default, so there is a distance between detector and
Cross Table top, this will affect image quality.
14.10.1 Procedure
1.) Find “Auto Position” in “Preferences”, then click on “Auto Position: Edit”

GE HEALTHCARE
2.) Click on “Delete Position”
3.) Select the item "WS Horz 120cm" need to be deleted and then click on “CONTINUE”

GE HEALTHCARE
4.) Click on “COMPLETE” to complete the Auto Position deletion.
5.) Click on “Add Position” and select a type of position as “Wallstand Position”, the “CONTINUE”
.
GE HEALTHCARE
6.) Go into cell and position the Wallstand and OTS by lowering the Wallstand and OTS
respectively until the final position can meet the ceiling height. Then back to console and click
on “CONTINE”
7.) Name this position as “WS-Horz-120” at “Position Name” and make this new position be
available in “Worklist” and “Digital Wallstand”, the click on “CONTINUE”

GE HEALTHCARE
8.) Click on “COMPLETE” to complete the position creation
9.) Reboot the system to make the modification work.
14.11 Remote Conrol

Remote Control: System Allows define and site some Auto Positions by remote control.
1. Launch the Service Desktop.
2. Select Calibrations
3. Select Positioner
4. Select Auto Positions.
5. Select Remote Control.
6. Follow instructions on the screen to program P1 and P2 positions.

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 15.0 Generator (Jedi) Calibration

The following applies when performing Generator (Jedi) calibrations.
1.) If additional information on a calibration is not shown below, just follow the
instructions presented on SUIF.
2.) Before executing any generator (Jedi) calibration; if you have performed any
positioner calibration you must reset the system by pressing the <reset> button on
the RCIM.
15.2 Filament Drive

Sets the initial filament drive levels for each X-ray tube focal spot. The calibration tool automatically
selects the next filament after calibration for that particular filament is completed.
When Performed
• Whenever a X-ray tube is replaced.
15.3 Tube Warranty

Displays and stores data regarding Tube and Generator usage. To reset data, select [Reset].
• Whenever a detector, X-ray tube, inverter or HV tank is replaced.
• To check the tube usage.
Procedure Follow the on-screen instructions as presented by the tool.
15.4 Tube Run-in and Stability

This tool performs a tube “run-in” to:
• Remove gases from the tube

GE HEALTHCARE
• Heat soak the tube anode
• Season the tube (distribution of charges in the tube to help prevent “tube spits.”)
When Performed
• during initial system installation.
• whenever a X-ray tube is replaced.
• to help alleviate “tube spits”.
Before You Begin: If a tube spit error is reported during the calibration procedure, continue to
reduce kVp until 5 exposures in a row without spits can be obtained at the lower kVp value.
Procedure: Follow the on-screen instructions as presented by the tool.

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 16.0 Automatic Exposure Control (AEC) Calibration

The following applies when performing Automatic Exposure Control (AEC) calibrations.
on SUIF.
2. Before executing any Automatic Exposure Control (AEC) calibration; if you have performed any
positioner calibration you must reset the system by pressing the <reset> button on the RCIM.
16.2 Table Ion Chamber

Calibrates the Ion chamber to produce the proper amount of output across all three Ion chamber
cells.
Before You Begin
• Flat Field Phantom required.
• Grid Removed.
• Verify that the collimator is aligned to the receptor.
Procedure
NOTE: It is important that the Grid be removed. If the grid is left in during calibration, the CF value
will be higher than normal. The normal value for CF is approximately 1.2, whereas the value
when the grid is left in is approximately 1.7.
2.) Install the flat field phantom as shown.
Flat Field Phantom Installation
3.) Remove the cover from the upper rear area of the table so that the rear of the detector

GE HEALTHCARE
carriage housing can be accessed.
4.) Adjust the Ion chamber potentiometers.
Ion chamber potentiometers locations (rear of table)
Results: If the Ion chamber does not pass Leakage Current Test, replace the Ion chamber.
16.3 Wall Stand Ion Chamber

Calibrates the Ion chamber to produce the proper amount of output across all three Ion chamber
cells.
Before You Begin
• Verify that the Wall Stand Ion Chamber is configured correctly as 3-cell or 4-cell. Failure to do
so will result in image quality issues during customer usage.
• Flat Field Phantom required.
• Remove Grid.
• Verify that the collimator is aligned to the receptor.
Procedure
NOTE: It is important that the Grid be removed. If the grid is left in during calibration, the CF value
will be higher than normal. The normal value for CF is approximately 1.2, whereas the value
when the grid is left in is approximately 1.7.
1.) Remove the Grid.
3.) Install the flat field phantom.
4.) The following detector assembly covers must be removed to access the Ion chamber

GE HEALTHCARE
potentiometers: upper rear cover, lower rear cover, front cover, and left side cover.
5.) Adjust the Ion chamber potentiometers (left side of detector assembly). Note that the
4-cell Ion chamber actually has 5 cells, but in our application we do not use Cell E.

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 17.0 Detector Calibrations

17.1 Glossary of Terms
• ·Detector Housing = URP detector receptor location using an ion chamber
• ·Digital Table = URP detector as the primary table receptor
• ·Digital Cassette = URP detector is used as use tether cable connection only, not allow using
of Wireless connection (no ion chamber)
• URP Wallstand = uses URP detector

The following applies when performing the Detector calibrations:
1.) For the URP detector is used the tether cable connection only (i.e. Digital Cassette),
refer to Digital Cassette Calibrations for calibration procedures.
2.) Detector firmware download and Controller microcode download must have been
performed before proceeding with detector calibrations.
For detector downloads, refer to Perform Detector Downloads.
4.) Before executing any Detector calibration; if you have performed any positioner
calibration you must reset the system by pressing the <reset> button on the RCIM.
5.) For table housing calibration, the table top must be installed.
6.) Remove the radiation meter from its case and allow it to warm-up to room
temperature before using.
7.) If the flat field phantom has any scratches, dents, or other imperfections on the large
surfaces, it must be replaced before calibration.
8.) The following tools are required:
> Flat Field Phantom 2281087
> X-ray Calibration Fixture 2280928
> Dosimeter (Keithley, MDH, or equivalent)
9.) Bad pixel calibration must be executed before gain calibration is performed.

GE HEALTHCARE
10.)The system must be operating without a reboot for ten contiguous minutes or more.
The detector requires ten minutes or more of stable operation before any calibration
is performed.
11.)When making exposures, hold the expose switch when requested for the entire
specified amount of time.
17.3 Calibration Overview
Bad Pixel Calibration - Used to detect defective pixels. It can be executed independent of the other
calibrations but is not recommended.
The BAD PIXEL calibration routine:
• Acquires images without using X-rays for the first minutes
• Automatically sets default techniques
• Automatically sets the collimator blades to 45 cm x 45 cm size (slightly larger than the
detector).
• Displays the Initial Bad Pixel Calibration Screen (Dark Image processing).
Gain Calibration - Tool is used to calibrate a gain coefficient for each pixel in order to achieve
uniform gain across the detector.
• User must manually select each individual kVp station.
• Complete all kVp/Gain station combinations.
CF Measurement- Tool is used to update the AEC dose calibration parameters.
• Run all CF measurement routines.
• The measured exposure value must be entered in units of “mR” or “uGy”.
17.4 When should it be performed

• Whenever a detector, X-ray tube, Beam quality filtration, Collimator or Ion chamber is
replaced.
• If the Ion chamber is re-calibrated (only requires CF calibration).

GE HEALTHCARE
• When QAP has failed its isolated defect specification or QAP results have changed by more
than 10% during a two week interval.
• When a pixel or line artifact appears in an image(s).
• The Detector Gain Calibration needs to be completed at the applicable receptor (Table or
* OTS Tube Angulation
* OTS Column Rotation
* OTS Table Long/Lat Cal
* WS 0 Degree Cal
* WS 90 Degree Cal
* If you have performed any Positioner Calibrations you must reset the system by
pressing the <reset> button on the RCIM.
17.5 Procedure
There's the potential for data loss and equipment damage. Be aware of the following:
1. Data loss can occur if procedures are not followed in the proper sequence.
2. The weight of the radiation probe and probe holder will cause the OTS to move vertically
downward, if power is removed to the OTS. Do not power down or reset the system while the
probe and probe holder are attached to the collimator rails.
There are three steps required for calibrating a fixed detector and four steps for a URP detector. All
steps must be completed in the following order: Bad Pixel Calibration, Pixel Gain Variation
Calibration and CF Measurement.
You are required to do the following:

NOTE: The system must be at applications level for at least ten contiguous minutes before
proceeding. The ten minute delay is required to allow the detector to stabilize after powering
up the system, performing a system reset, or re-connecting the URP detector to the system.
The system may prevent you from performing a calibration until after the proper amount of time has
expired. A count down timer is displayed on the status line of the calibration screen. It indicates
the amount time remaining before the calibration will begin.

GE HEALTHCARE
3. Install the flat field phantom.
4. Execute Bad Pixel Calibration
proceeding with Bad Pixel Calibration. The ten minute delay is required to allow the detector
to stabilize after powering up the system, performing a system reset, or re-connecting the URP
detector to the system.
5. Execute Gain Calibration
NOTE: The system must be at applications level for at least five contiguous minutes before
proceeding with Gain Calibration. The five minute delay is required to allow the detector to
stabilize after powering up the system, performing a system reset, or re-connecting the URP
* 20 mm flat field phantom must not be installed for the 60 kVp gain calibrations (gain
<3000 and gain >3000)
* 20 mm flat field phantom must be installed for 80 and both 120 kVp (gain <3000 and
gain >3000)
6. Setup CF Measurement Calibration fixture and Dosimeter

GE HEALTHCARE
CF Measurement Calibration fixture and Dosimeter
A.) Insert X-ray Calibration Fixture into the top slot on collimator slide rails.
B.) Insert Flat Field Phantom into the X-ray Calibration Fixture.
C.) Insert small chamber probe of Dosimeter into X-ray Calibration Fixture as indicated
in the illustrations. (Probe should be 65 cm from focal spot.)
NOTE: The radiation meter is a very sensitive to temperature. It's important that the meter be at or
near room temperature before making any measurements. The meter must be allowed to
thermally stabilize for a minimum of 20 minutes after removing the meter from the case,
especially if it has been stored outside.
Important precautions follow:
I.) If the meter is not stable and drifts with no exposure, let it stabilize before taking
measurements.
II.) Tape the meter in place to avoid misalignment during the measurement.
III.) Verify that the Keithley “Diagnostic” side is facing the collimator.
IV.) Read the meter BEFORE touching the probe holder. Vibration of the meter will
increase the exposure reading.
V.) Hold the hand switch on prep for 3-5 seconds for each exposure.
VI.) Reasonable mR values for detectors are:

> Table detector (12.5 mAs) are 14-19 mR (120 - 165 uGy)
> Wall stand detector (40 mAs) are 38 - 50 mR (330 - 440 uGy)
> Values well out of this range indicate a measurement error
VII.)Verify that the aluminum is replaced in the collimator for the 2nd and 3rd exposures.

GE HEALTHCARE
VIII.)Verify the collimator size adjustments are not accidentally bumped when removing
the probe holder.
IX.) Verify that the grid is not in place before proceeding.
7. Configure Radiation meter to measure exposure in mR or uGy
8. Execute CF Measurement Calibration.
proceeding with CF Measurement Calibration. The five minute delay is required to allow the
detector to stabilize after powering up the system, performing a system reset, or re-connecting
the TRAD detector to the system.
9. Reset the system by pressing the <reset> button on the RCIM.
10. Perform QAP and verify that Image Quality passes.
11. It is recommended that the system be at applications level for at least ten contiguous minutes
before proceeding with QAP.
17.6 Results - Bad Pixels

DEFECT STATUS: PASS - Everything is okay.
DEFECT STATUS: FAIL - The number of bad pixels detected is greater than the specified limit,
either in cluster grouping sizes or individually. Perform the following steps to determine which
corrective action to take:
• Verify that no foreign objects appear in the path of the X-rays. i.e., metal shavings, screws,
etc...
• Perform Bad Pixel calibration again. If DEFECT STATUS: PASS is received, continue.
• If DEFECT STATUS: FAIL is received again, replace detector.

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 18.0 Digital Cassette Calibrations

The following applies when performing the Digital Cassette calibrations:
1.) Detector firmware downloads must have been performed before proceeding with
detector calibrations.
For detector downloads, refer to Perform Detector Downloads.
3.) Before executing any Detector calibration; if you have performed any Positioner
Calibrations you must reset the system by pressing the <reset> button on the RCIM.
4.) Connect the Tether cable connection only, not allow using of Wireless connection.
Place the Digital Cassette on the tabletop as shown in Fig20-13. The detector handle
should be at the front of the table.
Figure 20-13 Position Digital Cassette on Top Table with Tether cable connection
URP Detector
Tether Cable TIB
5.) Remove the radiation meter from its case and allow it to warm-up to room
temperature before using.
6.) SID measurements must be taken with the collimator tape measure. Do NOT rely on
the digital readout on the UIF.

GE HEALTHCARE
Figure 20-14 Use Tape Measure For SID Measurements
7.) If the flat field phantom has any scratches, dents, or other imperfections on the large
surfaces, it must be replaced before calibration.
8.) The following tools are required:
• Flat Field Phantom 2281087
• X-ray Calibration Fixture 2280928
• Dosimeter (Keithley, MDH, or equivalent)
9.) Bad pixel calibration must be executed before gain calibration is performed.
10.)The system must be operating without a reboot for ten contiguous minutes or more.
The detector requires ten minutes or more of stable operation before any calibration
is performed.
11.)When making exposures, hold the expose switch down for multiple exposures.
18.2 Calibration Overview

Bad Pixel Calibration - Used to detect defective pixels. It can be executed independent of the other
calibrations but is not recommended.
The BAD PIXEL calibration routine:
• Acquires images without using X-rays for the first minutes
• Automatically sets default techniques

GE HEALTHCARE
• Automatically sets the collimator blades to 45 cm x 45 cm size (slightly larger than the
detector).
• Displays the Initial Bad Pixel Calibration Screen (Dark Image processing).
Gain Calibration - Tool is used to calibrate a gain coefficient for each pixel in order to achieve
uniform gain across the detector.
• User must manually select each individual kVp station.
• Complete all kVp/Gain station combinations.
CF Measurement - Tool is used to update the AEC dose calibration parameters.
• Run all CF measurement routines.
• The measured exposure value must be entered in units of “mR” or “uGy”.
18.3 When should it be performed

• Whenever a detector, X-ray tube, Beam quality filtration or Collimator is replaced.
• When QAP has failed its isolated defect specification or QAP results have changed by more
than 10% during a two week interval.
• When a pixel or line artifact appears in an image(s).
18.4 Procedure
There is the potential for data loss and equipment damage. Be aware of the following:
1. Data loss can occur if procedures are not followed in the proper sequence.
2. The weight of the radiation probe and probe holder will cause the OTS to move vertically
downward, if power is removed to the OTS. Do not power down or reset the system while the
probe and probe holder are attached to the collimator rails
There are four required steps for calibrating a URP detector. All four steps must be completed in
the following order: Vertical Bar Calibration, Bad Pixel Calibration, Pixel Gain Variation
Calibration and CF Measurement.
You are required to do the following:

GE HEALTHCARE
proceeding. The ten minute delay is required to allow the detector to stabilize after powering
up the system, performing a system reset, or re-connecting the URP detector to the system.
The system may prevent you from performing a calibration until after the proper amount of time has
expired. A count down timer is displayed on the status line of the calibration screen. It indicates
the amount time remaining before the calibration will begin.
2.) Install the flat field phantom.
3.) Execute Bad Pixel Calibration.
proceeding with Bad Pixel Calibration. The ten minute delay is required to allow the detector
to stabilize after powering up the system, performing a system reset, or re-connecting the URP
4.) Execute Gain Calibration
proceeding with Gain Calibration. The five minute delay is required to allow the detector to
stabilize after powering up the system, performing a system reset, or re-connecting the URP

GE HEALTHCARE
• 20 mm flat field phantom must not be installed for the 60 kVp gain calibrations (gain >3000)
• 20 mm flat field phantom must be installed for 80 and both 120 kVp (gain >3000)
5.) Setup CF Measurement Calibration fixture and Dosimeter
CF Measurement Calibration fixture and Dosimeter
A.) Insert X-ray Calibration Fixture into the top slot on collimator slide rails.
B.) Insert Flat Field Phantom into the X-ray Calibration Fixture.
C.) Insert small chamber probe of Dosimeter into X-ray Calibration Fixture as indicated
in the illustrations. (Probe should be 65 cm from focal spot.)
NOTE: The radiation meter is a very sensitive to temperature. It's important that the meter be at or
near room temperature before making any measurements. The meter must be allowed to
thermally stabilize for a minimum of 20 minutes after removing the meter from the case,
especially if it has been stored outside.
Important precautions follow:
I.) If the meter is not stable and drifts with no exposure, let it stabilize before taking
measurements.
II.) Tape the meter in place to avoid misalignment during the measurement.
III.) Verify that the Keithley “Diagnostic” side is facing the collimator.
IV.) Read the meter BEFORE touching the probe holder. Vibration of the meter will
increase the exposure reading.
V.) Hold the hand switch on prep for 3-5 seconds for each exposure.
VI.) Reasonable mR values for detectors are:

GE HEALTHCARE
> Table detector (12.5 mAs) are 14-19 mR (120 - 165 uGy)
> Wall stand detector (40 mAs) are 38 - 50 mR (330 - 440 uGy)
> Values well out of this range indicate a measurement error
VII.)Verify that the aluminum is replaced in the collimator for the 2nd and 3rd exposures.
VIII.)Verify the collimator size adjustments are not accidentally bumped when removing
the probe holder.
IX.) Verify that the grid is not in place before proceeding.
6.) Configure Radiation meter to measure exposure in mR or uGy
7.) Execute CF Measurement Calibration.
proceeding with CF Measurement Calibration. The five minute delay is required to allow the
detector to stabilize after powering up the system, performing a system reset, or re-connecting
the URP detector to the system.
8.) Reset the system by pressing the <reset> button on the RCIM.
9.) Perform QAP and verify that Image Quality passes.
10.) It is recommended that the system be at applications level for at least ten contiguous
minutes before proceeding with QAP.
18.5 Results - Bad Pixels

DEFECT STATUS: PASS - Everything is okay.
DEFECT STATUS: FAIL - The number of bad pixels detected is greater than the specified limit,
either in cluster grouping sizes or individually. Perform the following steps to determine which
corrective action to take:
• Verify that no foreign objects appear in the path of the X-rays. i.e., metal shavings, screws,
etc...
• Perform Bad Pixel calibration again. If DEFECT STATUS: PASS is received, continue.
• If DEFECT STATUS: FAIL is received again, replace detector.

•
•

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 19.0 Dose Predication - mR/mAs

The following applies when performing Dose Predication (mR/mAs) calibrations.
2.) Before executing any Dose Predication (mR/mAs) calibration; if you have performed
any positioner calibration you must reset the system by pressing the <reset> button
on the RCIM.
19.1 Dose indication
19.1.1 Dosimetric calibration
19.1.1.1 Dose and DAP accuracy check procedure

Before conducting this procedure, make sure following items have been calibrated:
• Generator
• Tube
• HVL
• Collimator
• Positioner
• mR/mAs
Procedure:
1.) Set the dosimeter probe with the small ion chamber sensor at 25 cm above the Tabletop/
Wallstand where the prediction algorithm is performed. Ensure the center of the probe is at the
center of x-ray beam.
2.) Cover the detector with lead or other material, or move it out of the FOV if possible, so that the
detector will not be damaged from over exposure.
3.) Set Exposure technique:
• FIXED (NON-AEC) mode
• Table or Wallstand mode
• 100kV, 50mA, 3.2mAs
• 20×20 cm FOV
• 100cm SID
4.) Take exposure.

5.) Read and take note of the results on dosimeter DoseRef. (unit in mR or µGy), the Dose and
DAP value on the image viewer Doseviewer (mGy) and DAPviewer (µGy * m2).
6.) Convert dose unit if needed: 1 mR = 8.76µGy, 1µGy = 0.001 mGy
7.) Determine the reference field size (convert unit to m2 if needed) at the dosimeter position
• Reference Field size = collimated FOV * (SOD/SID)2
GE HEALTHCARE
• where SOD is distance from tube focal spot to dosimeter upper surface.
8.) Calculate the Reference Dose Area Product DAPRef. = DoseRef. * Reference Field size
9.) Compare the DoseRef. and DAPRef. with Doseviewer and DAPviewer as following:
• (DoseRef. - Doseviewer) / DoseRef.*100%
• (DAPRef. - DAPviewer) / DAPRef.*100%
• The acceptable error is less than ±30% when DAP ≥5µGy*m2 ( ±35% when DAP≥ 5µGy*m2
per IEC60601-2-54 clause 203.6.4.5)
19.1.1.2 Dose and DAP accuracy maintenance
In case the DAP error is larger than ±30% when DAP≥ 5µGy*m2, check if the SID, FOV calibration
is good. If there is no problem, run mR/mAs calibration then redo the accuracy check

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 20.0 Image Quality

20.1 Image Monitor Setup with Flat Panel Monitor

Before starting Image Monitor Set-Up, verify the following are complete:
System has been powered up and monitor has been on for at least 20 minutes.
Make sure the monitor is located where it has the proper ambient light conditions - dim room with
no echoes on the monitor. Day light must be avoided since it affects the IQ of the monitor.
20.1.2 When should it be performed

During initial system installation.
Whenever an ACQ monitor or a Viewer monitor is replaced.
Whenever the system is reinstalled.
20.1.3 Procedure
Each system has two monitors, please confirm their brand at first. If they are from NEC’s, please
refer to section 20.1.3.1, if the EIZO’s, please refer to section 20.1.3.2
20.1.3.1 NEC Monitor Setup

Display the SMPTE Test Pattern on the Monitor.
1.) On the image monitor Main Browser, upper right corner, open the Image Tools drop-
down list and select “SMPTE”. This will create a patient exam with the SMPTE pattern
as the image.
2.) On the Main Browser screen, select and open the SMPTE pattern from the Patient
Name window.
3.) The SMPTE pattern will appear on the image monitor.
SMPTE Pattern on Browser

GE HEALTHCARE
NEC 1990SXi Flat Panel Monitor Calibration
1. Display the SMPTE pattern on the image monitor.

NOTE: For more information about the On-Screen Manager (OSM) and controls, see the NEC
MultiSync LCD 1990SXi User’s Manual.
2. Enable the Monitor Service Menu

A.) Power off the monitor
B.) Enable the monitor service menu by powering on the monitor while holding the
"Input" button.
3. Reset the Monitor Settings

A.) Press the "Menu" button to open the On-Screen Display (OSD).
B.) Select Tab 8.
C.) Select "Factory Preset" and press the "Select" button followed by the "Reset" button.
4. Set the monitor Gamma

A.) Select Tab 5.
B.) Select Option "CUSTOM".
C.) Set Custom Value: 2.2.
D.) Set Offset: +35.
5. Exit the Service Menu

A.) Power off the monitor.
B.) Power on the monitor.
6. Adjust Brightness and Contrast

A.) Before proceeding with the Brightness/Contrast adjustments, contact the customer
to determine the typical room ambient light setting that will used during normal
operation. Adjust the room lighting to match this setting.
B.) Press the MENU button to open the OSD.
C.) Adjust the brightness so that the 95% white square is visible into the 100% white. If
a spot meter is available, measure the luminance in the white and verify that it is
between 135 Cd/m2 and 205 Cd/m2. Note: Specifications are approximate, make
adjustments to achieve as close as possible. Verify image performance with
customer.
D.) Adjust the contrast so that the 5% black square is visible into the 0% black. If a spot
meter is available, measure the luminance in the black and verify that it is between
0.8 Cd/m2 and 1.2 Cd/m2. Note: Specifications are approximate, make adjustments
to achieve as close as possible. Verify image performance with customer.
E.) Repeat steps 6c through 6d until the both conditions are met at the same time.
F.) Do not change any other monitor settings.

GE HEALTHCARE
20.1.3.2 EIZO Monitor setup
Two monitors are named as ACQ Monitor and Viewer Monitor, The source of ACQ monitor is DVI
Analog, checked from OSD (On-Screen Display) on info tab by pressing button1 on ACQ monitor;
the source of Viewer monitor is DVI Digital, still checked from OSD on info tab by pressing button1
on Viewer monitor;
Display the SMPTE Test Pattern on the Viewer Monitor.
1.) On the Viewer monitor Main Browser, upper right corner, open the Image Tools drop-
down list and select “SMPTE”. This will create a patient exam with the SMPTE pattern
as the image.
2.) On the Main Browser screen, select and open the SMPTE pattern from the Patient
Name window.

GE HEALTHCARE
3.) The SMPTE pattern will appear on the Viewer monitor.
Figure 20-15 SMPTE Pattern on Browser
EIZO Monitor Setup
1. Display the SMPTE pattern on the Viewer monitor.

NOTE: For more information about the On-Screen Manager (OSM) and controls, see the EIZO
RadiForce RS150-S GE Service Manual.
2. Reset ACQ monitor and Viewer monitor

NOTE: If monitor On-Screen Display (OSD) locked, unlocked by pressing button 4 once and button
2 three times.
A.) Press button 1 to open the OSD
B.) Press button 3 and select Others on the catalog and Reset in the drop-down menu

GE HEALTHCARE
C.) Press button 3 to confirm the selection, then it shows the items under Reset.Select
the first one “Reset to firmware defaults”. Press button 2 or 3 to reset the monitor.
3. Set the ACQ Monitor

NOTE: If monitor OSD locked, then unlock it
A.) Press button 3, select Geometry
B.) Then adjust Sharpness filter from 007 to 015 by button 3 on ACQ monitor
4. Save the changes and exit to finish the setup
20.2 Printer calibration

Before starting printer calibration, verify the following are complete:
Printer has been connected and available

GE HEALTHCARE
20.2.2 Procedure
Follow instruction of below

GE HEALTHCARE
Use a density meter tool to measure density value of the film from1 to 24 and fill in optical density.

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 21.0 PACS / Image Display Test Image

21.1 Objectives
• Simplified Procedure: To determine configuration for Burn-on-Send or No-Burn for each
destination host (PACS).
• Results: To record results from Simplified Procedure and Additional Tests.
• Background: To provide further information about Image Display on PACS.
• Additional Tests: To test several Image Display characteristics (Optional).
21.2 Simplified Procedure

1. Verify All PACS Review Monitors Are Calibrated
NOTE: Monitor calibration is a critical first step before testing and configuring Image Display.
A.) Verify that the PACS monitor is calibrated according to DICOM Part 14. Each site is
responsible for providing evidence of PACS monitor calibration.
B.) View SMPTE Pattern
1.) Load SMPTE pattern into Patient List by clicking on “Image Tools” then “SMPTE”
2.) Send SMPTE pattern to PACS review workstation.
3.) Verify that 5% and 95% squares are equally visible on PACS.
C.) Record results inTable 2 , line numbers 1 and 2
2. Send PACS Test Images to PACS
A.) Load Images
1.) Load the PACS Test Images onto the acquisition workstation. Either use:
> DICOM-formatted CDROM with images

> Images on system under Image Tools
2.) Patient Name will appear as GE_PACS_Test_Image, Definium
3.) Patient ID will be 1000001
B.) Configure PACS to[ No-Burn]

GE HEALTHCARE
1.) Click the Utilities icon
2.) Click Network Connections – Edit
3.) Select the Network Host for the PACS to be tested, click Edit
4.) Click the Preferences tab
5.) Make sure that Apply Burn-on-Send to images… is not checked
C.) Send No-Burn image
1.) Highlight PACS Test Image #1 in the Images list
NOTE: All images in the GE_DX_Image_Display_Test exam are named "1". In the following steps,
when an Image number (1, 2, 3....) is called out, you should select that image ’position’ from
the Images list. For example: image number 1 is the first image on the list, image 6 is the sixth
image on the list. To verify that you have selected the correct image, the image number can
be viewed in the upper left corner of the image.
2.) Click the appropriate PACS Network Host in the Destination icon list
D.) Configure PACS to Burn-on-Send
1.) Click the Utilities icon, click Network Connections – Edit
2.) Select the Network Host for the PACS to be tested, click Edit
3.) Click the Preferences tab; check the option Apply Burn-on-Send to images…
E.) Send Burn-on-Send image
1.) Highlight PACS Test Image 6 in the Images list
2.) Click the appropriate PACS Network Host in the Destination icon list
F.) Review images on PACS
1.) Bring PACS Test Images 1 and 6 up on the PACS review workstation.
• The images can be identified by the watermark image number next to the GE
logo inside the chest image region.
• Verify (if possible) that Image 1 is displayed with a VOI-LUT, and Image #6

GE HEALTHCARE
is displayed with a Linear LUT
2.) If PACS Test Images 1 and 6 appear visually identical (equal number of bright/
dark bands), the PACS supports VOI-LUT. **: Configure PACS as No-Burn
3.) If PACS Test Images 1 and 6 appear visually different (different number of bright/
dark bands), or chest region has saturation in lung or abdomen, the PACS either
does not support VOI-LU or applies it incorrectly. **: Configure PACS as Burn-on-
Send
4.) Record results in Table 2, line numbers 3 and 4
** For more information, see Background and In-Depth Instructions below.
3. Suggested Configurations
Table 1 should be used as a guideline in addition to the tests above to determine if a PACS system
should be configured for Burn-on-Send. This table considers only whether a PACS supports
VOI-LUTs.
Table 1: Suggested PACS Configurations

GE HEALTHCARE
21.3 Results
Table 2: Results from the Simplified and Additional Tests Sections
Category Number Tests Yes / No

Simplified 1 PACS monitors calibrated according to DICOM
2 SMPTE 5% and 95% squares equally visible on
PACS?
3 Images 1 and 6 appear visually identical?
4 PACS configured for Burn-on-Send?
Additional Tests 5 DICOM Header on PACS (Image 1 No-Burn)? WC = / /
WW = / /
VOI-LUT
Tags(Yes/No)
6 DICOM Header on PACS (Image 6 Burn-on- WC = / /
Send)? WW = / /
VOI-LUT
Tags(Yes/No)
7 Values Displayed on PACS Viewer (Image 1)? WC = / /
WW = / /
8 Values Displayed on PACS Viewer (Image 6)? WC = / /
WW = / /
9 Saturation visible in Lung or Abdomen region?
10 Able to see all five squares in Top Band of
Image 6?
11 Able to see all five squares in Top Band of
Image 1?
12 Images 1, 4 and 5 appear visually identical?
13 Images 6, 7 and 8 appear visually identical?
14 PACS able to select Normal/Harder/Softer?
15 DICOM Header on PACS (Image 9 - CR-
Fallback)?
VOI-LUT not present; correct WW/WC?
Table 20-3
21.4 Background Material

1. Definitions
The following are important terms or concepts
• Window Center (WC): also known as Window Level (WL), controls the brightness of an image.
Typically a lower value gives a brighter image.

GE HEALTHCARE
• Window Width (WW): controls the contrast of an image. Typically a lower value gives more
contrast.
• Look-up-Table (LUT): a table of input and output values that converts image pixel data to some
new value
• Value-of-Interest Look-up-Table (VOI-LUT): a LUT used in many modalities to convert image

pixel data into values PACS systems can display. This table of input and output values is
stored in the DICOM header as a public field. The VOI-LUT used in DX images has an “S”
shape that mimics the H&D properties of X-Ray film. As the user changes WW or WC on the
acquisition workstation, a new VOI-LUT is calculated and saved into the DICOM header.
• Linear LUT: a straight LUT where the input is linearly mapped to the output
• Burn-on-Send (BOS): a mode on the acquisition workstation where the VOI-LUT is applied to
the pixel data and new pixel data is calculated. The new pixel data is sent in the DICOM image
without a VOI-LUT curve. Images are displayed on PACS with a Linear LUT, WC=8192,
WW=16383. BOS is can be configured on the Definium workstation.
• DX vs. CR: the DICOM modality that images are sent as, either digital x-ray (DX) or computed
radiography (CR)
• CR-Fallback: a mode on Definium workstations where if the PACS reject DX images, then CR
images are sent instead. This cannot be configured on the Definium workstation. It only occurs
if a PACS does not support DX modality images, or if the PACS is configured to reject DX
modality images.
2. PACS Test Image Features
The PACS Test Images include nine images. The pixel data in every test image is identical. Only
the DICOM headers, annotations, and WC/WW values are slightly different for each pattern.
Each PACS Test Image consists of two aspects:
• A clinical chest image on the right side with Image Number and a GE monogram watermark
• A series of twelve vertical bands on the left side (Top six Dark Bands and Bottom six Bright
Bands)

GE HEALTHCARE
PACS / Image Display Test Image
The 12 bands on the left side each have a different brightness. The top six should appear “dark”
and the bottom six “bright”.
Inside each band are five small squares with different intensities (like the 5% / 95% squares in a
SMPTE pattern). The squares provide a quantitative way to compare two images and report
how the PACS Test Images appear.
3. Testing for an Equal Number of Bands
For the Additional Tests section below, record the following for each image:
A.) The number of distinct bright & dark bands (based on the band intensity)
B.) The number of squares visible in each band For example, if the ramp appears as:
NOTE: Count bands with distinct gray levels, not simply the number of bands with visible squares.
For example, if the ramp appears as:
3. Testing for an Equal Number of Bands
For the Additional Tests section below, record the following for each image:
The number of distinct bright & dark bands (based on the band intensity)
The number of squares visible in each band For example, if the ramp appears as:

GE HEALTHCARE
NOTE: Count bands with distinct gray levels, not simply the number of bands with visible squares.
For example, if the ramp appears as:
Example of counting distinct bands and visible squares.
Then there are two squares in band 4, three squares in band 5, …, and three squares in band 11.
There are four distinct dark bands, and six distinct bright bands. This is because the top three
dark bands are indistinguishable.
Use the values in the following table to quantitatively compare images. For example, to determine
if a PACS supports GE VOI-LUTs, compare PACS Test Images 1 and 6. If the number of
distinct bands and visible squares are equal, then the PACS correctly supports VOI-LUTs.
Record the results of tests as shown below. Record a description of the test below your table

GE HEALTHCARE
21.5 Additional Tests

The following tests are meant to provide additional information about PACS behavior and
performance. These tests should be used if further troubleshooting is required beyond the
configuration determined in the "Simplified Procedure".
Topics include
• Send All PACS Test Images.
• DICOM Headers.
• Visible WC and WW Values. Image Saturation.
• Reduced Dynamic Range with Burn-on-Send.
• Interactive Windowing.

GE HEALTHCARE
• Annotations.
• Multiple VOI-LUTs.
• CR-fallback.
1. Send All PACS Test Images
Send all images to PACS according to the following rules. Send images 1 through 5 as No-Burn,
and send images 6 through 8 as Burn-On-Send. Finally, if the site is interested in exploring
CR-Fallback as an option, configured the PACS for CR-fallback with help from the local IT
team. Then send image 9 as No-Burn.
2. DICOM Headers
A.) View Header
> Open the PACS Test Image(s) on the PACS (Patient ID 2000002)
> View the DICOM header information - The DICOM header is often viewable on
PACS through either a menu drop down, a button, or right-clicking the image.
Click something indicating “ information ”, “ i ”, or “ header ”. Contact local IT
support for further information.
B.) No-Burn Mode (PACS Test Image 1)
1.) Window Center/Width
• Window Center and Window Width tags are 0028x1050 and 0028x1051
• There should be three values separated by a “/”.
• The values should be WC=5226/5226/5226 and WW=2654/1990/3981.
2.) VOI-LUT Tags
• Search the DICOM header for tag 0028x3010 VOILUTSequence.

GE HEALTHCARE
• Below this tag there should be three items 1, 2, and 3 which each have the
following 3 tags: 0028x3002LUTDescriptor, 0028x3003LUTExplanation, and
0028x3006LUTData.
• Each VOILUTSequence should have a LUTExplanation as either Normal,

Harder, or Softer.
3.) Record results in the results table above, Line number 5
C.) Burn-on-Send Mode (PACS Test Image 6)
1.) Window Center/Width
• Window Center and Window Width tags are 0028x1050 and 0028x1051
• There should be three values separated by a “/”.
• The values should be WC=8192/8192/8192 and WW=16383/12288/24575.
2.) VOI-LUT Tags
• Search the DICOM header for tag 0028x3010 VOILUTSequence.
• No VOILUTSequence tag should be present. If a VOILUTSequence is

present, the image was not sent correctly. Resend the image as Burn-on-
Send.
3.) Record results in Table 2, Line number 6
3. Visible WC and WW Values
A.) No-Burn Mode (PACS Test Image 1)
1.) The DICOM header of each PACS Test Image is always sent with WC/
WW=5226/2654.
2.) The values displayed on the PACS side may appear differently. This is
acceptable according to DICOM standards. The values can show up as 8192/
16384, 5226/2654, or something else. The most common and preferred
implementation is to show values of 8192/16384 on PACS
3.) If the values do not appear as 8192/16384:
• Check that the VOI-LUT is being enabled on PACS. The VOI-LUT can often
be enabled on PACS with a drop-down menu on the image, or through
hanging protocols.
GE HEALTHCARE
• This does not indicate that the PACS does not support VOI-LUTs. Support
for VOI-LUTs is strictly determined by the visual appearance of PACS Test
Images 1 and 6.
4.) Record results in Table 2, line number 7
B.) Burn-on-Send Mode (PACS Test Image 6)
1.) PACS displays 8192/16384 for every image.
2.) Record results in Table 2, line number 8
4. Image Saturation
Open the PACS Test Image 1 and check that the clinical chest area appears with no saturation in
the lung region or the abdomen region. Saturation appears as a completely flat dark or white
area. Record results in Table 2, line number 9.
5. Reduced Dynamic Range with Burn-on-Send
The Burn-on-Send configuration causes a reduced dynamic range in the image when the user
changes the window-level of the image on PACS.
NOTE: The images appear identically when first viewed. The loss of dynamic range only occurs
when the user changes window-level.
Open the PACS Test Image 6.
Change the Window-Level on PACS trying to see the 5 squares in all 12 bands: A suggested value
is WC/WW=0/500 (Note: this may vary between different PACS workstations)
The loss of dynamic range is most common in the top dark band. The 5 squares will not be visible
in the top dark band 1: Record results in Table 2, line number 10
6. Interactive Windowing
PACS can apply the VOI-LUT to the image data “interactively” or non-interactively “fixed”. In an
interactive PACS, the VOI-LUT is recalculated as the user changes the WC or WW.
In a non-interactive PACS, the VOI-LUT is applied upon initial display of the image, and the VOI-
LUT is not updated as the user changes WC or WW. Images displayed on non-interactive
PACS are displayed and behave identically as images sent as Burn-on-Send. Non-interactive
PACS can be considered as “Burn-on-Receive.” The five squares will not be visible in all 12
bands (especially the top band) when the image is window-leveled.
The preferred method is an interactive VOI-LUT, (e.g., Centricity). Several PACS are known to

GE HEALTHCARE
apply the VOI-LUT as fixed, e.g., McKesson and Fuji.
A.) Open the PACS Test Image 1.
B.) Change the Window-Level on PACS trying to see the five squares in all 12 bands,
especially the top band.
C.) A suggested value is WC/WW=2000/500 “You may note that this may vary between
different PACS workstations.”
D.) Record whether the five squares are visible in Table 2, line number 11
Different PACS image display scenarios.
7. Annotations
The acquisition workstation can send two types of annotations: L/R markers or custom text.
Annotations may impact image display on PACS.
A.) Open the PACS Test Images 1, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8
B.) Check if the display of the images is identical for images 1, 4, and 5
C.) Record results in Table 2, line number 12
D.) Check if the display of the images is identical for images 6, 7, and 8
E.) Record results in Table 2, line number 13
F.) Review the histogram for each images
Annotations may also change what the histogram looks like for each image. The L/R annotations
are burned into the image data, and therefore appear to stretch or compress the histogram.
8. Multiple VOI-LUTs

GE HEALTHCARE
As indicated above, the GE acquisition workstation is capable of sending 3 VOI-LUTs in the DICOM
header. Some PACS recognize these 3 VOI-LUTs and allow the user to change between each
VOI-LUT. The user can change VOI-LUTs on PACS by selecting Normal, Harder, or Softer
options.
A.) Open PACS Test Image 3 on PACS to test the Normal/Harder/Softer options on
PACS.
B.) Record results in Table 2, line number 14.
C.) Harder should cause the image to have more contrast (smaller WW).
D.) Softer should cause the image to have lower contrast (larger WW).
NOTE: The three options on PACS, Normal/Harder/Softer, should not be confused with the same
three options on the acquisition workstation. The three options on the acquisition workstation
changes the values of the WW before the VOI-LUT is calculated and the image is sent to
PACS. The 9 PACS Test Images are not intended to test the three options on the acquisition
workstation.
9. CR-Fallback
The acquisition workstation is capable of sending images as CR-modality if the PACS cannot
support or is configured to reject the DX-modality.
CR-Fallback effectively sends all images as Burn-on-Send.
This scenario should only be tested if CR-modality images are required on PACS or if the PACS
does not support DX modality images.
A.) Configure the PACS to reject the DX-modality
B.) Send the PACS Test Image 9
C.) Open the PACS Test Image 9
D.) Open the DICOM header for Image#9
> Verify that the VOI-LUT Sequence tag is not present, and
> Verify that the WC=8192/8192/8192 and WW=16383/12288/24575
Record results in Table 2, line number 15
E.) The image should appear visually identical to image 6 if CR-fallback is supported.

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 22.0 Quality Assurance Procedure (QAP)

The following applies when performing Quality Assurance Procedure (QAP).
on SUIF.
2. Before executing any Quality Assurance Procedure; if you have performed any positioner
calibration you must reset the system by pressing the <reset> button on the RCIM.
3. Please wait at least 60 seconds once the detector is connected before beginning QAP.
Performing QAP within this timeframe of 0-60 seconds may FAIL as a result. A repeat QAP to
that receptor should be performed.
22.2 When to Perform QAP

Perform QAP every time you calibrate the detector (Wall Stand and/or Table) and as a final system
check following system installation. See the Operators Manual for the QAP procedure.

GE HEALTHCARE
Chapter 21 Trouble Shooting

Upon request, MANUFACTURER will provide circuit diagrams, component part lists, descriptions,
calibration instructions, or other information to assist service personnel to repair parts
Section 1.0 Diagnostics

Refer to the Service Manual Exclusive Class M CD, Direction 5343958-2EN.
Section 2.0 Schematics

Refer to the Direction 5343955-1EN Schematics
Section 3.0 Replacement Procedures &Illustrated Parts List

(IPL)
Refer to the Direction 5343954-1EN Replacement Procedures &IPL
Chapter 21 - Trouble Shooting Page 465

GE HEALTHCARE

GE HEALTHCARE
Chapter 22 Regulatory Tests (HHS)
This chapter MUST be completed to satisfy HHS regulatory requirements (US and other
region).
Performing the SUIF “Functional Checks” is NOT sufficient to satisfy HHS regulatory
requirements.
This module covers the X-ray generator tests:
• Generator operator indicators:
3.) Tube unit indicator lights
4.) AEC reset
5.) Tones and buzzers
6.) Warning label present
7.) Tech. factors indicated prior to exposure
• Beam quality
• Technique Accuracy and Linearity
• Reproducibility of exposure
• Automatic Exposure Control (AEC)
Perform Collimator Tests:

• General Tests
• SID Accuracy
• Collimator Field Light Intensity
• Collimator Light Field to X-ray Field Alignment
• Collimator Field Size Indicator Accuracy
• Digital Table Mode - Center to Center Alignment Error
• Digital Table Mode - Size to Size Error (PBL check)
• Digital Wall Stand Mode - Center to Center Alignment Error
• Digital Wall Stand Mode - Size to Size Error (PBL check)
Chapter 22 - Regulatory Tests (HHS) Page 467

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 2.0 HHS Compliance Compatibility List
Product Category Product Description Part Number

Master X-ray Control - • Magic PC Z400 • 5811400
Console
Generator • JEDI Generator • 2374870
X-ray Tube • X-ray Tube Casing MX-100 09PS • 46-155400G285
Collimator • Collimator • 5234954
Table • URP Detector Table • 5399738
Wallstand • Std. Arm WS with URP Detector Housing • 5374989
• Extended Arm WS with URP Housing • 5397837
Stretcher • Non-elevating • E6401J
• Elevating • S1200SY
Table 22-1 HHS Compliance Compatibility List
Section 3.0 Customer Information
Fill in the Customer Information data sheet.
GE Service Personnel: Be sure that you return form FDA2579 (US Only).
Failure to do so, except in case of a tube change, is a violation of FDA
regulations and GE Healthcare policy.
Page 468 Section 2.0 - HHS Compliance Compatibility List

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 4.0 Test Equipment
Fill in the Test Equipment data sheet.
Item Manufacturer Model No. Serial No. Cal. Due Date mm/dd/ yyyy
Radiation Meter MDH 2025
Non-invasive kV Meter Keithley 35080A
Light Meter Digaphot
DVM
HHS Test Kit GEMS 46-303879G1 or 46-315694G1 N/A N/A
mA Meter

GE HEALTHCARE
Item Manufacturer Model No. Serial No. Cal. Due Date mm/dd/ yyyy
mAs Meter
Oscilloscope
HV Divider
Electrical Safety GEMS 46-328406G1

Analyzer Service Kit
(115v / 50,60 Hz) or
equivalent
Electrical Safety GEMS 46-328406G2
Analyzer Service Kit -
International
(220v / 50 Hz) or
equivalent
AC Grounding HiTESTER Hioki 3157-01 5305782
Torque Wrench
Section 5.0 X-ray Generator Tests

5.1 General
5.1.1 Preliminary Requirements

No requirements.

• Radiation meter and probe
• 3 mm standard absorber (using filters from HVL Attenuator part # 46-194427P274)
• Invasive HV divider (i.e., Dynalyzer or equivalent) - required for US Government Customers/
Sites only
• 3.8 cm (1-1/2”) thickness of Aluminum
5.2 Generator Operator Indicators

Perform the following procedures and fill in the Generator Operator Indicators data sheet below.
Page 470 Section 5.0 - X-ray Generator Tests

GE HEALTHCARE
1. Tube Unit Indicator Light
a. Start an exam and select either a table or wallstand AEC exposure.
b. Verify that the tube indicator light is lit on the X-ray tube. See Illustration 20-1.
Illustration 20-1: Tube Unit Indicator Light
2. AEC Reset
b. Align OTS to selected receptor and verify all exposure inhibits are cleared (i.e., an exposure
is ready to be taken).
c. Select minimum kVp and mA.
d. Place the system into override by rotating the override switch located on the rear of the
OTS UIF (User Interface).
e. Rotate the X-ray tube so that the X-ray field does not radiate the detector.
f. Take an exposure and verify that the AEC backup time is reached.
g. Verify that “Backup Time Reached” popup is displayed on the acquisition monitor. See Illustration
20-2.
Illustration 20-2: AEC Reset Popup Message
h. Attempt to take another exposure and verify the exposure is inhibited.

i. Click OK on the “Backup Time Reached” popup; verify the popup is erased and an exposure can
be taken.
j. Return the override switch located on the rear of the OTS UIF to its normal position.

GE HEALTHCARE
3. Tones and Buzzers
b. Align OTS to selected receptor and verify all exposure inhibits are cleared (i.e., an exposure is
ready to be taken).
c. Take an exposure and verify that an X-ray tone sounds during the exposure.
4. Warning Label Present
Inspect the RCIM and verify that the warning label is present and has the following text (see
Illustration 20-3):
Warning: This X-ray unit may be dangerous to patient and operator unless safe exposure factors,
operating instructions and maintenance schedules are observed. To be used by authorized
personnel only.
Illustration 20-3: Warning Label
5. Tech. Factor Indicated Prior to Exposure

b. Verify that the selected kVp, mA and exposure backup time are displayed on the acquisition
monitor.
c. Select Fixed Time.
d. Verify that the selected kVp, mA, mAs, and exposure time are displayed on the acquisition
monitor.
GENERATOR OPERATOR INDICATORS Yes No
1. Tube unit indicator light
2. AEC reset
3. Tones and buzzers
4. Warning label present
5. Tech. factors indicated prior to exposure
5.3 Beam Quality
1. Position radiation probe as shown in Illustration 20-4, "Good Geometry".

Illustration 20-4: Half Value Layer Probe Positioning - "Good Geometry"

GE HEALTHCARE
Item Description
1 Diagnostic Source Assembly
2 Probe
3 Standard Absorber
4 Useful Beam
Absorber located midway between Probe and focal spot. Beam slightly larger than the Probe
active volume.
Common Problems To Avoid:

○ Useful beam smaller than active area of probe
○ Useful beam significantly larger than active area of probe
○ Probe not 30 cm (12”) from absorber
○ Intensifier (or anything else) within 10.16 cm (4”) of probe
2. The optimum position for the standard absorber is midway between the focal spot and the
radiation probe. Other positions will introduce reading errors. For example, if the absorber is
placed close to the probe, then the probe will receive excess scatter and the absorber will appear
to have absorbed less.
3. Set technic factors as follows:

○ 80 kVp, 50 to 100 mA, 1/2 to 1 second
○ mA and time should be adjusted so that the reading in step List item Make an exposure and
measure exposure with no added filters. Record the reading. This represents 100% transmission
level.Exposure (without absorber) ___________. contains three significant digits.

GE HEALTHCARE
4. Remove or dial out all filters that are removable by the operator and collimate slightly larger than
the active volume of the probe using the light field.
5. Make an exposure and measure exposure with no added filters. Record the reading. This
represents 100% transmission level.
Exposure (without absorber) ___________
6. Place 3 mm standard absorber (using filters from HVL Attenuator part # 46-194427P274, total
aluminum filtration = 3.0 mm) in beam. Absorber must be on table top or in collimator accessory
rails. Attach additional aluminum filtration to probe side of the standard absorber using masking
tape. Ensure tape does not encroach upon usable beam.
7. Make an exposure and measure exposure with standard absorber. Record the reading.
Exposure (with absorber) ___________
8. Determine the ratio: Ratio = ________________ Exposure (with absorber) / Exposure (without
absorber)
9. Fill in the Beam Quality data sheet:
BEAM QUALITY (HALF VALUE LAYER)

Radiation Reading Ratio (with/ Aluminum Manufacture Date
without) Filtration
With Standard Absorber Without Standard Absorber
Value
3.0 mm
Acceptance Criteria On or After June 10th, 2006:

— Ratio greater than or equal to 0.50 @ 3.0 mm Aluminum Minimum
5.4 Technique Accuracy and Linearity

1. Turn off system power.
2. Install an invasive HV divider (i.e., Dynalyzer or equivalent - required for US Government

Customers/Sites only) in series with the X-ray tube.
3. Turn on system power and boot up system. Wait 1 hour and 15 minutes before making
measurements.
4. Perform X-ray exposures as indicated in the table below, selecting a time that results in a 20 mAs
exposure. Record the results in the table below.
5. Verify that the errors do not exceed the specifications given in the table below.
6. Fill in the Technique Accuracy and Linearity data sheet:

GE HEALTHCARE
KVP AND MA/MAS ACCURACY AND LINEARITY

Focus Selected Selected Selected Measured mA Specification Measured kVp Specification Measured Exposure Time
S/L mA/ mAs kVp Time ms ma/mAs Range kVp Range Time ms Specification Range
S 10 60 2000 8.5 11.5 58.2 61.8 1980 2020
S 200 60 100 160 240 55 65 94.5 105.5
S 10 80 2000 8.5 11.5 77.6 82.4 1980 2020
S 200 80 100 160 240 74 86 94.5 105.5
S 10 130 2000 8.5 11.5 126.1 133.9 1980 2020
S 200 130 100 160 240 121.5 138.5 94.5 105.5
L 250 60 80 200 300 55 65 75.5 84.5
L 500 70 40 400 600 64.5 75.5 37.5 42.5
L 250 80 80 200 300 74 86 75.5 84.5
L 800 80 40 640 960 74 86 37.5 42.5
L 250 130 80 200 300 121.5 138.5 75.5 84.5
L 500 130 40 400 600 121.5 138.5 37.5 42.5
kVp Accuracy Specification ±3% for long exposures (>=500 ms), ±(5%+2 kV) for short exposures.
mA Accuracy Specification ±(5%+1 mA) for long exposures (>=500 ms), ±20% for short exposures.
Time Accuracy Specification ±1% for long exposures (>=500 ms), ±(5%+0.5 ms) for short exposures >= 0.5mAs.
5.5 Reproducibility Of Exposure

For any specific combination of selected technique factors, the estimated coefficient of variation
(CV) of radiation exposures must be no greater than 0.05. HHS rejection limit is 0.045.
Test Equipment: Radiation meter with integrate mode, 1-1/2” (3.8 cm) thickness of Aluminum.
1. Select Digital mode.
2. Align the OTS with the detector, Lateral Detent ON.
3. SID = 100 cm.
4. For Digital table place 1-1/2” (3.8 cm) aluminum on the table, center in the collimator light. For
Digital wall stand, rotate the detector housing to 90 degrees and place the aluminum on the detector
barrier (top surface), center in the collimator light.
5. Center radiation probe 12 in. (30 cm) above the table top or detector barrier (wall stand).
6. Collimate to a field size of 5 in. (13 cm) square.
7. Select 80 kVp, AEC mode and mA such that the exposure will be at least 0.1 second long.
8. Measure the exposure in mR for each of the 10 exposures. After each exposure, recycle the
technique (switch to other values and then return them to the original values). Also vary the time
between exposures to record any filament heating variations. Record results in Table21-2.
9. Verify that the coefficient of variation is < 0.045 for AEC exposures for results recorded in Table
21-2.

GE HEALTHCARE
10. Fill in the Reproducibility of Exposure - Table data sheet in Table 21-4.
11. Repeat the above procedure for the wall stand detector. Record the results in Table 21-3.
12. Verify that the coefficient of variation is < 0.045 for AEC exposures for results in Table 21-3.
13. Fill in the Reproducibility of Exposure - Wall Stand data sheet: Reproducibility of Exposure in
Table 21-5.
Exposure Number kVp mA Time mR

1
5
6
8
9
10
Table 22-2 Test Results:
Exposure Number kVp mA Time mR

1
2
4
5
10
Table 22-3 Test Results:
Calculation for Coefficient of Variation (C.V.):

Formula: C.V. = s / X(avg.) where s = sample standard deviation (n-1)
Sample standard deviation (s) can be calculated on a calculator with statistics functions (such as
the TI36Y) as follows:
• Clear the stat register, press (CSR).

GE HEALTHCARE
• Enter the first reading and then press (Σ+). Repeat this step for all readings.
• Press (mean) to get X(avg.).
• Press sample standard deviation key (n-1).
• Enter the results in the formula above.
REPRODUCIBILITY OF EXPOSURE
kVp mA Exposure - mR C.V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 9 10
Table 80
Wall Stand 80
Table 22-4 Reproducibility of Exposure - Table Data Sheet
REPRODUCIBILITY OF EXPOSURE
kVp mA Exposure - mR C.V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 9 10
Table 80
Wall Stand 80
Table 22-5 Reproducibility of Exposure - Wall Stand Data Sheet
5.6 Automatic Exposure Control (AEC) Tests
5.6.1 AEC Minimum Exposure Time

Overview
At 50 kVp or more, minimum exposures must be less than 16 msec.or less than the time to deliver
5 mAs, whichever time is greater.
Procedure - For Standard Arm and Extended Arm Wall Stands
1. Start a Wall Stand digital exam.
2. Select 50 kVp, AEC (area 1 selected) and maximum mA. 100 msec or 10mAs.
3. Align the OTS to the detector and collimator is in PBL mode; green LED illuminated.
4. Lateral Detent ON.
5. Set the SID to 40 inches.
6. Remove all phantoms.
7. Place Wall Stand detector in the vertical position.
8. Acquire an AEC exposure.
9. Record the exposure time and repeat the process for each of the three cells (Illustration
20-5 ):
Ion Chamber Cell A (Left) _____________ msec
Ion Chamber Cell C (Right) _____________ msec
Ion Chamber Cell B (Center)_____________ msec

GE HEALTHCARE
Illustration 20-5: Ion Chamber Cells Used in Vertical Position
10. Verify that the exposure time is less than 16 msec, or less than 5 mAs.
11. For Extended Arm Wall Stands only:
a. Repeat the above procedure with the Wall Stand detector in the horizontal position.
b. Record the exposure time and repeat the process for each of the three cells (Illustration
20-6):
Ion Chamber Cell D (Left) _____________ msec
Ion Chamber Cell A (Right) _____________ msec
Ion Chamber Cell B (Center)_____________ msec
Illustration 20-6: Ion Chamber Cells Used in Horizontal Position
c. Verify that the exposure time is less than 16 msec, or less than 5 mAs.
d. Fill in the AEC Minimum Exposure Time in Table 19-6.
12. Start a Table digital exam.
13. Select 50 kVp, AEC (area 1 selected) and maximum mA. 100 msec or 10mAs.
14. Align the OTS to the detector and collimator is in PBL mode; green LED illuminated.
15. Lateral Detent ON.
16. Set the SID to 40 inches.
17. Remove all phantoms.
18. Acquire an AEC exposure.
19. Record the exposure time and repeat the process for each of the three cells (Illustration20-7):

GE HEALTHCARE
Illustration 20-7: Ion Chamber Cells Used in Table
Ion Chamber (Left) _____________ msec

Ion Chamber (Right) _____________ msec
Ion Chamber (Center) _____________ msec
20. Verify that the exposure time is less than 16 msec, or less than 5 mAs.
21. Fill in the AEC Minimum Exposure Time in Table 21-6.
AEC MINIMUM EXPOSURE TIME Minimum exposure time Yes No N/A

requirement met for each sensing area of :
Wall Stand Detector Vertical
Wall Stand Detector Horizontal
Table Detector
Table 22-6 AEC Minimum Exposure Time Data Sheet
5.6.2 AEC Maximum mAs

At 50kV or more, exposures shall not exceed 600mAs per exposure.
Below 50 kV exposures shall not exceed 2,000 mAs.
5.6.2.1 Procedure (50kVp)

2. Select 50 kVp, AEC (all three areas selected) and an mA that selects 600 mAs.
3. Position the X-ray tube away from the Ion chamber selected, close collimator blades and select
0.3 mm CU filter.
4. Perform an exposure.
5. Record the selected mAs and actual mAs. After exposure, mAs will be displayed on the monitor
screen.
Selected mAs ________________
Measured mAs _______________

GE HEALTHCARE
6. Verify that the AEC exposure is less than 600 mAs.
7. Verify that after the exposure is completed, a backup mAs popup window is displayed. Click the
OK button. Verify popup window is removed and exposures are allowed.
8. Fill in the AEC Maximum mAs in Table 19-7.
AEC MAXIMUM mAs Yes No

Maximum mAs requirements met @ < 600 mAs?
Table 22-7 AEC Maximum mAs - 600 mAs data sheet
5.6.2.2 Procedure (40kVp)

2. Select 40 kVp, AEC (all three areas selected) and an mA that selects 2000mAs.
3. Position the X-ray tube away from the Ion chamber selected, close collimator blades and select
0.3 mm CU filter.
5. Record the selected mAs and actual mAs. After exposure, mAs will be displayed on the monitor
screen.
Selected mAs ________________
Measured mAs _______________
6. Verify that the AEC exposure is less than 2000 mAs.
7. Verify that after the exposure is completed, a backup mAs popup window is displayed. Click the
OK button. Verify popup window is removed and exposures are allowed.
8. Fill in the AEC Maximum mAs in Table 19-8.
AEC MAXIMUM mAs Yes No

Table 22-8 AEC Maximum mAs - 600 mAs data sheet

GE HEALTHCARE
Section 6.0 Collimator Tests

6.1 Introduction
System level test procedures for the Regulatory requirements of the Digital Radiographic Imaging
System.
6.2 General Tests

Fill in the General Tests data sheet in Table 22-9.
AUTOMATIC COLLIMATORS Yes No

Does the collimator respond to all changes in 5 seconds or less? (Y/N)
When going from high SID towards a lower SID, the collimator switches to manual mode at a SID
of: (< 35.5in or 90.17cm)
When going from a low SID to a higher SID, the collimator switches into automatic mode at a
SID of: (>= 35.5in or 90.17cm)
Table 22-9 General Tests
6.3 SID Accuracy
The difference between the indicated SID and the actual SID may not exceed 1.8% of the
indicated SID.
Measurements will be made between the focal spot locator decal (on the X-ray tube) and the table
top for Digital Table.
Measurements will be made between the focal spot locator decal (on the X-ray tube) and the
patient barrier for Digital Wall Stand.

GE HEALTHCARE
6.3.1 Procedure for Digital Table
1. Prepare the Magic PC for an exam.
2. Select Digital Table mode.
3. Align the X-ray tube to the detector.
4. Set the Tube Angle to 0 degrees.
5. Lateral center detent.
6. Following Table 19-10 below, set the OTS/Table to the SID position.
7. Measure the distance from the focal spot label to the table top. Enter the value into the
"Measured" column in Table 21-10.
NOTE: Add _____cm for Distance from Table Top to Detector for Measured Value.
○ (URP Detector) Table OID = 6.9 cm
8. Determine the error as follows:

Accuracy = ((Display value-Measured value) / Measured value) × 100
9. Verify that the SID error is < or = 1.8% SID.

10. Fill in the SID Accuracy - Table data sheet: SID Accuracy in Section 6.11.1.
SID Displayed Measured Error % of SID Error

102 cm (40 in)
120 cm (47 in)
152 cm (60 in)

Table 22-10 SID Test Data - Table
6.3.2 Procedure (Digital Wall Stand)

2. Select Digital Wall Stand mode.
4. Set the Tube Angle to 90 degrees.
6. Following Table 21-11 below, set the OTS/Wall Stand to the SID position.
7. Measure the distance from the focal spot label to the patient barrier. Enter the value into the
"Measured" column in Table 21-11.
NOTE: Add _____cm for Distance from patient barrier to Detector for Measured Value.
○ (URP Detector) WS OID = 5.0 cm
Determine the error as follows:
Accuracy = ((Display value - Measured value) / Measured value) ×100
Page 482 Section 6.0 - Collimator Tests

GE HEALTHCARE
Verify that the SID error is < or = 1.8% SID.

8. Fill in the SID Accuracy - Wall Stand data sheet: SID Accuracy - Wall Stand in Section
6.11.1.
Wall Stand SID Displayed Measured Error % of SID Error

Horizontal 102 cm (40 in)
Vertical 102 cm (40 in)


Table 22-11 SID Test Data - Wall Stand
6.4 Collimator Field Light Intensity
Tools Required: Light meter, tape measure.

The average illumination at a distance of 100 cm (39.37”) from the focal spot shall be no less than
15 foot candles (160 lux).
Verify that the light meter used for this test has an accuracy of 5% or better.
1. Place the light meter on a horizontal surface (table top) with sensor directed toward collimator
light source.
2. Adjust the distance from the X-ray tube focal spot to light meter sensor to 100 cm (39.37”).
3. Turn on the collimator lamp and adjust the field size to 10” x 10” (25.4 x 25.4 cm).Turn on the
collimator lamp and adjust the field size to 10” x 10” (25.4 x 25.4 cm).
4. With the collimator lamp OFF, measure the ambient light level. If possible, room lights should
be turned off during testing.
5. Record ambient light level measurement______________
6. Turn collimator Lamp ON.
7. Centering the light meter in each of the 4 quadrants, measure light level and record data.
Quadrant 1 _____________
Quadrant 2 _____________
Quadrant 3 _____________
Quadrant 4 _____________

GE HEALTHCARE
8. Verify that the average illumination at 100 cm from the focal spot is no less than 15 footcandles
(160 lux) above ambient brightness.
9. Fill in the Collimator Field Light Intensity data sheet: Collimator Field Light Intensity in Section
6.11.2.
6.5 Collimator Light Field to X-ray Field Alignment

Tools Required: Light to X-ray test pattern (part number 46-303843P1)
The total misalignment of the X-ray and light fields in either the lateral or longitudinal directions
may not exceed 1.8%.
2. Select Digital Table or Digital Wall Stand mode.
4. Place the light to X-ray test pattern on the table (or tape to the patient barrier on the wall stand).
5. Collimator in override mode.
6. Adjust the +/- buttons on the collimator to obtain a SID of 100 cm.
7. Using the collimator dials, adjust the light field to the 10 inch outline square on the test pattern.
Center pattern as necessary.
8. Select 60 kVp, 200ma, small focal spot, and AEC mode.
9. Perform a small focal spot exposure.
10. Select the large focal spot.
11. Select 60 kVp, 200ma and AEC mode.
13. Select the RAW image for small focal spot; Using the marks on the test pattern, record the
differences between the X-ray image and the test pattern. Enter the values below for N, S, E and W.

GE HEALTHCARE
N+S error = ________

E+W error = ________
14. Determine the percentage misalignment: (misalignment divided by SID) x 100
(N+S error / SID) x 100 = __________
(E+W error / SID) x 100 = __________
15. Verify that the misalignment in both calculations is less than 1.8 percent of SID.
16. Fill in the Collimator Light Field to X-ray Field - Small data sheet: Collimator Light Field to Xray
Field Accuracy Check in Section 6.11.3.
17. Select the Large spot image. Using the marks on the test pattern, record the differences
between the X-ray image and the test pattern. Enter the values below for N, S, E and W.
N+S error = ________

E+W error = ________
18. Determine the percentage misalignment: (misalignment divided by SID) x 100
(N+S error / SID) x 100 = __________
(E+W error / SID) x 100 = __________
19. Verify that the misalignment in both calculations is less than 1.8 percent of SID.
20. Fill in the Collimator Light Field to X-ray Field - Large data sheet: Collimator Light Field to Xray
Field Accuracy Check in Section 6.11.3.

GE HEALTHCARE
6.6 Collimator Field Size Indicator Accuracy
The difference between the indicated field size and the actual field size shall not exceed 1.7% SID
in either direction.
To determine Image Size and Centering, exposures will be completed in Application mode. All
measurements shall use the RAW Image.
6.6.1 How to Measure

• Select the Measurement tools Icon, select Line. Using the Line measurement tool measure the
size of the X-ray image.
• Use the Line tool to measure the Image at the table top plane. Magnification calculation needs to
be added to measure values.
• Record the measure values.
• Line values are displayed at the bottom right corner of the monitor.
• Measure the distance between front blade and rear blade of the Image = d1.
• Measure the distance between left blade and right blade of the Image = d2.
Magnification Calculation
100 cm / 92.9 cm = 1.08 Magnification factor for Fixed Table
100 cm / 93.1 cm = 1.07 Magnification factor for TRAD Table
100 cm / 95.0 cm = 1.05 Magnification factor for Fixed Wallstand
6.6.2 Procedure for Digital Table Mode

1. Select Digital Table Mode.
2. Align the X-ray tube to the detector. The beam axis should be perpendicular to the plane of the
detector.
3. SID =100 cm.
4. Manually adjust collimator knobs to set collimator FOV to 24 x 24 cm.
5. Take an 80kVp, 50ma, AEC exposure.
6. Select RAW Image.
7. Measure actual image height and width. Multiply the dimensions of the image by the
magnification factor to determine the size of the X-ray field at the detector plane.
Height of image ________x Magnification factor = _________ actual size (d1)
Width of image ________ x Magnification factor = _________ actual size (d2)
8. Calculate indicator to actual size error.
9. Record the measure values.
where, (d1) = height of image% error ____________________

GE HEALTHCARE
(d2) = width of image% error_____________________
10. Verify that the difference between the indicated field size and the actual field size does not
exceed 1.7% SID in either direction.
11. Fill in the Collimator Field Size Indicator Accuracy data sheet: Collimator Field Size Indicator
Accuracy in Section 6.11.4.
6.6.3 Procedure for Digital WS Mode

1. Select Digital WS Mode.
2. Align the X-ray tube to the detector. The beam axis should be perpendicular to the plane of the
detector.
3. SID =180 cm.
4. Manually adjust collimator knobs to set collimator FOV to 24 x 24 cm.
5. Take an 80kVp, 50ma, AEC exposure.
6. Select RAW Image.
magnification factor to determine the size of the X-ray field at the detector plane.
Height of image ________x Magnification factor = _________ actual size (d1)
where, (d1) = height of image% error ____________________

(d2) = width of image% error_____________________
10. Verify that the difference between the indicated field size and the actual field size does not
exceed 1.7% SID in either direction.
11. Fill in the Collimator Field Size Indicator Accuracy data sheet: Collimator Field Size Indicator
Accuracy in Section 6.11.4.
6.7 Digital Table Mode - Center to Center Alignment Error

• Misalignment of the center of the X-ray field and the center of the receptor shall not exceed 1.8%.
• To determine the alignment error, exposures will be completed in Application mode.
• All measurements shall use the RAW Image.

GE HEALTHCARE
• Select the Measurement tools Icon, select Line.
• Using the Line measurement tool, draw diagonal lines on the image to identifying both the center
of the X-ray field and the center of the active area.
• Using the Line measurement tool, Measure the separation of the two centers.
• Record the values in the "Measured" column in Table 21-12 below.
6.7.2 Procedure
1. Select Digital Table mode.
2. Place the OTS at midrange of longitudinal travel.
4. Position the OTS to mid-vertical height, position the Table to mid-vertical height.
5. Position OTS to obtain SID =100 cm.
6. Set X-ray tube angle = 0 deg; set collimator rotation = 0 deg.
7. Adjust collimator FOV = 30 x 24 cm.
8. Verify that the collimator is in PBL mode; green LED illuminated.
9. Verify that the tracking positioning is completed; detent lights are ON.
10. Acquire a 80kVp, AEC exposure, small focal spot.
11. Select RAW image, using the measurement tool record the separation of the two centers.
13. Verify center to center error is < or = 1.8% SID.

14. Fill in the Table Center to Center Error data sheet: Table - Center to Center Error in Section
6.11.1.
Table Height OTS FOV Center to Center Error % of SID Error
Head-end Minimum 102 cm 30 x 24 cm
Foot-end Minimum 102 cm 30 x 24 cm
Head-end Maximum Max. SID 24 x 30 cm
Foot-end Maximum Max. SID 24 x 30 cm

Table 22-12 Center to Center Error - Table
6.8 Digital Table Mode - Size to Size Error (PBL check)
• The difference between the X-ray field size and the nominal size of the image shall not 2.8% in
one direction and 3.8% for both directions combined.
• Maximum longitudinal sizing error in the receptor plane < 2.8% SID.
• Maximum transverse sizing error in the receptor plane < 2.8% SID.
• Maximum sum of longitudinal plus transverse sizing errors in the receptor plane < 3.8% SID.

GE HEALTHCARE
• To determine the size to size error, exposures will be completed in Application mode.
• All measurements shall use the RAW image.
• Using the Line measurement tool, measure the size of the X-ray image.
• Line tool measure the Image at the tabletop plane, magnification calculation needs to be added to
measure values.
• Record the measure values.
• Measure the distance between front blade and rear blade of the Image = d1.
• Measure the distance between left blade and right blade of the Image = d2.
102 cm / 95.1 cm = 1.07 Magnification factor for URP Table
6.8.2 Procedure
1. Select Digital Table Mode.

2. Place the OTS at mid-range of longitudinal travel, lateral detent position.
3. Set the SID =100 cm.
4. Set the X-ray tube angle = 0 deg.
5. Set the collimator FOV = Full FOV (on OTS user interface).
6. Check that PBL is indicated on collimator face (green LED is on).
7. Rotate the collimator 45 degrees. Set 41 x 41 cm FOV. Defeat the collimator rotation switch.
8. Take a 60kVp, 50ma, AEC exposure.
9. Select RAW image.
magnification ratio to determine the size of the X-ray at the detector plane.
Height of image ________ x Magnification factor = _________ actual size (d1)
Calculate indicator to actual size error.
11. Record the measure values in Table 21-13.
12. Verify that both the height and width size to size error are < or = 2.8%.
13. Verify that the sum of both is < or = 3.8% SID.
14. Fill in the Table Size to Size Error data sheet: Table - Size to Size Error in Section 6.11.1.

GE HEALTHCARE
(d1) = height of image% error ____________________

(d2) = width of image% error _____________________
Height of Width of Image Height Height% Width% of Total

Width
FOV SID Image x Mag. x Mag. Factor Error of SID SID Error Error% of
Error
Factor Error SID
41 x 41 cm 102 cm
24 x 24 cm 102 cm
18 x 18 cm 102 cm
41 x 41 cm 102 cm
Table 22-13 Size to Size Error - Table
6.9 Digital Wall Stand Mode - Center to Center Alignment Error
• Misalignment of the center of the X-ray field and the center of the receptor shall not exceed 1.8%.
• To determine center to center error, exposures will be completed in Application mode.
1. Select the Measurement tools Icon, select Line.
2. Using the Line measurement tool, draw diagonal lines on the image to identifying both the
center of the X-ray field and the center of the active area.
3. Measure the separation of the two centers, using the Line measurement tool.
4. Record the center-to-center error values in Table 21-14 below.
5. Line values are displayed at the bottom right corner of the monitor.

GE HEALTHCARE
7. Verify that the center to center error is < or = 1.8% SID.

8. Fill in the Wall Stand Center to Center Error data sheet: Wall Stand - Center to Center Error in
Table 21-14.
Wall Stand SID/OTS FOV Center to Center % of SID Error

Error
Horizontal Min. Height 102 cm (40 in) 30 x 24 cm
Horizontal Max. Height 102 cm (40 in) 30 x 24 cm
Vertical Mid. Height 102 cm (40 in) 30 x 24 cm
Vertical Min. Height 183 cm (72 in) 30 x 24 cm
Vertical Max. Height 183 cm (72 in) 30 x 24 cm
Table 22-14 Center to Center Error - Wall Stand
6.10 Digital Wall Stand Mode - Size to Size Error (PBL check)
• The difference between the X-ray field size and the nominal size of the image shall not exceed
2.8% in one direction and 3.8% for both directions combined.
• Maximum longitudinal sizing error in the receptor plane < 2.8% SID.
• Maximum transverse sizing error in the receptor plane < 2.8% SID.
• Maximum sum of longitudinal plus transverse sizing errors in the receptor plane < 3.8% SID.
• To determine size to size errors, exposures will be completed in Application mode.

• Using the Line measurement tool, measure the size of the X-ray image.
• Using the Line tool, measure the Image at the barrier plane. Magnification calculation needs
to be added to measured values.
SID Fixed Wall Stand

102 cm 1.05
183 cm 1.03
Table 22-15 Magnification Calculation
• Record the measured values in Table 21-16 below.

GE HEALTHCARE
• Measure the distance between front blade and rear blade of the image = d1.
• Measure the distance between left blade and right blade of the image = d2.
6.10.2 Procedure
1. Rotate the collimator 45 degrees. Set 41 x 41 cm FOV. Defeat the collimator rotation switch
should be disabled.
2. Take a 60kVp, 50ma, AEC exposure.
3. Select RAW image.
magnification ratio to determine the size of the X-ray at the detector plane.
Height of image ________ x Magnification factor = _________ actual size (d1)
(d1) = height of image% error _________________

(d2) = width of image% error _____________________o
7. Verify that both the height and width size to size error are < or = 2.8%.
8. Verify that the sum of both is < or = 3.8% SID.
9. Fill in the Wall Stand Size to Size Error data sheet: Wall Stand - Size to Size Error in Table 21-14.
Height of Width of Height Width Height% Width% Total Error%

FOV SID Wall Stand Image x Image x Error Error of SID of SID of SID
Mag. Factor Mag. Factor Error Error
41x41 m 102 cm Horizontal, Mid.

(40 in) Height
24x24cm 102 cm Horizontal, Mid.
(40 in) Height
18x18cm 102 cm Horizontal, Mid.
(40 in) Height
41x41cm 102 cm Vertical, Mid.
(40 in) Height
(40 in) Height
(40 in) Height
Table 22-16 Size to Size Error - Wall Stand

GE HEALTHCARE
Height of Width of Height Width Height% Width% Total Error%
FOV SID Wall Stand Image x Image x Error Error of SID of SID of SID
Mag. Factor Mag. Factor Error Error

(72 in) Height
(72 in) Height
(72 in) Height
Table 22-16 Size to Size Error - Wall Stand
6.11 Data Sheets
6.11.1 SID Accuracy

SID Accuracy - Table
SID Displayed Measured Error % of SID Error

102 cm (40 in)
120 cm (47 in)
152 cm (60 in)
SID Accuracy - Wall Stand
Wall Stand SID Displayed Measured Error % of SID Error

6.11.2 Collimator Field Light Intensity
COLLIMATOR FIELD LIGHT INTENSITY Yes No

The average illumination at a distance of 100 cm (39.37”) from the focal spot is no less
than 15 foot candles (160 lux).)
6.11.3 Collimator Light Field to X-ray Field Accuracy Check
SID Focal Spot Error Lateral (cm) Error Long (cm) % of SID Lateral % of SID Long
100 cm Small
100 cm Large

GE HEALTHCARE
6.11.4 Collimator Field Size Indicator Accuracy
SID Focal Spot Error Height (cm) Error Long (cm) % of SID Lateral % of SID Long
100 cm Small
6.11.5 Table - Center to Center Error
Table Height OTS FOV Center to Center Error % of SID Error
Head-end Minimum 102 cm 30 x 24 cm
Foot-end Minimum 102 cm 30 x 24 cm

Head-end Maximum Max. SID 24 x 30 cm
Foot-end Maximum Max. SID 24 x 30 cm
6.11.6 Table - Size to Size Error
Height of Width of
Image x Im‐age x Height% of Width% of Total Error%
Height Er‐ror
Mag. Factor Mag. SID Error SID Error of SID
FOV SID Factor Width Error
41x41cm 102 cm
24x24cm 102 cm
18x18cm 102 cm
6.11.7 Wall Stand - Center to Center Error
Wall Stand SID/OTS FOV Center to Center Error % of SID Error
Horizontal Min. Height 102 cm (40 in) 30 x 24 cm
Horizontal Max. Height 102 cm (40 in) 30 x 24 cm

Vertical Min. Height 183 cm (72 in) 30 x 24 cm
Vertical Max. Height 183 cm (72 in) 30 x 24 cm

GE HEALTHCARE
6.11.8 Wall Stand - Size to Size Error
Height of Width of Height WidthE Height Width% Total

Im‐age x Image x Error rror % of of SID Error% of
FOV SID Wall Stand
Mag. Mag. SID Error SID
Factor Factor Error
102 cm Horizontal, Mid.

41x41cm
(40 in) Height
24x24cm
(40 in) Height
18x18cm
(40 in) Height
102 cm Vertical, Mid.
41x41cm
(40 in) Height
24x24cm
(40 in) Height
18x18cm
(40 in) Height
41x41cm
(72 in) Height
24x24cm
(72 in) Height
18x18cm
(72 in) Height

GE HEALTHCARE

GE HEALTHCARE
Chapter 23 Networking and PACS

Configuration
Section 1.0 Networking and PACs Configuration

Perform Networking and PACs Configuration.
For details on configuring the Network Connections, refer to:
Discovery XR656 Operator Manual 5328340-1EN / Preferences / System / Network Connections
which can be found on the Discovery XR656 Operator Documentation CDROM 5328340-299,
shipped with the system.
1. Provide a copy of the Operator Manual / Preferences / System / Network Connections section to
the customer. Advise the customer that the Network Hosts and DICOM Printers parameters must
be provided before the network hosts and printers can be configured. When the parameters have
been provided, proceed to the next step.
2. Configure Network Hosts:
a. Use the information provided by the customer to enter network host parameters.
b. Perform the C-Echo Test and verify that the test passes for all network hosts.
c. Send test images to each Network Host. Refer to PACS / Image Display Test Image in the
System manual / Calibration section.
3. Configure DICOM Printers:
a. Use the information provided by the customer to enter the DICOM printer parameters.
b. Perform the C-Echo Test and verify that the test passes for all DICOM printers.
c. Send test image(s) to each DICOM printer.
4. If there are any problems with setting up or testing the network hosts or DICOM printers, work
with the hospital IT group to resolve the issue(s).
Chapter 23 - Networking and PACS Configuration Page 497

GE HEALTHCARE
Page 498 Section 1.0 - Networking and PACs Configuration

GE HEALTHCARE
Chapter 24 Demo Images and Operator

Manual
Section 1.0 Install Demo Images and Operator Manual

Install Demo Images and Operator Manual.
Refer to the"Configuration / Installing Demo Images" and "Configuration / Operator Manual (OM)
5402340-1EN Installation" sections which can be found on the Discovery XR656 OM
Documentation CDROM 5402340-299, shipped with the system.
Chapter 24 - Demo Images and Operator Manual Page 499

GE HEALTHCARE
Page 500 Section 1.0 - Install Demo Images and Operator Manual
GE HEALTHCARE
Chapter 25 Operational Checks
Section 1.0 Operational Checks

1.1 General
1.1.1 Preliminary Requirements

No requirements.

• 20 mm Flat field phantom (aluminum) for the collimator rails
• 1/32" copper or other metal plate
1.2 Positioning and Manual Controls

The following checks shall be performed to ensure that the functionality of the OTS, Table,
Wallstand and Remote Control features are operational. Many of these have been already been
verified as functional but not necessarily observed during the calibration activities. Perform the
following checks to ensure all features are functional.
1.2.1 OTS
1. Press each of the manual positioning control buttons and verify the appropriate axis of motion is
enabled and the associated pressed button LED illuminates.
a. Longitudinal
b. Lateral
c. Vertical
d. Column Rotation
e. Tube Angulation
f. All Locks
2. Press the alignment light button on the OTS and verify the positioning lamp and laser illuminate.
3. With the lamp and laser on, verify the laser beam can be blocked with the slide shield.
4. On the collimator, press the alignment light button and verify the positioning lamp and laser
illuminate.
5. On the collimator, press the “M” button repeatedly and verify messages are displayed such as
“Start a new Exam” and current filtration, beam collimation and SID.
6. Press the filtration button and verify you can select 0, .1, .2, and .3 mm of copper.
7. Turn on the alignment lights and verify, using the manual knobs on the collimator, that you can
control the FOV collimation.
8. Verify the collimator displays the changes to the manual FOV size.
9. On the collimator press the “+” and “-“ buttons. Verify the SID value changes and the collimator
automatically adjusts the FOV size. Make sure the alignment lights are on.
10. Observe the Orange lamp is illuminated on the tube indicating low voltage power for cooling fan
operation is present at the tube.
11. On the RCIM press the collimator alignment light button and verify that the alignment light lamp
Chapter 25 - Operational Checks Page 501

GE HEALTHCARE
illuminates at the collimator.
1.2.2 Wallstand
1. Verify the wallstand vertical height can be adjusted using the control handles on both sides.
2. Verify the wallstand receptor can be tilted using the control handle buttons on both sides.
3. Verify the wallstand vertical height can be adjusted using the foot pedals.
4. Verify the wallstand receptor can be manually tilted using the manual tilt switches on both sides
of the receptor housing.
1.2.3 Table
1. Verify the table can be raised and lowered using the foot pedals on both front and back of the
table.
2. Verify the tabletop can be floated using the foot pedals on both front and back of the table.
1.3 Safety Device

The following checks shall be performed to ensure the safety features are functional. If any check
fails then adjustment, repair or replacement must be performed to correct the failing condition.
Reference the System Installation Manual Direction 5343950-1EN for details.
1.3.1 Table
The table has 4 basic safety modes; lateral finger pinch, longitudinal finger pinch, vertical travel
tabletop obstruction sensors, and emergency stop.
1. Raise the table to the maximum height.
2. Press the white table locks button:

a. Verify it is illuminated.
b. Verify the table foot pedals are disabled.
c. Perform this check on both front and rear table locks buttons.
3. Press the white table inhibit button to enable the table (button not illuminated).
4. Press the red Emergency Stop button on the table:

a. Verify the Console displays an Attention Window stating there is an Emergency Stop Condition.
b. Verify Power has been removed from the Table, Wall stand, and OTS. no lights or LEDs
illuminated. No motion possible using the associated subsystem controls.
c. Enable the button under test and verify the console instructs the user to acknowledge to
continue.
d. Verify power is restored to the Table Wall stand and OTS.
e. Test both front and rear red Emergency Stop Buttons.
5. Make sure the table is enabled, white button not illuminated.
6. Test the Lateral Finger Pinch Safety Sensors:

a. Using the table foot pedals, float the table top from the front of the table.
b. Purposefully grab the table top the wrong way as shown on the table top warning label.
Page 502 Section 1.0 - Operational Checks

GE HEALTHCARE
c. Verify a beep tone is heard from the RCIM2.
d. Slowly move the tabletop to the rear.
e. Approximately 3 inches (7.6 cm) from the mechanical travel limit, the table shall disable the
tabletop float by enabling the locks and flashing the table locks button.
f. Perform this check on the rear of the table as well.
7. Test the Longitudinal Finger Pinch Safety switches:

a. At each corner of the floating table top assembly there is a spring-loaded plunger switch. These
4 switches operate in the longitudinal axis.
b. Carefully reach under the table top into the channel as seen from the Head/Foot ends of the
Tabletop. Slide your finger longitudinally toward the center of the table until you contact the safety
switch.
c. Using the table foot pedals, float the tabletop.
d. Press the plunger of the safety switch and verify the following occur:
i. Tabletop locks engage preventing table float.
ii. White table locks button flashes.
iii. Beep tone is heard from RCIM2
e. Perform this check for all 4 safety switches.
8. Test the Table Vertical Interference Switches:

a. Float the tabletop to approximately center both longitudinally and laterally.
b. Using the table foot pedals, start to lower the table.
c. Grab and lift a corner of the tabletop.
d. Verify the following occur:
i. Table vertical motion stops.
ii. The white table locks button flashes.
iii. A loud piercing tone is heard.
e. Perform this check at all 4 corners of the tabletop.
9. URP Table Only

The URP table has an additional set of safety switches for the detector housing to prevent injury or
damage due to detector tracking. On the left and right sides of the detector housing are plates that
activate optical sensors to inhibit detector housing motion.
a. Ensure the white table locks button is not illuminated.
b. Using your hand press both the left and right plates one at a time and observe the following;
i. A beep tone is heard from the RCIM2.
ii. The white table locks button flashes.
iii. The detector housing is allowed to float in the direction of pressure.
1.3.2 Wallstand
Test the Wallstand Tilt Safety Switches. There are 2 basic safety features to protect the patient and
user from a crush hazard when tilting the receptor housing. These are directly behind the pivot point
of the Wallstand arm and receptor housing. There is an upper and lower plate. The upper plate is
located on the top of the Wallstand arm and the lower plate is located under the pivot point, angled
at the front of the Wallstand arm. Each plate has 2 switches, one on the left and right of the
Wallstand arm.
1. Raise the wall stand receptor to a comfortable height.

GE HEALTHCARE
2. Using the tilt buttons on the control handles. start to tilt the receptor housing to the horizontal (+90
degree) position.
3. Press the upper plate on the Wallstand arm (repeat for both left and right switches).
4. Verify the following occur:

a. Vertical to horizontal tilt motion is inhibited.
b. Horizontal to vertical tilt motion is allowed.
c. A beep is heard from the RCIM2.
5. Using the tilt buttons on the control handles start to tilt the receptor housing to the vertical (-20
degree) position.
6. Press the lower plate on the Wallstand arm (repeat for both left and right switches)
7. Verify the following occur:

a. Horizontal to vertical tilt motion is inhibited.
b. Vertical to horizontal tilt motion is allowed.
c. A beep is heard from the RCIM2.
1.3.3 RCIM2
The RCIM2 performs many functions but it basically has one safety feature; the Emergency Stop
button.
1. Press the red Emergency Stop button on the table.
a. Verify the Console displays an Attention Window stating there is an Emergency Stop Condition.
b. Verify power has been removed from the Table, Wallstand, and OTS. no lights or LEDs
illuminated. No motion possible using the associated subsystem controls.
c. Enable the button under test and verify the console instructs the user to acknowledge to continue.
d. Verify power is restored to the Table, Wallstand and OTS
1.4 Lights and LEDs

The following checks shall be performed to ensure that the functionality of the visual indicators of
the OTS, Wallstand and RCIM2 features are operational. Perform the following checks to ensure
all features are functional:
1. Start a Single Energy Exam as follows:

a. Abdomen
b. Table Receptor
c. AEC
d. SID 40 inches (100 cm)
e. Small Focal Spot
f. 40 kV and 10 mA
g. All other parameters are 'do not care'.

GE HEALTHCARE
2. Adjust the kV and mA down until a beep is heard from the RCIM.
3. At the OTS UIF press the Detents button and verify the Detent LED illuminates.
4. While positioning the OTS to the table, observe the system provides tactile feedback to the user
when a detent is achieved in the following axis of motion:
a. Column rotation
b. Lateral position
c. Vertical height (SID)
d. Tube angulation
5. Position the OTS over the table and observe the following LED indicators illuminate or extinguish
when using the manual positioning control buttons:
a. Inhibit LED is ON until all interlocks/inhibits have been satisfied.
b. Lateral Detent LED OFF until detent is achieved, then ON.
c. SID LED OFF until correct SID is achieved, then ON.
d. Exposure LED OFF until all inhibits and interlocks have been satisfied, then ON.
6. With all interlocks satisfied and no inhibits, Exposure Enable LED is ON, rotate the collimator out
of its detent. Verify the following:
a. Exposure Enable LED is OFF.
b. Inhibit LED is ON.
c. OTS UIF Exposure Hold Icon is displayed and informs the user of the inhibit condition when
pressed.
7. Return the collimator to the correct detent position.
8. Turn the key switch on the left rear of the OTS UIF to the OVERRIDE position. Verify the manual
collimator LED and the Exposure Enable LED are both flashing.
9. Return the key switch to its normal position, OVERRIDE is off.
10. At the OTS UIF press the Detents button and verify the Detent LED turns OFF.
11. Manually move the OTS away from the table and change the column rotation and tube
angulation arbitrarily.
12. At the RCIM2 press and hold the Auto Positioning button. Verify the following:
a. The OTS first movement was to raise the tube vertically.
b. The OTS then positioned itself over the table.
c. A beep was heard at the RCIM2 when Auto Positioning was completed.
d. The OTS UIF SID, Lateral Position detent and Exposure Enable LEDs are illuminated, other
LEDs are OFF.
e. The RCIM2 has only the Power On LED illuminated.

GE HEALTHCARE
13. Take an Exposure and Observe the following: At the RCIM2 the X-ray Exposure Indicator
illuminates and an X-ray exposure tone is heard.
14. At the RCIM2 make the speaker volume minimum using the minus volume control button.
15. Take another X-ray exposure and observe the X-ray tone is not as loud but can still be heard.
16. Return the RCIM2 volume to its previous level.
17. If the Table Grid was installed remove it, if not install it.Observe on the Console Protocol monitor
that the system recognizes when the GRID is installed or not.
18. Observe the Processed Images and ensure no artifacts are observed.
19. Select a Chest AP Protocol with the following setup:

a. AEC.
b. SID 72 inches (180 cm).
c. Small Focal Spot .
d. 40 kV and 10 mA.
e. All other parameters are 'do not care'.
20. Press and hold the Auto Positioning button at the RCIM until auto positioning is completed.
Observe the following:
a. The wallstand display Exposure Enable LED is illuminated.
b. The wallstand display reports the receptor is at 0 degrees tilt angle.
21. Insert each wallstand grid one at a time and verify the system recognizes and reports the correct
grid on the wallstand display.
22. Insert the QAP grid into the wallstand:

a. Observe the wallstand does not report a grid size
b. Observe the Exposure Hold LED is illuminated.
c. Observe the Exposure Enable LED is OFF.
23. Remove the QAP grid and install the 180 cm wallstand grid about half way. Observe the
wallstand display, Exposure Hold LED is illuminated meaning the system recognizes the grid is not
fully inserted.
24. Turn the key switch on the left rear of the OTS UIF to the OVERRIDE position. Verify the manual
collimator LED and the Exposure Enable LED are both flashing on the wallstand display as well as
the OTS UIF.
25. Return the key switch to its normal position, OVERRIDE is off.
26. Using the Remote Control verify the following can be performed:
a. Wallstand receptor tilt angle

GE HEALTHCARE
b. Wallstand receptor vertical height adjustment.
c. Collimator alignment light ON/OFF
d. Collimator FOV selection
e. OTS Home Park Position
f. OTS Wallstand Auto Positioning
g. OTS Table Auto Positioning
27. Close the Single Energy Exam.
1.4.1 RCIM2 Tube Over-Heat Indicator

To perform this operational check, a GE FE with Class M Proprietary Access is required to alter the
system configuration. This check can be performed without the assistance of a GE FE however this
means that the tube must manually be heated through repeated exposures until the system reports
a tube over heated condition. The following is the GE FE procedure:
1. Insert the Class M Service Key in the Host PC.
2. Launch the Common Service Desktop.
3. Turn VA SITE to YES in the Configuration General folder.
4. Click on the Commit button.
5. Enter 99 in the Tube HUR Alarm field found in the Configuration Generator Folder.
6. Click on the Commit button.
7. Reset the system using the RCIM2 reset button.
8. When the system is booted, start an exam and make several exposures.Observe the Tube
Overheat Indicator on the RCIM2 illuminates and a continuous tone is heard when the system
recognizes the alarm threshold has been reached.
9. When the check is completed, return the system configuration to a value of 20 % Tube HUR
Alarm or the original value and change VA setting to the original state as needed. Make sure
Commit is pressed within each screen and a system reset is performed.
1.5 Purchased Advanced Applications

The purpose of this section is to ensure the Customer Purchased applications are functional. For
each option that is enabled in the Options Configurations tab in the Service desktop, you need to
perform that feature. For example, if Wallstand Cross Table VolumeRad is enabled then you must
perform both a Wallstand VolumeRad and a Wallstand Cross Table VolumeRad exam to ensure
full functionality. Refer to the Operators Manual for details if needed.

GE HEALTHCARE
1.6 Ion Chambers
1. Select Upper Extremity, Hand PA, Med Adult.
2. Select AEC.
3. Select 80 kVp.
4. Select 41x41 cm FOV.
5. Select 25 mA.
NOTE: 1/32” of copper increases the exposure mAs by a factor of 2 to 4. Other blocking materials
will result in a different mAs increase.
NOTE: Leave the 20 mm Flat field phantom (aluminum) in the collimator rails for all the following
exposures.
6. 3 Field Ion Chamber - Wallstand and Table, 100 cm SID (repeat for both Wallstand and Table):
a. Select the center cell only, 20 mm Flat field phantom in collimator rails. Take an exposure.
Record the mAs ____________
b. Select the center cell only, block the center cell with 1/32" copper or other metal plate. Take
an exposure. Verify that the mAs increased.
c. Select the left cell only, 20 mm Flat field phantom. Take an exposure. Record the
mAs____________
d. Select the left cell only, block the left cell with 1/32" copper or other metal plate. Take an
exposure. Verify that the mAs increased.
e. Select the right cell only, 20 mm Flat field phantom. Take an exposure. Record the
mAs____________
f. Select the right cell only, block the right cell with 1/32" copper or other metal plate. Take an
7. 4 Field Ion Chamber - Wallstand Vertical, 100 cm SID:

mAs____________
mAs____________
8. 4 Field Ion Chamber - Wallstand Horizontal, 100 cm SID:


GE HEALTHCARE
mAs____________
mAs____________

GE HEALTHCARE

GE HEALTHCARE
Chapter 26 Apply International Labels
Section 1.0 Apply International Labels

1.1 Apply Safety Labels
If this system is being installed in a non-English speaking country, installation of the safety labels
with the appropriate language on top of the existing or in place of the English labels is required. New
labels need to be placed on the:
• OTS UIF
• Workstation Keyboard
• Table Top
• Lateral Support Bar
• Collimator
• RCIM
NOTE: Labels for the OTS UIF, Workstation Keyboard and Collimator will be provided in a label kit,
P/N 5314288. Labels for the Table Top, Lateral Support Bar and RCIM come with those
components.
Procedure
1. Clean the surface of the English label with alcohol.
2. Wait at least 2 minutes for the area to dry.
3. Apply the location AND language specific label on top of the English label according to Table 25-
1 and Illustration 24-1 through Illustration 24-6.
Chapter 26 - Apply International Labels Page 511

GE HEALTHCARE
Lable Location and Part Number
Language Location
These labels are part of kit 5314288 These labels come with the related components
OTS UIF Keyboard Collimator Table Top Lat Bar RCIM Cabinet
Danish (Denmark) 5234953-2 5757575-17 5291068 This label kit This label kit This label kit This label is in
(5316204) is part (5161967) is part (5309684) is part the kit
Portuguese 5234953-3 5757575-3 5291068-2
of the Tabletop of the Lat Bar Main of the RCIM2 and 5400528(Ever
Czech 5234953-4 5757575-4 5291068-3 est System
Assembly Assembly Local Language
Dutch 5234953-5 5757575-5 5291068-4 Rating Plate
5199338 5262332 Kit 5309698 Multi-
Swedish 5234953-6 5757575-6 5291068-5 Language) or
Norwegian 5234953-7 5757575-7 5291068-6 5401218(Ever
est System
Finnish 5234953-8 5757575-8 5291068-7
Name Plate
Lithuanian 5234953-9 5757575-9 5291068-8 for US)
Russian 5234953-10 5757575-10 5291068-9
Polish 5234953-11 5757575-11 5291068-10
Greek 5234953-12 5757575-12 5291068-11
Turkish 5234953-13 5757575-13 5291068-12
Slovakian 5234953-14 5757575-14 5291068-13
Korean 5234953-15 5757575-15 5291068-14
French 5234953-16 5757575-16 5291068-15
German 5234953-17 5757575-2 5291068-16
Italian 5234953-18 5757575-18 5291068-17
Spanish 5234953-19 5757575-19 5291068-18
Portuguese 5234953-20 5757575-20 5291068-19
(Latin America)
Latvian 5234953-21 5757575-21 5291068-20
Hungarian 5234953-22 5757575-22 5291068-21
Romanian 5234953-23 5757575-23 5291068-22
Chinese 5234953-24 5757575-24 5291068-23
Japanese 5234953-25 5757575-25 5291068-24
Spanish (Latin 5234953-26 5757575-26 5291068-25
Ameri‐ca)
Estonian 5234953-27 5757575-27 5291068-26
Table 26-1 Label Locations and Part Numbers
Illustration 24-1: OTS UIF Label Location
Page 512 Section 1.0 - Apply International Labels

GE HEALTHCARE
Illustration 24-2: Keyboard Label Location
Illustration 24-3: Table Top Label Location

GE HEALTHCARE
Illustration 24-4: Lateral Bar Label Location
Illustration 24-5: Collimator Label Location
Illustration 24-6: RCIM Label Location

GE HEALTHCARE
1.2 Apply Korean Rating Plate
• For Korean sites, kit 5329402 contains rating plate labels in the Korean language that must be
added alongside the other language labels that are currently installed on the top of the System
Cabinet. Although numerous identical labels may be included, only 1 label needs to be placed on
the system. Any extra labels may be discarded.
• The Korean Rating Plate Label (Illustration 24-7) should be applied at the location shown
(Illustration 24-8).
• Clean the area where the label will be applied with isopropyl alcohol. Ensure the alcohol has
dried completely before applying the label.
Illustration 24-7: Korean Rating Plate Label
Illustration 24-8: Apply Korean Rating Plate Label to System Cabinet

GE HEALTHCARE
1.3 Apply Turkey Rating/Name Plate
• For Turkey sites, 5400528/5401218 contains rating plate labels in the Turkey language that must
be added alongside the other language labels that are currently installed on the top of the System
Cabinet. Although numerous identical labels may be included, only 1 Rating/Name Plate label
needs to be placed on the system. Any extra Rating Plate labels may be discarded.
There is a Turkey Importer Label in 5400528/5401218, please add this label alongside the
Rating/Name Plate.
• The Turkey Rating Plate Label (Illustration 24-9) and Turkey Importer Label (Illustration 24-10)
should be applied at the location shown (Illustration 24-11).
• Clean the area where the label will be applied with isopropyl alcohol. Ensure the alcohol has
dried completely before applying the label.
Illustration 24-9: Turkey Rating Plate/Name Plate Label
Illustration 24-10: Turkey Importer Label
Illustration 24-8: Apply Turkey Rating Plate/Name Plate Label and Turkey Importer Label to
System Cabinet

GE HEALTHCARE
Chapter 27 Final Tasks
Section 1.0 Final Tasks

• Back up system database
• Back up protocol database
• Program remote control
• Install remote control holder
• Install URP detector battery charger
• Final Administrative Tasks
• System Rating Plates
1.2 Database Backup

Perform complete database backup. Refer to Software Chapter, System Data, Backup and Restore
Section in System Installation Manual 5343950-1EN which can be found on the Discovery XR656
Service Documentation CDROM 5343956-2EN, shipped with the system.
1.3 Program Remote Control

1. Launch the Service Desktop.
2. Select Calibrations
3. Select Positioner
4. Select Auto Positions.
5. Select Remote Control.
6. Follow instructions on the screen to program P1 and P2 positions.
Illustration 25-1: Remote Control
Chapter 27 - Final Tasks Page 517

GE HEALTHCARE
1.4 Install Remote Control Holder
Illustration 25-2: Remote Control Holder
1.5 Install URP Detector battery charger
1.6 Final Administrative Tasks

1. Ready system for normal customer operation.
2. Remove trash, remove installation equipment and tools, clean up room and store service
manuals.
3. Fill out Product Locator Cards and return them. Refer to Section 1.8.
4. Record installation time in Service database.
Page 518 Section 1.0 - Final Tasks

GE HEALTHCARE
1.7 System Rating Plates
Note: Labels for reference only that will be pasted in arrow position, so rely on existing objects.
Illustration 25-4: System Rating Plate Locations
OTS Rating Plate

GE HEALTHCARE

GE HEALTHCARE

GE HEALTHCARE
Item System Component Model Number Location

1 Bridge 5127305 Top of rear endcap.
Overhead Tube Suspension 5135678-3
2 Rear of largest column.
(OTS) or 5135678-4
3 X-ray Tube Casing MX100 46-155400G285 Rear of X-ray tube.
09PS
X-ray Tube Insert .6-1.25
12.5 degree MX100 2336058 Rear of X-ray tube.
4 Collimator 5234954 Rear of collimator.
5 Workstation PC (Z400) 5810000-2 Top front of PC
Everest System Name Plate 5401218
for US
Top of unit, on right side towards
6 System Cabinet 5397035
front.
7 Jedi 80 Rad 1T 2374870 Top of unit, on right side
towards front. Also inside
system cabinet, on left side
of Jedi Control Assembly.
Jedi HV Tank 2186730 Inside system cabinet, on
front of Jedi HV Tank
8 Radiographic Table 5399738 Left side,
9 Table Ion Chamber 5143310 Inside table detector housing.
10 System Label for China 5400528 Top of cabinet unit
5374989 (standard arm)
11
Wall Stand 5397837 (extended arm) Left side of carriage.
5143310 (3-cell) Inside wall stand detector
12
Wall Stand Ion Chamber 5261064 (4-cell) housing
13 FlashPad Detector (URP) 5340000-3 Top of unit.
14 Tether Interface Box 5394349 Under cover, on right side
15 Detector BIN 5394348 Under cover, on right side
Flexi-DT Table (purchaseable On lower frame, behind right-
- 5194670
option) front wheel.
Table 27-1 Discovery XR656 Rating Plates

GE HEALTHCARE
Chapter 28 Appendix A Alternative Methods
Section 1.0 Alternative Methods

1.1 Inboard Rail Length Modifications
If rail mounting bolt holes do not match the holes in the overhead structure (rail supports), Unistrut
part number P1000T or Halfen equivalent could be installed to provide correct stationary rail-torail
support, mounting hole alignment.
PROCEDURE
BEFORE CUTTING THE STATIONARY RAILS, VERIFY THAT EACH OF THE

STATIONARY RAIL HOLE LOCATIONS MATCH THE UNISTRUT SPACING.
1. Determine new rail length and scribe the rails with a scribe.
2. If present, remove the end cap and bumper from both ends of the stationary rail. These parts
can be discarded, as they are not used on this system. See Illustration A-1.
Illustration A-1: End Cap and Bumper Mounting
3. Starting with rear rail, shorten wear strip as follows. See Illustration A-2.
a. Score the hardened wear strip with a file, 1/4” (6.35 mm) shorter than the rail is to be cut.Pry the
end of the wear strip loose and break off excess wear strip.Do not confuse this procedure with the
procedure for modifying the bridge rails that are responsible for lateral XT movement.
b. Clean wear strip mounting surface with alcohol, and re-bond wear strip using Armstrong D220
cement.
Chapter 28 - Appendix A Alternative Methods Page 523

GE HEALTHCARE
Illustration A-2: Wear Strip Modification
4. Cut lock strip (for rear rail only) as follows. See Illustration A-3.
Illustration A-3: Lock Strip Modification
a. Remove 8-32 screws holding lock strip on rail end to be shortened. See Illustration A-3.
b. Pry lock strip loose.
c. Scribe mark the lock strip 8" (20.3 cm) shorter than rail is to be cut, and cut lock strip.
d. Drill and countersink a No. 18 clearance hole (4.3 mm) for an 8-32 flat head screw, 1" (2.54 m)
from cut end of lock strip.
e. Using hole in lock strip as a guide, drill a No. 29 / 3/32 inch hole (3.5 mm) in rail and tap hole
with 8-32 tap. See Illustration A-3.
f. Completely clean out drill chips.
g. Reinstall 8-32 screws holding lock strip.
5. Cut rail to proper length, ensuring end is square.
6. Step-drill a 3/4” (1.9 cm) hole in the top (a) or the side (b) of the rail, depending on mounting
method of inboard or outboard rail. See Illustration A-4.
Page 524 Section 1.0 - Alternative Methods

GE HEALTHCARE
Illustration A-4: Stationary Rail Modifications
7. Modify front rail as outlined above.
1.2 Rail Leveling Procedures (Water-Level or Transit)
Bubble levels are NOT accurate enough to obtain a 1/32" (0.8 mm) tolerance.
1.2.1 Using a Water-Level Kit

1. Slide open the battery door on the back of the unit and connect a 9 volt alkaline battery. Use an
alkaline battery only. The use of a non-alkaline or heavy-duty battery will cause unit to
malfunction.
2. Attach a 30’ (9.14 m) clear plastic 3/8” (9.5 mm) I.D. tube to the connector on the bottom of the
water-level case.To meet any room installation requirement, greater than 30’ (9.14 m) of tubing
can be used with the water-level unit. The greater the distance from the water-level case (i.e.,
longer lengths of tube), the more time that must be allowed for the water line to damp (i.e. reach
equilibrium).
3. Prepare 3 cups of water solution containing 1/8 teaspoon of salt and enough food color to
enable the water level to be seen more easily.
4. Remove the plug from the short tube on the water-level case side.
5. Fill the long plastic tube with water solution. See Illustration A-5.

GE HEALTHCARE
Illustration A-5: Filling Water-level with Liquid
a. Place the free end of the long plastic tube in the water solution container and elevate the
container.
b. Place the water-level case below the level of the water solution container.
c. Siphon water solution into the long plastic tube by sucking on the short tube on the waterlevel
case side.
d. Fill the long plastic tube until the water solution level is slightly below the water-level case.
6. Insert plugs into both the short and long free tube ends to prevent loss of water.
7. Mount both stationary rails in place using all bolts and then tighten the bolts. There must be a
minimum of 2" (5.1 cm) between the ends of the stationary rails and the wall.
8. Tape a six (6) foot or a two (2) meter flexible steel scale to a support rod to stiffen the scale or
tape the zero scale end of a six (6) foot or a two (2) meter flexible steel scale to a stationary rail.
See Illustration A-6.
Illustration A-6: Stationary Rail (End View of Rail)
9. If using the steel scale with a support rod, hold the tape scale and rod assembly up against the
bottom of the stationary rail surface.
10. Mount the water-level case in an upright position with the reference line on the side of the case
at some convenient position above the lower end of the tape scale. To insure that the instrument

GE HEALTHCARE
remains plumb, secure the top and both sides of the water-level case in position.See Illustration A-
7.
Illustration A-7: Mount Water-level Case
11. Lay out the plastic tube and remove any knots or kinks. Check to make sure that there are no
air bubbles in the tube. Air bubbles will cause inaccurate readings.To remove air bubbles, remove
the plugs from the long tube free end and from the short tube end on the instrument case. Hold the
long tube below the water-level case (at about a 45 degree angle), until a small amount of water
flows from the long free tube end. All bubbles should be gone.
12. With both plugs removed, bring the free end of the long tube alongside the same tube at the
mounted water-level case. See Illustration A-8. Verify that the water line in the long plastic tube
settles at an equal level at both tubes ends. If the level is not equal, check for air bubbles in the
tube and remove.
Illustration A-8: Verify Water Lines are Level
13. To measure the number of shims required, hold the tape scale and rod assembly or tape the
flexible scale up against the stationary rail bottom at each bolt location.
14. Turn ON the water-level switch.
15. With both plugs still removed, slowly raise the long tube free end along with the scale and rod
assembly up against the ceiling steelwork at any mounting location. Adjust the water line (up or
down) at the long tube free end until the buzzer first sounds. See Illustration A-9.

GE HEALTHCARE
Illustration A-9: Water Line Adjustment
16. Take readings at each mounting bolt location and record these readings. This allows you to
determine the lowest bottom point of the stationary rails. This is the reference value. Calculate the
difference between this reference value and the other bolt locations greater than 1/32” (0.8 mm).
Use these difference calculations to determine height and number of shims required at each bolt
hole location.Shims will be required and placed at all points with a calculated difference of greater
than 1/32” (0.8 mm).
17. When all measurements have been recorded, turn OFF the water-level switch and replace the
plugs at both the long tube free end and at the short tube on the water-level case side.
18. Proceed to Chapter 5, Overhead Stationary Rails, Rail and Shim Installation.
1.2.2 Using a Transit (Alternate Method)

1. Mount both stationary rails in place using all bolts and then tighten bolts.
2. Set up a transit (builder's level) in the center of the area encompassed by the rails. See
Illustration A-10.Level the transit according to the instructions supplied with the instrument.

GE HEALTHCARE
Illustration A-10: Checking Rail Supports with Transit (Alternate Method)
3. Tape a six (6) foot or a two (2) meter flexible steel scale to a support rod to stiffen the scale or
tape the zero scale end of a six (6) foot or a two (2) meter flexible steel scale to a stationary rail.
See Illustration A-6.
4. To measure the number of shims required, move the scale and hold up to (or tape to) the
stationary rail at each bolt location. See Illustration A-10.
5. View the scale through the transit. Recheck transit level at each bolt location and re-level if
necessary.
6. Take readings at each mounting bolt location and record these readings. This allows you to
determine the lowest bottom point of the stationary rails. This is the reference value. Calculate the
difference between this reference value and the other bolt locations greater than 1/32” (0.8mm).
Use these difference calculations to determine height and number of shims required at each bolt
hole location.Shims will be required and placed at all points with calculated differences greater
than 1/32” (0.8 mm).
7. Proceed to Chapter 5, Overhead Stationary Rails, Rail and Shim Installation.
1.3 Modifying the Bridge Length
Modifying bridge length is NOT recommended by GE Healthcare Engineering. If

modification of the bridge is required, YOU MUST CHECK WITH YOUR INSTALLATION
SPECIALIST (PMI). Confirm that the length you desire will not limit your ability to purchase
future product options or upgrades (i.e. VolumeRAD).
The bridge can only be cut between the front end of the bridge and the front bridge tie. It should
NOT be cut between the bridge ties because it would change the distance between the stationary
rails. It should NOT be cut between the rear bridge tie and the rear of the bridge because the rear
bridge tie is used by the bridge manufacturer as the reference to ensure squareness of the bridge
1. Remove end cap.
2. Pry hardened wear strip loose, score with file, and break off 3" shorter than rails are to be cut.Do
not confuse this procedure with the procedure for modifying the stationary rails.

GE HEALTHCARE
3. Cut rails square and of equal length.
4. Chamfer end of rails so that end cap will fit.
5. Re-bond wear strip.
6. Place end cap on rails and use as template to drill (3) new holes in each rail.
7. Replace end cap and mount with original hardware.
Illustration A-11: OTS Bridge Length Modification
1.4 Table Top Installation (Alternate Method)
1. Remove the front and rear bearing rails from the table top carriage. See Illustration A-12 and
Illustration A-13. The front rail has horizontal rollers for lateral alignment.
Illustration A-12: Bearing Rails
Illustration A-13: Bearing Rail Mounting Bolts
2. Insert the removed bearing rails into the rail slots on either side of the table top. Keep the top

GE HEALTHCARE
side of rail towards the top of table top and large vertical bearing to the outside of table.
3. Carefully pick up the table top while keeping the bearing rails from sliding down the rail slots and
pinching your fingers.
4. Position the top over the table top carriage with the front bearing rail (with horizontal rollers)to
the front of the table.
5. Lower top onto carriage, while aligning bearing rails with the table top carriage.
6. Slide the top towards either end and expose the bearing rail mounting holes. Keep extended
end supported.
7. Insert and lightly tighten the (4) mounting bolts (2/per rail). See Illustration A-13.
8. Slide the table top towards the magnetic locks and collision sensor switches.
9. Depress the two magnetic locks (rotate to allow up/down movement) and the actuators of the
two table top collision sensor switches. See Illustration A-14.
Illustration A-14: Table Top Installation
10. Slide the table top towards the opposite end to expose the other mounting holes.
11. Install the other mounting bolts and align the end and outer edge of the rail with the
carriage.See Illustration A-14.
12. Tighten the four exposed mounting bolts.
13. Carefully slide the table top over the magnetic locks and collision sensor switches to expose
the first mounting bolts.
14. Depress the two magnetic locks (rotate to allow up/down movement) and actuators of the (2)
table top collision sensor switches. See llustration A-14.
15. Repeat the alignment process for the first end and tighten the four exposed mounting bolts.
16. Install the bumper to prevent the top from accidentally moving beyond the end bearings. See
Illustration A-15.
Illustration A-15: Table Bumper Installation

GE HEALTHCARE

GE HEALTHCARE
Chapter 29 Appendix B Options Installation
Section 1.0 Installation of Options

1.1 Image Pasting Barrier 5134183-40
1.1.1 Summary Checklist

• Unpack Image Pasting Barrier (MI task)
• Final wall stand alignment complete (FE task). Refer to Chapter 20 Calibration and Alignment
• Align template to Detector Housing (FE task)
• Drill holes and mount receptor brackets (FE task
1.1.2 Required Tools

• Electric Hammer Drill
• 30mm (1.18")Mansory Drill Bits as proposal (See Figure1)
• 6mm(1/4”)Mansory Drill Bits
• Small Vacuum
• Safety Glasses, Earplugs, Gloves
Figure1: The diameter is 24mm (0.94”) and 30mm (1.18”) Masonry Drill Bit as proposal
1.1.3 Procedure
Before you begin:

USING THE ELECTRIC HAMMER DRILL MUST FOLLOW EHS REQUIREMENT OF
Chapter 29 - Appendix B Options Installation Page 533

GE HEALTHCARE
GEHC COMPANY.
THE IMAGE PASTING BARRIER MOUNTING HOLES MUST NOT BE DRILLED
UNTIL THE FINAL WALLSTAND ALIGNMENT (Chapter 20 Calibration and
Alignment)HAS BEEN COMPLETED BY THE LOCAL FIELD ENGINEER.
1. Unpack image pasting barrier and find the attachment(Figure 2)
Figure 2-Attachments
2. Power up the system (See Chapter 1 Safety and Service).

3. Rotate the detector assembly to the 0 degree position (Figure 3).
Figure 3- Detector Assembly in 0 Degree Position
4. Move the detector assembly to the bottom of vertical travel.

5. Place the Image Pasting Barrier Drilling Template (Figure 4) on the floor and align
the template to the detector patient barrier center line as shown (Figure 5 and Figure
5a). The template will touch detector housing and the alignment slot will contain the
line when the template is properly aligned. See Figure 6 and Figure 7 for correct and
incorrect placement of the template.
Page 534 Section 1.0 - Installation of Options

GE HEALTHCARE
Figure 4 - Drilling Template
Figure 5 and Figure 5a – Image Pasting Barrier Drilling Template Alignment
NOTE: DO NOT DRILL HOLES UNTIL FINAL WALLSTAND ALIGNMENT IS DONE.
Figure 6 - Drilling Template - Correct Replacement

GE HEALTHCARE
Figure 7- Drilling Template - Incorrect Placement
6. With the template in place, mark (2) holes, remove drill template, use the plate to mark (2) holes
(with the diameter 24mm) and use a 6mm (1/4") drill bit to drill a pilot hole 50mm (2”) deep. Repeat
for the other side.(See Figure 8 and Figure 8a)
Figure 8 – Use the plate to mark (2) holes
Figure 8a– Drill a pilot hole
7. Raise the detector assembly away from the work area.

8. Using the pilot hole as a guide, drill a 25mm (1”) diameter, 50mm (2”) deep hole with 25mm (1”)
Masonry Drill Bit. Repeat for the other side.
9. Place the receptor brackets into the 25mm (1”) holes.

GE HEALTHCARE
10. With receptor brackets in holes, wheel barrier over receptor brackets.Extend floor lock locking
pins into receptor brackets. With pins engaged and using each receptor bracket as a template,
mark onto floor (3) 6mm (1/4”) holes surrounding the center hole (Figure 9). Meanwhile, the slot
direction of the slotted receptor brackets must be as shown. See Figure 10a, Figure 10b and Figure
10c for correct and incorrect direction of the slot.
Figure 9 – Extend floor lock locking pins into Receptor Brackets and mark (3) holes
11. Drill the two sets of (3) marked 6mm (1/4”) holes, 50mm (2”) deep.
12. Insert (3) plastic anchors into each of the 6mm (1/4”) holes. Ensure these are flush to the floor.

GE HEALTHCARE
13. Place receptor brackets back into 25mm (1”) diameter, 50mm (2”) deep holes in floor and
correct direction as shown in Figure 10a.
Figure 10a – Receptor Bracket---Correct Direction

GE HEALTHCARE
NOTE:The receptor brackets plugs should be placed into the receptor brackets to prevent
debris from falling into the holes when the Image Pasting Barrier is not in use.(Figure 11)
Figure 11 –The Receptor Brackets plug placed into the Receptor Bracket
14. Install the 3 screws through each receptor bracket and into the mounting anchors (Figure
12a),tighten the screws for the long hole Receptor Bracket (Figure 12) and confirm it the correct
direction as shown in Figure 10a.
Figure 12 – The long hole Receptor Bracket
Figure 12a –Install the 3 screws through each Receptor Bracket and into the mounting
anchors
15. Wheel the barrier over to the receptor brackets and confirm that the barrier locking pins align
with the receptor brackets.
a.) If alignment is acceptable, tighten one screw, then remove the barrier slowly and finish tightening
the remainder of the screws for the non-slotted receptor bracket.

GE HEALTHCARE
b.) If the barrier locking pins do not align with the receptor brackets:
i.) Remove the barrier
ii.) Unscrew screws in non-slotted receptor brackets, leaving the receptor brackets
in the hole.
iii.) Bring the barrier back over the receptor brackets and engage the barrier pins.
iv.) Rotate the non-slotted receptor brackets 180 degrees and mark the locations for
three new mounting holes.
v.) Drill three new holes and mount the receptor bracket in place.
16. Once the receptor brackets are secured, the barrier may be rolled into position and the pins
locked into the receptor brackets. Press on both of the side foot pedals to lock the barrier into place.
This locks the barrier in a stationary position. Barrier must be locked into the receptor brackets prior
to patient use. Failure to properly lock the barrier in place via the receptor brackets may result in
injury.
1.2 Image Pasting Barrier 5134183-10
1.2.1 Summary Checklist

• Unpack Image Pasting Barrier
• Final wall stand alignment complete. Refer to Chapter 19, Software, Calibration, Alignment,
Options section.
• Align drilling template to detector patient barrier
• Mark set of image pasting barrier mounting holes on floor
• Drill holes and mount receptor brackets
• Attach measurement labels to handles and base
1.2.2 Required Tools

• Electric Hammer Drill
• 1/4", 1/2”, 3/4”, 1” Masonry Drill Bits
• Small Vacuum
• Safety Glasses, Earplugs, Gloves
1.2.3 Procedure
THE IMAGE PASTING BARRIER MOUNTING HOLES MUST NOT BE DRILLED

UNTIL THE FINAL WALLSTAND ALIGNMENT (Chapter 19, Software, Calibration,Alignment,
Options) HAS BEEN COMPLETED.
1. Power up the system.

2. Rotate the detector assembly to the 0 degree position. See Illustration B-1.

GE HEALTHCARE
Illustration B-1: Detetctor Assembly in 0 Degree Position
3. Move the detector assembly to the bottom of vertical travel.
4. Place the metal Image Pasting Barrier drilling template (Illustration B-4) on the floor and align
the template to the detector patient barrier center line. See Illustration B-2 (correct position) and
Illustration B-3 (wrong position). The template will touch the patient barrier and the alignment slot
will contain the line when the template is properly aligned
Illustration B-2: Image Pasting Barrier Drilling Template - Correct Position
Illustration B-3: Image Pasting Barrier Drilling Template - Wrong Position
5. The template has two sets of mounting holes:

GE HEALTHCARE
○ one pair of holes for an Image Pasting Barrier with a removable footstool
○ one pair of holes for an Image Pasting Barrier without a removable footstool
Use the appropriate pair of mounting holes for the Image Pasting Barrier you have.
6. With the template in place, use a 6 mm drill bit to drill a pilot hole. Repeat for the other side.
7. Remove the template.

Illustration B-4: Image Pasting Barrier Drilling Template
8. Raise the detector assembly away from the work area.
9. Use the 1/2” and 3/4” bits to slowly enlarge the center hole, finishing with the 1" bit. The center
hole is 2" deep. Repeat for the other side.
10. Center the adjuster plates (Illustration B-5) over the newly created center holes.
Illustration B-5: Receptor Bracket & Plug and Adjuster Plate
11. Mark the three 6 mm holes surrounding the center hole using the adjuster plate as a template.

GE HEALTHCARE
12. Remove the adjuster plates and drill the six 6 mm holes just marked.
13. Insert the 6 plastic anchors into the 6 mm mounting holes in the floor.
14. On the receptor brackets, back out the 3 adjustment set screws until the end of each set screw
is even with the bottom surface of the receptor bracket.
15. Insert the metal pin on the receptor brackets (Illustration B-5) through the adjuster plates, into
the 1" holes, and align with the 3 mounting holes.
16. Install the 3 screws through each receptor bracket & adjuster plate and into the mounting
holes, but do not completely tighten.
17. Wheel the barrier (see Illustration below) over to the receptor brackets and confirm that the
barrier locking pins align with the receptor brackets. (Press on both of the side foot pedals to lock
the barrier into place.)
Illustration B-6: Image Pasting Barrier
a. If the alignment is acceptable, tighten the screws you have access to, then remove the
barrier and finish tightening the rest of the screws.
b. If the barrier locking pins do not align with the receptor brackets:
i. Remove the barrier.

ii. Unscrew 1 set of receptor screws, leaving the receptor bracket in the hole.
iii. Bring the barrier back over the receptor brackets and engage the barrier pins.
iv. Measure the distance between the barrier and the wall stand on both sides. Align the
barrier so that both measurements are equal.
v. Rotate the receptor bracket 60 degrees and mark the locations for three new mounting holes.
vi. Drill three new holes and mount the receptor bracket into place.
18. There are 3 leveling set screws on each receptor bracket. You will only level the receptor
brackets if the floor is so severely out of level that the barrier pins cannot be inserted into the

GE HEALTHCARE
receptor brackets.
NOTE: Once the receptor brackets are installed, plugs (Illustration B-5) should be placed into the
receptor bracket to prevent debris from falling into the holes when the Image Pasting Barrier is not
in use.
19. There are 3 leveling set screws on each receptor bracket. You will only level the receptor
brackets if the floor is so severely out of level that the barrier pins cannot be inserted into the
receptor brackets.
20. Install the Image Pasting Barrier measurement labels as follows:
NOTE:
○ The labels give a measurement of the distance between the center of the patient and the mylar
surface. As such, the labels should be attached so that the lower numbers are closer to the mylar
surface.
○ Before placing the labels, clean the sides of the lateral arm bars and the recessed area in the
footstand base with glass cleaner, non-abrasive household surface cleaner or soap and water. Dry
thoroughly.
a. Install the footstand labels:
■ The footstand labels are the wider labels.
■ Based on the customer's preference, select the metric or english measurement labels.
■ Place the labels in the recessed areas on the footstand base with the lower numbered ends
closest to the mylar surface. See Illustration B-7.
Illustration B-7: Footstand Labels
b. Install the lateral arm labels (these labels may already be factory-installed):
■ The lateral arm labels are the narrower labels.
■ These should go on the sides of the lateral arms when the arms are rotated all the way down as
shown in Illustration B-8.

GE HEALTHCARE
Illustration B-8: Lateral Arm Labels
■ To gauge the position along the arm for the label, the 45 cm mark should be 25 mm or 1 inch
from the end of the arm as shown in Illustration B-9.
Illustration B-9: Lateral Arm Label Placement
■ If not using the metric mark, the 18-inch mark should be ¾ of an inch from the end of the arm.

GE HEALTHCARE

ay
Xr
GE HEALTHCARE
NO.1, YONGCHANG NORTH ROAD
ECONOMIC & TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENT ZONE
FAX: 86-10-67881850
TELE: 86-10-58068888
548
BEIJING, P. R. CHINA 100176

Discovery XR656 Installation Manual IM 5343950-1EN 13

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Discovery XR656 Installation Manual IM 5343950-1EN 13

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GE Healthcare

Copyright © 2011-2022 by General Electric Company, Inc. All

Published by the GE Company, Inc.

Legal Notes Page 3

Page 4 Legal Notes

VÝSTRAHA • TENTO PROVOZNÍ NÁVOD EXISTUJE POUZE V ANGLICKÉM JAZYCE.

ADVARSEL • DENNE SERVICEMANUAL FINDES KUN PÅ ENGELSK.

Important Precautions Page 5

WAARSCHUWING • DEZE ONDERHOUDSHANDLEIDING IS ENKEL IN HET ENGELS

• THIS SERVICE MANUAL IS AVAILABLE IN ENGLISH ONLY.

HOIATUS • KÄESOLEV TEENINDUSJUHEND ON SAADAVAL AINULT INGLISE KEELES.

VAROITUS • TÄMÄ HUOLTO-OHJE ON SAATAVILLA VAIN ENGLANNIKSI.

Page 6 Important Precautions

• CE MANUEL DE MAINTENANCE N’EST DISPONIBLE QU’EN ANGLAIS.

WARNUNG • DIESE SERVICEANLEITUNG EXISTIERT NUR IN ENGLISCHER SPRACHE.

ΠΡΟΕΙΔΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ • ΤΟ ΠΑΡΟΝ ΕΓΧΕΙΡΙΔΙΟ ΣΕΡΒΙΣ ΔΙΑΤΙΘΕΤΑΙ ΣΤΑ ΑΓΓΛΙΚΑ ΜΟΝΟ.

(EL) • ΕΑΝ ΤΟ ΑΤΟΜΟ ΠΑΡΟΧΗΣ ΣΕΡΒΙΣ ΕΝΟΣ ΠΕΛΑΤΗ ΑΠΑΙΤΕΙ ΤΟ ΠΑΡΟΝ

FIGYELMEZTETÉS • EZEN KARBANTARTÁSI KÉZIKÖNYV KIZÁRÓLAG ANGOL NYELVEN ÉRHETŐ

Important Precautions Page 7

AÐVÖRUN • ÞESSI ÞJÓNUSTUHANDBÓK ER EINGÖNGU FÁANLEG Á ENSKU.

• IL PRESENTE MANUALE DI MANUTENZIONE È DISPONIBILE

Page 8 Important Precautions

경고 • 본 서비스 지침서는 영어로만 이용하실 수 있습니다.

• 본 서비스 지침서를 참고했고 이해하지 않는 한은 해당 장비를 수리하려고 시도하지

• 이 경고에 유의하지 않으면 전기 쇼크, 기계상의 혹은 다른 위험으로부터 서비스 제공

BRĪDINĀJUMS • ŠĪ APKALPES ROKASGRĀMATA IR PIEEJAMA TIKAI ANGĻU VALODĀ.

ĮSPĖJIMAS • ŠIS EKSPLOATAVIMO VADOVAS YRA PRIEINAMAS TIK ANGLŲ KALBA.

ADVARSEL • DENNE SERVICEHÅNDBOKEN FINNES BARE PÅ ENGELSK.

Important Precautions Page 9

OSTRZEŻENIE • NINIEJSZY PODRĘCZNIK SERWISOWY DOSTĘPNY JEST JEDYNIE W JĘZYKU

ATENÇÃO • ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA SÓ SE ENCONTRA DISPONÍVEL

ATENŢIE • ACEST MANUAL DE SERVICE ESTE DISPONIBIL NUMAI ÎN LIMBA ENGLEZĂ.

Page 10 Important Precautions

ОСТОРОЖНО! • ДАННОЕ РУКОВОДСТВО ПО ОБСЛУЖИВАНИЮ ПРЕДЛАГАЕТСЯ ТОЛЬКО

UPOZORNENIE • TENTO NÁVOD NA OBSLUHU JE K DISPOZÍCII LEN V ANGLIČTINE.

(SK) • AK ZÁKAZNÍKOV POSKYTOVATEĽ SLUŽIEB VYŽADUJE INÝ JAZYK AKO

ATENCION • ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO SOLO EXISTE EN INGLES.

Important Precautions Page 11

VARNING • DEN HÄR SERVICEHANDBOKEN FINNS BARA TILLGÄNGLIG PÅ ENGELSKA.

DİKKAT • BU SERVİS KILAVUZUNUN SADECE İNGİLİZCESİ MEVCUTTUR.

Page 12 Important Precautions

Revision Date Reason for change

5 May.03,2012 IEC V3 Updated

Revision History Page 13

Page 14 List of Effected Pages

List of Effected Pages

PAGES REVISION PAGES REVISION

Revision History Page 15

Page 16 List of Effected Pages

Section 1.0 Important Precautions

1.2 CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT

1.3 IMPORTANT...X-RAY PROTECTION

1.4 LITHIUM BATTERY CAUTIONARY STATEMENTS

1.5 OMISSIONS & ERRORS

Section 2.0 Preface Publication Conventions

2.1 Safety & Hazard Information

2.1.1 Hazard Messages

2.1.2 Text Format of Signal Words

EXAMPLES OF PREFIXES USED FOR GENERAL INFORMATION:

Note: Conveys information that should be considered important to the reader.

3.2 Page Layout

3.3 Computer Screen Output/Input Text Character Styles

Chapter 1 Safety and Service ............................................................................... 39

Table of Contents Page 25